Download pdf - Integral Mount Magnetic Flowmeter System - … Reference Manual 00809-0100-4662, Rev BA August 2007 Rosemount 8732E Integral Mount Magnetic Flowmeter System Reference Manual 00809-0100-4662,

Reference Manual 00809-0100-4662, Rev BA

August 2007

Rosemount 8732EIntegral Mount Magnetic Flowmeter System

www.rosemount.com


August 2007 Rosemount 8732

Integral Mount Magnetic Flowmeter System

NOTICE

Read this manual before working with the product. For personal and system safety, and for

optimum product performance, make sure you thoroughly understand the contents before

installing, using, or maintaining this product.

Rosemount Inc. has two toll-free assistance numbers:

Customer CentralTechnical support, quoting, and order-related questions.

United States - 1-800-999-9307 (7:00 am to 7:00 pm CST)

Asia Pacific- 65 777 8211

Europe/ Middle East/ Africa - 49 (8153) 9390

North American Response CenterEquipment service needs.

1-800-654-7768 (24 hours—includes Canada)

Outside of these areas, contact your local Rosemount representative.

The products described in this document are NOT designed for nuclear-qualified

applications. Using non-nuclear qualified products in applications that require

nuclear-qualified hardware or products may cause inaccurate readings.

For information on Rosemount nuclear-qualified products, contact your local Rosemount

Sales Representative.

www.rosemount.com



Table of Contents

SECTION 1Introduction

System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Service Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

SECTION 2Installation

Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Transmitter Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Pre-Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Mechanical Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Environmental Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Mount the Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Pipe Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Surface Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Identify Options and Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Hardware Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Failure Alarm Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Internal/External Analog Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Transmitter Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Internal/External Pulse Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Changing Hardware Switch Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Conduit Ports and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Conduit Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Electrical Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Transmitter Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Requirements for 90-250 V AC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Requirements for 12-42 V DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Installation Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Overcurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Options, Considerations, and Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Connect Transmitter Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Connect 4–20 mA Loop External Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Connect Pulse Output Power Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Connect Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Connect Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Flowtube Sensor Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Rosemount Flowtube Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Transmitter to

Flowtube Sensor Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Conduit Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Flowtube Sensor to Remote Mount Transmitter Connections . . . 2-18

www.emersonprocess.com/rosemount

Reference Manual00809-0100-4662, Rev BA

August 2007Rosemount 8732

SECTION 3Configuration

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Local Operator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Basic Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Data Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

LOI Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Table Value Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Select Value Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Diagnostic Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Process Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

PV - Primary Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

PV -% Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

PV - Analog Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Totalizer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Totalizer Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Measured Gross Total. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Measured Net Total. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Measured Reverse Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Start Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Stop Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Reset Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Pulse Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Flow Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Primary Variable Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Special Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Line Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

PV URV (Upper Range Value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

PV LRV (Lower Range Value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Calibration Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

PV Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

SECTION 4Operation

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Diagnostic Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Empty Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

High Process Noise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Grounding / Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Electronics Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Basic Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

AO Loop Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Pulse Output Loop Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Empty Pipe Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3


Advanced Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

8714i Calibration Verification™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

4-20 mA Verify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

TOC-2



Diagnostic Variable Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Empty Pipe Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8


Line Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

5 Hz Signal to Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

37 Hz Signal to Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Signal Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

8714i Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Trims. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

D/A Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Scaled D/A Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Digital Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Auto Zero. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Universal Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Advanced Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Detailed Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Additional Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Coil Drive Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

5 Hz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

37 Hz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Density Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

PV Upper Sensor Limit (USL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

PV Lower Sensor Limit (LSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

PV Minimum Span. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Configure Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Pulse Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Digital Input / Digital Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Reverse Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Totalizer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Alarm Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

HART Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

LOI Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Flowrate Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Totalizer Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Display Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Signal Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Operating Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Manually Configure Digital Signal Processing (DSP) . . . . . . . 4-25

Coil Drive Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

5 Hz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

37 Hz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Low Flow Cutoff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Primary Variable Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Universal Auto Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

TOC-3



Device Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Descriptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Device ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Flowtube Sensor Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Flowtube Sensor Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Write Protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Revision Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Construction Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

SECTION 5Flowtube Installation

Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Flowtube Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Flowtube Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Upstream/Downstream

Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Flowtube Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Flow Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Installation (Flanged Flowtube) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Gaskets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Flange Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Installation

(Wafer Flowtube) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Gaskets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Flange Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Installation

(Sanitary Flowtube) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Gaskets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Alignment and Bolting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Process Leak Protection (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Standard Housing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Relief Valves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Process Leak Containment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

SECTION 6Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Installation Check and Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flowtube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Process Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Diagnostic Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Transmitter Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Quick Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Step 1: Wiring Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Step 2: Process Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Step 3: Installed Flowtube Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Step 4: Uninstalled Flowtube Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

TOC-4



APPENDIX AReference Data

Rosemount 8732E Transmitter Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1

Functional Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1

Flowtube Sensor Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1

Flowtube Sensor Coil Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1

Flow Rate Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1

Conductivity Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1

Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1

AC Power Supply Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-2

DC Load Limitations (Analog Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-2

DC Supply Current Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-3

Installation Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-3

Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-3

Ambient Temperature Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-3

Humidity Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-3

Enclosure Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-3

Output Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-3

Software Lockout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-4

Display Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-4

Output Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-4

Turn-on Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-4

Start-up Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-4

Low Flow Cutoff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-4

Overrange Capability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-4

Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-4

Flowtube Sensor Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-4

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-5

Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-5

Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-5

Analog Output Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-5

Vibration Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-5

Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-6

Response Time (Analog Output). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-6

Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-6

Ambient Temperature Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-6

EMC Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-6

Dead Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-6

TOC-5



Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-6

Materials of Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-6

Electrical Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-6

Transmitter Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-6

Rosemount 8712D/H Transmitter Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .A-7

Flowtube Sensor Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-7

Flow Rate Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-7

Conductivity Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-7

DC Load Limitations (Analog Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-7

Supply Current Requirements (8712D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-8

Installation Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-8

Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-8

Ambient Temperature Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-8

Humidity Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-8

Enclosure Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-8

Output Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-8

Software Lockout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-9

Output Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-9

Turn-on Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-9

Start-up Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-9

Low Flow Cutoff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-9

Overrange Capability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-9

Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-9

Flowtube Sensor Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-10

Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-10

Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-10

Analog Output Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-10

Vibration Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-10

Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-10

Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-11

Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-11

Ambient Temperature Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-12

Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-12

Materials of Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-12

Electrical Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-12

Rosemount 8742C Transmitter Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .A-13

Flowtube Sensor Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-13

Conductivity Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-13

Flowtube Sensor Coil Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-13

Flow Rate Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-13

Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-13

Supply Current Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-13

Installation Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-13

Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-13

Ambient Temperature Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-13

Humidity Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-13

Enclosure Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-14

Output Signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-14

Foundation™ Fieldbus Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-14

Schedule Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-14

Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-14

Virtual Communications Relationships (VCRs) . . . . . . . . . . . .A-14


TOC-6




Electrical Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-16

Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-16

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-16

Rosemount 8705 Flanged and 8707

High-Signal Flanged Flowtube Sensors Specifications. . . . . .A-17

Ambient Temperature Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-17


Rosemount 8711 Wafer Flowtube Sensor Specifications . . . .A-23



Rosemount 8721 Sanitary Flowtube Sensor Specifications . .A-26



Rosemount 8714D Reference Calibration

Standard Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-30



Dimensional Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-31

Magnetic Flowmeter Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-40

Flowmeter Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-40

Upstream/Downstream Piping Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-42

Flowtube Sensor Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-42

Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-43

Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-48

Rosemount 8732E Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-48

Rosemount 8712D Ordering Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-50

Rosemount 8712H Ordering Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-51

Rosemount 8742C Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-52

Rosemount 8705 Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-54




Rosemount 8714D Ordering Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-66

Tagging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-67

Ordering Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-67

Standard Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-67

Cable Requirements for Remote Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-68

Custom Configuration (Option Code C1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-68

APPENDIX BApproval Information

Approved Manufacturing Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1

European Directive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1

ATEX Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1

Rosemount 8705 and 8707 Magnetic Flowmeter

flowtube sensors in line size and flange combinations . . . . . . .B-1

Rosemount 8711 Magnetic Flowmeter Flowtube Sensors

Line Sizes: 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, and 8 inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1

Rosemount 8721 Sanitary Magmeter Flowtube Sensors

in line sizes of 11/2 inch and larger: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2

Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) (89/336/EEC) (obsolete) . .B-2

Low Voltage Directive (93/68/EEC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2

Other important guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2

TOC-7



CE Marking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2

Hazardous Locations Product Approvals Offering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2

Hazardous Location Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-7

Transmitter Approval Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-7

North American Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-8

Factory Mutual (FM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-8

Canadian Standards Association (CSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-9

European Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-10

International Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-13

Flowtube Sensor Approval Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-15

North American Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-15

Factory Mutual (FM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-15

Canadian Standards Association (CSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-16

European Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-17

APPENDIX CDiagnostics

Diagnostic Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1

Options for Accessing Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1

Access Diagnostics through the LOI for quicker installation,

maintenance, and meter verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1

Access Diagnostics through AMS Intelligent Device Manager

for the Ultimate Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-2

Licensing and Enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-2

Licensing the 8732E Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-2

Tunable Empty Pipe Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-2

Turning Empty Pipe On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-2

Tunable Empty Pipe Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3

Empty Pipe Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3

Empty Pipe Trigger Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3

Empty Pipe Counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3

Optimizing Tunable Empty Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3

Troubleshooting Empty Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4

Ground/Wiring Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4

Turning Ground/Wiring Fault On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4

Ground/Wiring Fault Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4

Line Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4

Troubleshooting Ground/Wiring Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5

Ground/Wiring Fault Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5

High Process Noise Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5

Turning High Process Noise On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5

High Process Noise Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6

5 Hz Signal to Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6

37 Hz Signal to Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6

Troubleshooting High Process Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6

High Process Noise Functionality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-7

1/f Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-7

Spike Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-7

White Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-7

4-20 mA Loop Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-8

Initiating 4-20 mA Loop Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-8

4-20 mA Loop Verification Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-8

4-20 mA Loop Verification Test Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-8

Troubleshooting 4-20 mA Loop Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-8

TOC-8



4-20 mA Loop Verification Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-9

8714i Calibration Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-9

Initiating 8714i Calibration Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-9

Flowtube Sensor Signature Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-9

Establishing the baseline flowtube sensor signature. . . . . . . . .C-9

8714i Calibration Verification Test Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-10

Test Conditions for the 8714i Calibration Verification . . . . . . .C-10

8714i Calibration Verification Test Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-10

8714i Calibration Verification Test Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-11

8714i Calibration Verification Test Results Parameters . . . . . . . .C-11

Viewing the 8714i Calibration Verification Results . . . . . . . . .C-12

Optimizing the 8714i Calibration Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-14

Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-14

Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-14

Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-14

Troubleshooting the 8714i Calibration Verification Test . . . . . . . .C-15

8714i Calibration Verification Functionality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-15

Flowtube Signature Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-15

8714i Calibration Verification Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-16

Rosemount Magnetic Flowmeter Calibration Verification Report . . .C-17

APPENDIX DDigital Signal Processing

Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-1

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-1

Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-2

Auto Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-2

Signal Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-2

How Does It Really Work? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-3

When Should Signal Processing Be Used? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-4

APPENDIX EUniversal Flowtube Wiring Diagrams

Rosemount Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-3

Rosemount 8705/8707/8711/8721

Flowtubes to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-3

Rosemount 8701 Flowtube to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter. . . .E-4

Connecting Flowtubes of Other Manufacturers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-5

Brooks Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-6



Endress And Hauser Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-7

Endress and Hauser Flowtube to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter .E-8

Fischer And Porter Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-8

Rosemount 10D1418 Flowtube to

Rosemount 8732E Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-9

Rosemount 10D1419 Flowtube to

Rosemount 8732E Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-10

Rosemount 10D1430 Flowtube (Remote) to


Rosemount 10D1430 Flowtube (Integral) to


Rosemount 10D1465 and Rosemount 10D1475

Flowtubes (Integral) to 8732E Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-13

Fischer and Porter Flowtube to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter .E-14

Foxboro Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-15

TOC-9



Series 1800 Flowtube to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter. . . . . . .E-15

Series 1800 (Version 2) Flowtube to


Series 2800 Flowtube to 8732E Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-17

Foxboro Flowtube to 8732E Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-18

Kent Veriflux VTC Flowtube. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-19

Veriflux VTC Flowtube to 8732E Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-19

Kent Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-20

Kent Flowtube to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . .E-20

Krohne Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-21

Krohne Flowtube to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter . . . . . . . . . .E-21

Taylor Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-22

Series 1100 Flowtube to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter. . . . . . .E-22

Taylor Flowtube to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . .E-23

Yamatake Honeywell Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-24

Yamatake Honeywell Flowtube to


Yokogawa Flowtubes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-25

Yokogawa Flowtube to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter . . . . . . . .E-25

Generic Manufacturer Flowtubes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-26

Generic Manufacturer Flowtube to


Identify the Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-26

Identify coil and electrode terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-26

Identify a chassis ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-26

Wiring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-26

APPENDIX FHART Field Communicator Operation

HandHeld Communicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

Connections and Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7

Basic Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8

Action Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9

Alphanumeric and Shift Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9

Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10

Fast Key Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10

Fast Key Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10

Menus and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10

Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11

Online Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11

Diagnostic Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12

TOC-10



Section 1 Introduction

System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1-1

Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1-2

Service Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1-2

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The Rosemount® 8700 Series Magnetic Flowmeter System consists of a flowtube sensor and transmitter, and measures volumetric flow rate by detecting the velocity of a conductive liquid that passes through a magnetic field.

There are four Rosemount magnetic flowmeter flowtube sensors:

• Flanged Rosemount 8705

• Flanged High-Signal Rosemount 8707

• Wafer-Style Rosemount 8711

• Sanitary Rosemount 8721

There are three Rosemount magnetic flowmeter transmitters:

• Rosemount 8712

• Rosemount 8732

• Rosemount 8742

The flowtube sensor is installed in-line with process piping — either vertically or horizontally. Coils located on opposite sides of the flowtube create a magnetic field. Electrodes located perpendicular to the coils make contact with the process fluid. A conductive liquid moving through the magnetic field generates a voltage at the two electrodes that is proportional to the flow velocity.

The transmitter drives the coils to generate a magnetic field, and electronically conditions the voltage detected by the electrodes to provide a flow signal. The transmitter can be integrally or remotely mounted from the flowtube sensor.

This manual is designed to assist in the installation and operation of the Rosemount 8732E Magnetic Flowmeter Transmitter and the Rosemount 8700 Series Magnetic Flowmeter Flowtube Sensors.

www.rosemount.com



SAFETY MESSAGES Procedures and instructions in this manual may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Refer to the safety messages listed at the beginning of each section before performing any operations.

SERVICE SUPPORT To expedite the return process outside the United States, contact the nearest Rosemount representative.

Within the United States and Canada, call the North American Response Center using the 800-654-RSMT (7768) toll-free number. The Response Center, available 24 hours a day, will assist you with any needed information or materials.

The center will ask for product model and serial numbers, and will provide a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number. The center will also ask for the name of the process material to which the product was last exposed.

Mishandling products exposed to a hazardous substance may result in death or serious injury. If the product being returned was exposed to a hazardous substance as defined by OSHA, a copy of the required Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each hazardous substance identified must be included with the returned goods.

The North American Response Center will detail the additional information and procedures necessary to return goods exposed to hazardous substances.

Attempting to install and operate the Rosemount 8705, Rosemount 8707 High-Signal, or

Rosemount 8711 Magnetic Flowtube Sensors with the Rosemount 8712, Rosemount 8732,

or Rosemount 8742 Magnetic Flowmeter Transmitter without reviewing the instructions

contained in this manual could result in personal injury or equipment damage.

See “Safety Messages” on page 5-1 for complete warning information.

1-2



Section 2 Installation


Transmitter Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2-2

Pre-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2-2

Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2-3

Options, Considerations, and Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2-9

Flowtube Sensor Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2-16

This section covers the steps required to physically install the magnetic flowmeter. Instructions and procedures in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Please refer to the following safety messages before performing any operation in this section.

SAFETY MESSAGES This symbol is used throughout this manual to indicate that special attention to warning information is required.

Instructions and procedures in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Please refer to the following safety messages before performing any operation in this section.

Failure to follow these installation guidelines could result in death or serious injury:

Installation and servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. Do not perform

any servicing other than that contained in the operating instructions, unless qualified. Verify

that the operating environment of the flowtube sensor and transmitter is consistent with the

appropriate hazardous area approval.

Do not connect a Rosemount 8732E to a non-Rosemount flowtube sensor that is located in

an explosive atmosphere.

www.rosemount.com



TRANSMITTER SYMBOLS

Caution symbol — check product documentation for details

Protective conductor (grounding) terminal

PRE-INSTALLATION Before installing the Rosemount 8732E Magnetic Flowmeter Transmitter, there are several pre-installation steps that should be completed to make the installation process easier:

• Identify the options and configurations that apply to your application

• Set the hardware switches if necessary

• Consider mechanical, electrical, and environmental requirements

Mechanical Considerations

The mounting site for the 8732E transmitter should provide enough room for secure mounting, easy access to conduit ports, full opening of the transmitter covers, and easy readability of the LOI screen (see Figure 2-1). The transmitter should be mounted in a manner that prevents moisture in conduit from collecting in the transmitter.

If the 8732E is mounted separately from the flowtube sensor, it is not subject to limitations that might apply to the flowtube sensor.

Explosions could result in death or serious injury:

Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the

appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Please review

the approvals section of the 8732E reference manual for any restrictions associated with a

safe installation.

Before connecting a handheld communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure the

instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive

field wiring practices.

Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury

Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can

cause electrical shock.

The flowtube sensor liner is vulnerable to handling damage. Never place anything through

the flowtube sensor for the purpose of lifting or gaining leverage. Liner damage can render

the flowtube sensor useless.

To avoid possible damage to the flowtube sensor liner ends, do not use metallic or

spiral-wound gaskets. If frequent removal is anticipated, take precautions to protect the liner

ends. Short spool pieces attached to the flowtube sensor ends are often used for protection.

Correct flange bolt tightening is crucial for proper flowtube sensor operation and life. All bolts

must be tightened in the proper sequence to the specified torque limits. Failure to observe

these instructions could result in severe damage to the flowtube sensor lining and possible

flowtube sensor replacement.

Emerson Process Management can supply lining protectors to prevent liner damage during

removal, installation, and excessive bolt torquing.

2-2



Figure 2-1. Rosemount 8732E Dimensional Drawing

Environmental Considerations

To ensure maximum transmitter life, avoid temperature extremes and vibration. Typical problem areas include:

• high-vibration lines with integrally mounted transmitters

• warm-climate installations in direct sunlight

• outdoor installations in cold climates.

Remote-mounted transmitters may be installed in the control room to protect the electronics from a harsh environment and provides easy access for configuration or service.

Rosemount 8732E transmitters require external power so there must be access to a suitable power source.

INSTALLATION PROCEDURES

Rosemount 8732E installation includes both detailed mechanical and electrical installation procedures.

Mount the Transmitter Remote-mounted transmitters may be mounted on a pipe up to two inches in diameter or against a flat surface.

Pipe Mounting

To mount the transmitter on a pipe:

1. Attach the mounting bracket to the pipe using the mounting hardware.

2. Attach the 8732E to the mounting bracket using the mounting screws.

5.82(148)

6.48 (165)

7.49 (190)

LOI Cover

4.97 (126)

8.81 (224)

3.00(76)

3.07 (78)

4.97 (126)

1/2”-14 NPT Electrical

Conduit Connections (3 places)

1/2”-14 NPT Flowtube Sensor

Conduit Connections (2 places)

2-3



Surface Mounting

To surface mount the transmitter:

1. Attach the 8732E to the mounting location using the mounting screws.

Identify Options and Configurations

The standard application of the 8732E includes a 4-20 mA output and control of the flowtube sensor coils. Other applications may require one or more of the following configurations or options:

• Multidrop Communication (locks the 4-20 mA output to 4 mA)

• HART Communication

• Pulse Output

• Digital Output

• Digital Input

Additional options may apply. Be sure to identify those options and configurations that apply to your situation, and keep a list of them nearby for consideration during the installation and configuration procedures.

Hardware Switches The 8732E electronics board is equipped with three user-selectable hardware switches. These switches set the Failure Alarm Mode, Internal/External Analog Power, Transmitter Security, and Internal/External Pulse Power. The standard configuration for these switches when shipped from the factory are as follows:

NOTEFor electronics with intrinsically safe (I.S. Output) approvals, analog and pulse power must be provided externally. The electronics do not include these hardware switches.

Definitions of these switches and their functions are provided below. If you determine that the settings must be changed, see below.

Failure Alarm Mode

If the 8732E experiences a catastrophic failure in the electronics, the current output can be driven high (23.25 mA) or low (3.75 mA). The switch is set in the HIGH (23.25 mA) position when it is shipped from the factory.

Internal/External Analog Power

The 8732E 4–20 mA loop may be powered internally or by an external power supply. The internal/external power supply switch determines the source of the 4–20 mA loop power.

Transmitters are shipped from the factory with the switch set in the INTERNAL position.

Failure Alarm Mode: HIGH

Internal/External Analog Power: INTERNAL

Transmitter Security: OFF

Internal/External Pulse Power INTERNAL

2-4



The external power option is required for multidrop configurations. A 10–30 V DC external supply is required and the 4-20 mA power switch must be set to the EXTERNAL position. For further information on 4–20 mA external power, see “Connect 4–20 mA Loop External Power Source” on page 2-10.

Transmitter Security

The security switch on the 8732E allows the user to lock out any configuration changes attempted on the transmitter. No changes to the configuration are allowed when the switch is in the ON position. The flow rate indication and totalizer functions remain active at all times.

With the switch in the ON position, you may still access and review any of the operating parameters and scroll through the available choices, but no actual data changes are allowed. Transmitter security is set in the OFF position when shipped from the factory.

Internal/External Pulse Power

The 8732E pulse loop may be powered internally or by an external power supply. The internal/external power supply switch determines the source of the pulse loop power.

Transmitters are shipped from the factory with the switch set in the INTERNAL position.

A 5-28 V DC external supply is required when the pulse power switch is set to the EXTERNAL position. For further information on the pulse external power, see “Connect Pulse Output Power Source” on page 2-11.

Changing Hardware Switch Settings

In most cases, it is not necessary to change the setting of the hardware switches. If you need to change the switch settings, complete the steps below:

NOTEThe hardware switches are located on the top side of the electronics board and changing their settings requires opening the electronics housing. If possible, carry out these procedures away from the plant environment in order to protect the electronics.

1. Disconnect power to the transmitter.

2. Remove electronics cover.

3. Remove LOI if applicable.

4. Identify the location of each switch (see Figure 2-2).

5. Change the setting of the desired switches with a small screwdriver.

6. Replace the electronics cover.

2-5



Figure 2-2. Rosemount 8732E Electronics Board and Hardware Switches

Conduit Ports and Connections

Both the flowtube sensor and transmitter junction boxes have ports for 1/2-inch NPT conduit connections, with optional CM20 and PG 13.5 connections available. These connections should be made in accordance with local or plant electrical codes. Unused ports should be sealed with metal plugs and teflon tape or other thread sealant. Connections should also be made in accordance with area approval requirements, see examples below for details. Proper electrical installation is necessary to prevent errors due to electrical noise and interference. Separate conduits are not necessary for the coil drive and signal cables connecting the transmitter to the flowtube sensor, but a dedicated conduit line between each transmitter and flowtube sensor is required. A shielded cable must be used.

Example 1: Installing flanged flowtube sensors into an IP68 area. Flowtube sensors must be installed with IP68 cable glands and cable to maintain IP68 rating. Unused conduit connections must be properly sealed to prevent water ingress. For added protection, dielectric gel can be used to pot the flowtube sensor terminal block.

Example 2: Installing flowmeters into explosion proof/flameproof areas. Conduit connections and conduit must be rated for use in the hazardous area to maintain flowmeter approval rating.

Conduit Cables Run the appropriate size cable through the conduit connections in your magnetic flowmeter system. Run the power cable from the power source to the transmitter. For remote mount installations, run the coil drive and electrode cables between the flowmeter and transmitter. Refer to Electrical Considerations for wire type. Prepare the ends of the coil drive and electrode cables as shown in Figure 2-3. Limit the unshielded wire length to 1-inch on both the electrode and coil drive cables. Excessive lead length or failure to connect cable shields can create electrical noise resulting in unstable meter readings.

2-6



Figure 2-3. Cable Preparation Detail

Electrical Considerations Before making any electrical connections to the Rosemount 8732E, consider the following standards and be sure to have the proper power supply, conduit, and other accessories. When preparing all wire connections, remove only the insulation required to fit the wire completely under the terminal connection. Removal of excessive insulation may result in an unwanted electrical short to the transmitter housing or other wire connections.

Transmitter Input Power

The 8732E transmitter is designed to be powered by 90-250 V AC, 50–60 Hz or 12–42 V DC. The eighth digit in the transmitter model number designates the appropriate power supply requirement.

Supply Wire Temperature RatingUse 12 to 18 AWG wire. For connections in ambient temperatures exceeding 140 °F (60 °C), use wire rated to at least 194 °F (90 °C).

DisconnectsConnect the device through an external disconnect or circuit breaker. Clearly label the disconnect or circuit breaker and locate it near the transmitter.

Requirements for 90-250 V AC Power Supply

Wire the transmitter according to local electrical requirements for the supply voltage. In addition, follow the supply wire and disconnect requirements on page 2-9.

Requirements for 12-42 V DC Power Supply

Units powered with 12-42 V DC may draw up to 1 amp of current. As a result, the input power wire must meet certain gauge requirements.

Figure 2-4 shows the supply current for each corresponding supply voltage. For combinations not shown, you can calculate the maximum distance given the supply current, the voltage of the source, and the minimum start-up voltage of the transmitter, 12 V DC, using the following equation:

NOTEDimensions are in inches (millimeters).

1.00(26)

Cable Shield

Model Number Power Supply Requirement

1 90-250 V AC

2 12-42 V DC

MaximumResis cetanSupplyVoltage 12– VDC

1amp--------------------------------------------------------------------=

2-7



Use Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 to determine the maximum wire length allowable for your power supply and maximum resistance.

Table 2-1. Length of Annealed Copper (Cu) Wires

Table 2-2. Length of Hand-drawn Copper (Cu) Wires

Types of Power

Supply Wires

Maximum Length of the Wire for Each

Corresponding Power Supply Source

Wire

Gauge

Annealed Cu

milliohms/ft

(milliohms/m)

42 V DC

Supply ft (m)

30 V DC

Supply ft (m)

20 V DC

Supply ft (m)

12.5 V DC

Supply ft (m)

20 0.01015

(0.033292)

1478

(451)

887

(270)

394

(120)

25

(8)

18 0.006385

(0.020943)

2349

(716)

1410

(430)

626

(191)

39

(12)

16 0.004016

(0.013172)

3735

(1139)

2241

(683)

996

(304)

62

(19)

14 0.002525

(0.008282)

5941

(1811)

3564

(1087)

1584

(483)

99

(30)

12 0.001588

(0.005209)

9446

(2880)

5668

(1728)

2519

(768)

157

(48)

10 0.000999

(0.003277)

15015

(4578)

9009

(2747)

4004

(1221)

250

(76)

Types of Power

Supply Wires

Maximum Length of the Wire for

Each Corresponding Power Supply Source

Wire

Gauge

Annealed Cu

milliohms/ft

(milliohms/m)

42 V DC

Supply ft (m)

30 V DC

Supply ft (m)

20 V DC

Supply ft (m)

12.5 V DC

Supply ft (m)

18 0.00664

(0.021779)

2259

(689)

1355

(413)

602

(184)

38

(11)

16 0.004176

(0.013697)

3592

(1095)

2155

(657)

958

(292)

60

(18)

14 0.002626

(0.008613)

5712

(1741)

3427

(1045)

1523

(464)

95

(29)

12 0.001652

(0.005419)

9080

(2768)

5448

(1661)

2421

(738)

151

(46)

10 0.01039

(0.003408)

14437

(4402)

8662

(2641)

3850

(1174)

241

(73)

2-8



Figure 2-4. Supply Current versus Input Voltage

Installation Category The installation category for the Rosemount 8732E is (overvoltage) Category II.

Overcurrent Protection The Rosemount 8732E Flowmeter Transmitter requires overcurrent protection of the supply lines. Maximum ratings of overcurrent devices are as follows:

OPTIONS, CONSIDERATIONS, AND PROCEDURES

If your application of the 8732E includes the use of options such as multidrop communications, DI/DO, or pulse output, certain requirements may apply in addition to those previously listed. Be prepared to meet these requirements before attempting to install and operate the Rosemount 8732E.

Connect Transmitter Power

To connect power to the transmitter, complete the following steps.

1. Ensure that the power source and connecting cable meet the requirements outlined on page 2-8.

2. Turn off the power source.

3. Open the power terminal cover.

4. Run the power cable through the conduit to the transmitter.

5. Connect the power cable leads as shown in Figure 2-5.

a. Connect AC Neutral or DC- to terminal 9.

b. Connect AC Line or DC+ to terminal 10.

c. Connect AC Ground or DC Ground to the ground screw mounted inside the transmitter enclosure.

Power Supply (Volts)

12 4220 30 40

I = 10/VI = Supply current requirement (Amps)V = Power supply voltage (Volts)

Su

pp

ly C

urr

en

t (A

mp

s)

1.0

0.75

0.5

0.25

0

Power System Fuse Rating Manufacturer

110 V AC 250 V; 1.25 Amp, Quick Acting Bussman AGCI or Equivalent

220 V AC 250 V; 2 Amp, Quick Acting Bussman AGCI or Equivalent

2-9



Figure 2-5. AC Transmitter Power Connections

Connect 4–20 mA Loop External Power Source

The 4–20 mA output loop provides the process variable output from the transmitter. For transmitters with non-I.S. Output, the signal may be powered internally or externally. The default position of the internal/external analog power switch is in the INTERNAL position. The user-selectable power switch is located on the electronics board. The analog output is isolated from ground.

InternalThe 4–20 mA analog power loop may be powered from the transmitter itself. Resistance in the loop must be 600 ohms or less. If a HART communication device or control system will be used, it must be connected across a minimum of 250 ohms resistance in the loop.

ExternalHART multidrop installations require a 10–30 V DC external power source. Resistance in the loop must be 1000 ohms or less. If a HART communication device or control system is to be used, it must be connected across a minimum of 250 ohms resistance in the loop.

To connect external power to the 4–20 mA loop, complete the following steps.

1. Ensure that the power source and connecting cable meet the requirements outlined above and in “Electrical Considerations” on page 2-7.

2. Turn off the transmitter and analog power sources.

3. Run the power cable into the transmitter.

4. Connect -4-20 mA power to Terminal 1.

5. Connect +4-20 mA power to Terminal 2.

Refer to Figure 2-6 on page 2-11.

AC Line or DC +

Transmitter Power Cable

AC Neutral or DC –

AC or DC Ground

2-10



Figure 2-6. 4–20 mA Loop Power Connections

Connect Pulse Output Power Source

The pulse output function provides an isolated switch-closure frequency signal that is proportional to the flow through the flowtube sensor. The signal is typically used in conjunction with an external totalizer or control system. The default position of the internal/external pulse power switch is in the EXTERNAL position. The user-selectable power switch is located on the electronics board.

External

For transmitter with the internal/external pulse power switch set in the EXTERNAL position, the following requirements apply.

Complete the following steps to connect an external power supply.

1. Ensure that the power source and connecting cable meet the requirements outlined previously.

2. Turn off the transmitter and pulse output power sources.

3. Run the power cable to the transmitter.

4. Connect – DC to terminal 3.

5. Connect + DC to terminal 4.

Refer to Figure 2-7 and Figure 2-8.

Internal

The pulse power loop may be powered from the transmitter itself. Supply voltage from the transmitter is 10 V. Refer to Figure 2-7 and Figure 2-8 and connect the transmitter directly to the counter.

–4–20 mA power

+4–20 mA power

Supply Voltage: 5 to 28 V DC

Load Resistance: 1,000 to 100 k ohms (typical � 5 k)

Pulse Duration: 1.5 to 500 msec (adjustable), 50% duty cycle below 1.5 msec

Maximum Power: 2.0 watts up to 4,000 Hz and 0.1 watts at 10,000 Hz

Switch Closure: solid state switch

2-11



1. Turn off the transmitter.


3. Connect – DC to terminal 3.

4. Connect + DC to terminal 4.

Figure 2-7. Connecting to a Electromechanical Totalizer/Counter

Electro-mechanical Counter

5–28 V DC Power Supply +

––

+

2-12



Figure 2-8. Connecting to a Electronic Totalizer/Counter without Integral Power Supply

Connect Digital Output The digital output control function allows you to externally signal a zero flow, reverse flow, empty pipe, or transmitter fault condition. The following requirements apply:

If you are using digital output control, you need to connect the power source and control relay to the transmitter. To connect external power for digital output control, complete the steps:

1. Ensure that the power source and connecting cable meet the requirements outlined previously.

2. Turn off the transmitter and digital power sources.


4. Connect –DC to terminal 7.

5. Connect +DC to terminal 8.

Refer to Figure 2-9.

Electronic Counter

5–28 V DC Power Supply

–

++

–

1k to 100k typical � 5k

Supply Voltage: 5 to 28V DC

Maximum Power: 2 watts

Switch Closure: optically isolated solid state switch

2-13



Figure 2-9. Connect Digital Output to Relay or Input to Control System

Figure 2-10. Digital Output Schematic

Connect Digital Input The Digital Input can provide positive zero return (PZR), net totalizer reset, or transmitter reset. The following requirements apply:

To connect the Digital Input, complete the following steps.

1. Run the 5-28 V DC signal cable to the transmitter.

2. Connect –DC to terminal 5.

3. Connect +DC to terminal 6.

Refer to Figure 2-11.

Control Relayor Input

5-28 V DCPower Supply

Terminal 8: DO (+)

Terminal 7: DO (-)

Part Number: International Rectifier PVA1352

Transmitter Circuitry

Supply Voltage: 5 to 28V DC

Maximum Power: 2 watts

Switch Closure: optically isolated solid state switch

Input Impedance: 2.5 kΩ

2-14



Figure 2-11. Connecting Digital Input

Figure 2-12. Digital Input Schematic

Figure 2-13. Digital Input Operating Range

Relay Contact or ControlSystem Output

5-28 V DCPower Supply

Terminal 6: DI (+)Terminal 6: DI (+)

Terminal 5: DI (-)Terminal 5: DI (-)

Part Number: Infineon LH1529Part Number: Infineon LH1529

2.5 k2.5 k

RinRin

Transmitter CircuitryTransmitter Circuitry

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

2.5 5 7.5 10 12.5 150

Digital Input Operating Range

Sup

ply

Vo

ltag

e

Series Resistance Zin + Zext (Kohms)

2-15



2-16

FLOWTUBE SENSOR CONNECTIONS

This section covers the steps required to physically install the transmitter including wiring and calibration.

Rosemount Flowtube Sensors

To connect the transmitter to a non-Rosemount flowtube sensor, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram in Appendix D: Wiring Diagrams. The calibration procedure listed is not required for use with Rosemount flowtube sensors.

Transmitter to Flowtube Sensor Wiring

Flanged and wafer flowtube sensors have two conduit ports as shown in Figures 4-13, 4-14, 4-15, and 4-16. Either one may be used for both the coil drive and electrode cables. Use the stainless steel plug that is provided to seal the unused conduit port.

A single dedicated conduit run for the coil drive and electrode cables is needed between a flowtube sensor and a remote transmitter. Bundled cables in a single conduit are likely to create interference and noise problems in your system. Use one set of cables per conduit run. See Figure 2-14 for proper conduit installation diagram and Table 2-3 for recommended cable. For integral and remote wiring diagrams refer to Figure 2-16.

Figure 2-14. Conduit Preparation

Correct Incorrect

Coil Drive andElectrode CablesPower Power

OutputsOutputs

Coil Drive andElectrode CablesPower

Outputs

Power

Outputs

Table 2-3. Cable Requirements

Description Units Part Number

Signal Cable (20 AWG) Belden 8762, Alpha 2411 equivalent ft

m

08712-0061-0001

08712-0061-0003

Coil Drive Cable (14 AWG) Belden 8720, Alpha 2442 equivalent ft

m

08712-0060-0001

08712-0060-0003

Combination Signal and Coil Drive Cable (18 AWG)(1)

(1) Combination signal and coil drive cable is not recommended for high-signal magmeter system. For remote mount installations, combination signal and coil drive cable should be limited to less than 330 ft. (100 m).

ft

m

08712-0752-0001

08712-0752-0003



Rosemount recommends using the combination signal and coil drive for N5, E5 approved flowtube sensors for optimum performance.

Remote transmitter installations require equal lengths of signal and coil drive cables. Integrally mounted transmitters are factory wired and do not require interconnecting cables.

Lengths from 5 to 1,000 feet (1.5 to 300 meters) may be specified, and will be shipped with the flowtube sensor.

Conduit Cables Run the appropriate size cable through the conduit connections in your magnetic flowmeter system. Run the power cable from the power source to the transmitter. Run the coil drive and electrode cables between the flowmeter and transmitter.

Prepare the ends of the coil drive and electrode cables as shown in Figure 2-15. Limit the unshielded wire length to 1-inch on both the electrode and coil drive cables.

NOTEExcessive lead length or failure to connect cable shields can create electrical noise resulting in unstable meter readings.

Figure 2-15. Cable Preparation Detail

1.00(26)

NOTEDimensions are in inches (millimeters).

Cable Shield

2-17



Flowtube Sensor to Remote Mount Transmitter Connections

Connect coil drive and electrode cables as shown in Figure 2-16.

Do not connect AC power to the flowtube sensor or to terminals 1 and 2 of the transmitter, or replacement of the electronics board will be necessary.

Figure 2-16. Wiring Diagram

Rosemount 8732E Transmitter

Rosemount 8705/8707/8711/8721

Flowtube Sensors

1 1

2 2

17 17

18 18

19 19

2-18



Section 3 Configuration

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3-1

Local Operator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3-1

Basic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3-1

LOI Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3-2

Diagnostic Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3-5

Process Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3-5

Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3-7

INTRODUCTION This section covers basic operation, software functionality, and configuration procedures for the Rosemount 8732 Magnetic Flowmeter Transmitter. For information on connecting another manufacturer’s flowtube, refer to Appendix D: Wiring Diagrams.

The Rosemount 8732 features a full range of software functions for configuration of output from the transmitter. Software functions are accessed through the LOI, AMS, a Handheld Communicator, or a control system. Configuration variables may be changed at any time and specific instructions are provided through on-screen instructions.

LOCAL OPERATOR INTERFACE

The optional Local Operator Interface (LOI) provides an operator communications center for the 8732. By using the LOI, the operator can access any transmitter function for changing configuration parameter settings, checking totalized values, or other functions. The LOI is integral to the transmitter electronics.

BASIC FEATURES The basic features of the LOI include 4 navigational arrow keys that are used to access the menu structure. See Figure 3-1

Table 3-1. Parameters

Basic Set-up Parameters Page

Review page 3-5

Process Variables page 3-5

Basic Setup page 3-7

Flow Units page 3-7

Range Values page 3-10

PV Sensor/Flowtube Calibration Number page 3-11

Totalizer Setup page 3-6

www.rosemount.com



Figure 3-1. Local Operator Interface Keypad

Data Entry The LOI keypad does not have numerical keys. Numerical data is entered by the following procedure.

1. Access the appropriate function.

2. Use the RIGHT ARROW key to move to the value to change.

3. Use the UP and DOWN ARROWS to change the highlighted value. For numerical data, toggle through the digits 0–9, decimal point, and dash. For alphabetical data, toggle through the letters of the alphabet A–Z, digits 0–9, and the symbols �,&, +, -, *, /, $, @,%, and the blank space.

4. Use the RIGHT ARROWS to highlight other digits you want to change and change them.

5. Press “E” (the left arrow key) when all changes are complete to save the entered values.

LOI EXAMPLES Use the DOWN ARROW to access the menu structure in Table 3-2. Use the ARROW KEYS to select the desired parameters to review/change. Parameters are set in one of two ways, Table Values or Select Values.

Table Values:Parameters such as units, that are available from a predefined list

Select Values:Parameters that consist of a user-created number or character string, such as calibration number; values are entered one character at a time using the ARROW KEYS.

3-2



Table Value Example Setting the TUBE SIZE:

1. Press the DOWN arrow to access the menu.

2. Select line size from the Basic set-up menu.

3. Press the UP or DOWN arrow to increase/decrease (incrementally) the tube size to the next value.

4. When you reach the desired size, press “E” (the left arrow).

5. Set the loop to manual if necessary, and press “E” again.

After a moment, the LCD will display the new tube size and the maximum flow rate.

Select Value Example Changing the ANALOG OUTPUT RANGE:

1. Press the DOWN arrow to access the menu.

2. Using the arrow keys, select PV URV from the Basic Setup menu.

3. Press RIGHT arrow key to position the cursor.

4. Press UP or DOWN to set the number.

5. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until desired number is displayed.

6. Press “E”.

After a moment, the LCD will display the new analog output range.

3-3



Table 3-2. LOI Menu Tree

Diag Controls B asic Diag A dvanced Diag V ariablesT rims Status

E mpty Pipe Process Noise Ground/WiringE lec T emp

Self T est A O L oop T est Pulse Out T est E mpty Pipe E lec T emp

Ground/WiringProcess Noise 8714i4-20 mA V erify L icensing

R un 8714i V iew R esults T ube SignatureT est Criteria Measurements

V aluesR e-Signature R ecall V alues

Coil R esist Coil Signature E lectrode R es

No Flow Flowing, Full E mpty Pipe


E mpty Pipe E lec T emp L ine Noise 5Hz SNR 37Hz SNR Signal Power 8714i R esults

D/A T rim Digital T rim A uto Zero Universal T rim

4-20 mA V erify V iew R esults

T agFlow Units L ine Size PV UR V PV L R V Cal Number PV Damping

Coil FrequencyProc Density PV L SL PV USL PV Min Span

A nalogPulse DI/DO Config T otalizer R everse Flow HA R T

PV UR V PV L R V A larm T ype T est

Pulse Scaling Pulse Width Pulse Mode T est

DI 1 DO 2

T otalize Units T otal Display

B urst Mode B urst Command

Flange T ype Flange Matl E lectrode T ypeE lectrode Matl L iner Material

Software R ev Final A smbl #

T agDescriptionMessage Device ID PV Sensor S/N Flowtube T ag R evision Num Materials

Operating Mode SP Config Coil Frequency PV Damping L o-Flow Cutoff

Flow Display T otal Display L anguage

More Params Output Config L OI Config Sig Processing Device Info

PV Units Special Units T otalize Units

Diagnostics

B asic Setup

Detailed Setup

3-4



DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES

The following error messages may appear on the LOI screen. See Table 6-1 on page 6-3 for potential causes and corrective actions for these errors:

• Electronics Failure

• Coil open circuit

• Digital trim failure

• Auto zero failure

• Auto trim failure

• Flowrate > sensor limit

• Analog out of range

• PZR activated

• Electronics Temp Fail

• Pulse out of range

• Empty pipe

• Reverse flow

• Electronics temp out of range

The following error messages may appear on the LOI screen. See Table 6-2 on page 6-4 for potential causes and corrective actions for these errors:

• High Process Noise

• Grounding/Wiring Fault

• 4-20 mA Loop Verification Failed

• 8714i Failed

Review The 8732 includes a capability that enables you to review the configuration variable settings.

The flowmeter configuration parameters set at the factory should be reviewed to ensure accuracy and compatibility with your particular application of the flowmeter.

NOTEIf you are using the LOI to review variables, each variable must be accessed as if you were going to change its setting. The value displayed on the LOI screen is the configured value of the variable.

PROCESS VARIABLES The process variables measure flow in several ways that reflect your needs and the configuration of your flowmeter. When commissioning a flowmeter, review each process variable, its function and output, and take corrective action if necessary before using the flowmeter in a process application

Process Variable (PV) – The actual measured flow rate in the line. Use the Process Variable Units function to select the units for your application.

Percent of Range – The process variable as a percentage of the Analog Output range, provides an indication where the current flow of the meter is within the configured range of the flowmeter. For example, the Analog Output range may be defined as 0 gal/min to 20 gal/min. If the measured flow is 10 gal/min, the percent of range is 50 percent.

Fast Keys 1, 5

Fast Keys 1, 1

3-5



Analog Output – The analog output variable provides the analog value for the flow rate. The analog output refers to the industry standard output in the 4–20 mA range. The analog output and 4-20 mA loop can be verified using the Analog Feedback diagnostic capability internal to the transmitter (See “4-20 mA Loop Verification” on page C-8).

Totalizer Setup – Provides a reading of the total flow of the flowmeter since the totalizer was last reset. The totalizer value should be zero during commissioning on the bench, and the units should reflect the volume units of the flow rate. If the totalizer value is not zero, it may need to be reset. This function also allows for configuration of the totalizer parameters.

Pulse Output – Provides the actual pulse reading from the flow transmitter.

PV - Primary Variable The Primary Variable shows the current measured flow rate. This value determines the analog output from the transmitter.

PV -% Range The PV% Range shows where in the flow range the current flow value is as a percentage of the configured span.

PV - Analog Output The PV Analog Output displays the mA output of the transmitter corresponding to the measured flow rate.

Totalizer Setup The Totalizer Setup menu allows for the viewing and configuration of the totalizer parameters.

Totalizer Units

Totalizer units allow for the configuration of the units that the totalized value will be displayed as. These units are independent of the flow units.

Measured Gross Total

Measured gross total provides the output reading of the totalizer. This value is the amount of process fluid that has passed through the flowmeter since the totalizer was last reset.

NOTETo reset the measured gross total value, one of the following parameters must be changed: line size, calibration number, or flow units.

Measured Net Total

Measured net total provides the output reading of the totalizer. This value is the amount of process fluid that has passed through the flowmeter since the totalizer was last reset. When reverse flow is enabled, the net total represents the difference between the total flow in the forward direction less the total flow in the reverse direction.

Fast Keys 1, 1, 1

Fast Keys 1, 1, 2

Fast Keys 1, 1, 3

Fast Keys 1, 1, 4

Fast Keys 1, 1, 4, 1



3-6



Measured Reverse Total

Measured reverse total provides the output reading of the totalizer. This value is the amount of process fluid that has passed through the flowmeter in the reverse direction since the totalizer was last reset. This value is only totalized when reverse flow is enabled.

Start Totalizer

Start totalizer starts the totalizer counting from its current value.

Stop Totalizer

Stop totalizer interrupts the totalizer count until it is restarted again. This feature is often used during pipe cleaning or other maintenance operations.

Reset Totalizer

Reset totalizer resets the net totalizer value to zero. The totalizer must be stopped before resetting.

NOTEThe totalizer value is saved in the Non-Volatile memory of the electronics every three seconds. Should power to the transmitter be interrupted, the totalizer value will start at the last saved value when power is re-applied.

Pulse Output The Pulse Output displays the current value of the pulse signal.

BASIC SETUP The basic configuration functions of the Rosemount 8732 must be set for all applications of the transmitter in a magnetic flowmeter system. If your application requires the advanced functionality features of the Rosemount 8732, see Section 4 of this manual.

Tag Tag is the quickest and shortest way of identifying and distinguishing between transmitters. Transmitters can be tagged according to the requirements of your application. The tag may be up to eight characters long.

Flow Units Flow Units set the output units for the Primary Variable which controls the analog output of the transmitter.

Primary Variable Units

The Primary Variable Units specifies the format in which the flow rate will be displayed. Units should be selected to meet your particular metering needs.





Fast Keys 1, 1, 5

Fast Keys 1, 3

Fast Keys 1, 3, 1

Fast Keys 1, 3, 2


3-7



Options for Flow Rate Units

If the transmitter is totalizing, the numerator of the unit of measure is used by the transmitter as the volumetric unit for totalization and pulse output scaling. For example, if gal/min is selected, the Rosemount 8732 totalizes and provides a pulse output in gallons.

Special Units

The Rosemount 8732 provides a selection of standard unit configurations that meet the needs of most applications (see “Flow Units” on page 3-7). If your application has special needs and the standard configurations do not apply, the Rosemount 8732 provides the flexibility to configure the transmitter in a custom-designed units format using the special units variable.

• Ft/Sec • B31/Sec (1 Barrel = 31.5 Gallons)

• m/Sec • B31/Min (1 Barrel = 31.5 Gallons)

• Gal/Sec • B31/Hr (1 Barrel = 31.5 Gallons)

• Gal/Min • B31/Day (1 Barrel = 31.5 Gallons)

• Gal/Hr • Lbs/Sec

• Gal/Day • Lbs/Min

• L/Sec • Lbs/Hr

• L/Min • Lbs/Day

• L/Hr • kg/Sec

• L/Day • kg/Min

• Ft3/Sec • kg/Hr

• Ft3/Min • kg/Day

• Ft3/Hr • (S)tons/Min

• Ft3/Day • (S)tons/Hr

• m3/Sec • (S)tons/Day

• m3/Min • (M)tons/Min

• m3/Hr • (M)tons/Hr

• m3/Day • (M)tons/Day

• ImpGal/Sec • Special (User Defined, see page...)

• ImpGal/Min

• ImpGal/Hr

• ImpGal/Day

• B42/Sec (1 Barrel = 42 Gallons)

• B42/Min (1 Barrel = 42 Gallons)

• B42/Hr (1 Barrel = 42 Gallons)

• B42/Day (1 Barrel = 42 Gallons)


3-8



Special Volume Unit

Special volume unit enables you to display the volume unit format to which you have converted the base volume units. For example, if the special units are abc/min, the special volume variable is abc. The volume units variable is also used in totalizing the special units flow.

Base Volume Unit

Base volume unit is the unit from which the conversion is being made. Set this variable to the appropriate option.

Conversion Number

The special units conversion number is used to convert base units to special units. For a straight conversion of volume units from one to another, the conversion number is the number of base units in the new unit. For example, if you are converting from gallons to barrels and there are 31 gallons in a barrel, the conversion factor is 31.

Base Time Unit

Base time unit provides the time unit from which to calculate the special units. For example, if your special units is a volume per minute, select minutes.

Special Flow Rate Unit

Special flow rate unit is a format variable that provides a record of the units to which you are converting. The Handheld Communicator and Rosemount 8732 will display a special units designator as the units format for your primary variable. The actual special units setting you define will not appear. Four characters are available to store the new units designation.

Example

To display flow in barrels per hour, and one barrel of beer is equal to 31.0 gallons, the procedure would be:

Set the Volume Unit to BARL.Set the Base Volume Unit to Gallons.Set the Input Conversion Number to 31.Set the Time Base to Hour.Set the Rate Unit to BR/H.

Line Size The line size (tube size) must be set to match the actual flowtube connected to the transmitter. The size must be specified in inches according to the available sizes listed below. If a value is entered from a control system or Handheld Communicator that does not match one of these figures, the value will go to the next highest option.

Fast Keys 1, 3, 2, 2, 1

Fast Keys 1, 3, 2, 2, 2

Fast Keys 1, 3, 2, 2, 3

Fast Keys 1, 3, 2, 2, 4

Fast Keys 1, 3, 2, 2, 5

Fast Keys 1, 3, 3

3-9



The line size (inches) options are as follows:

PV URV (Upper Range Value)

The upper range value (URV), or analog output range, is preset to 30 ft/s at the factory. The units that appear will be the same as those selected under the units parameter.

The URV (20 mA point) can be set for both forward or reverse flow rate. Flow in the forward direction is represented by positive values and flow in the reverse direction is represented by negative values. The URV can be any value from –39.3 ft/s to +39.3 ft/s (-12 m/s to +12 m/s), as long as it is at least 1 ft/s from the lower range value (4 mA point). The URV can be set to a value less than the lower range value. This will cause the transmitter analog output to operate in reverse, with the current increasing for lower (or more negative) flow rates.

NOTELine size, special units, and density must be selected prior to configuration of URV and LRV.

PV LRV (Lower Range Value)

Reset the lower range value (LRV), or analog output zero, to change the size of the range (or span) between the URV and LRV. Under normal circumstances, the LRV should be set to a value near the minimum expected flow rate to maximize resolution. The LRV must be between –39.3 ft/s to +39.3 ft/s (-12 m/s to +12 m/s).


Example

If the URV is greater than the LRV, the analog output becomes 3.9 mA when the flow rate falls below the selected 4 mA point.

The minimum allowable span between the URV and LRV is 1 ft/s. Do not set the LRV within 1 ft/s of the 20 mA point. For example, if the URV is set to 15.67 ft/s and if the desired URV is greater than the LRV, then the highest allowable analog zero setting would be 14.67 ft/s. If the desired URV is less than the LRV, then the lowest allowable LRV would be 16.67 ft/s.

0.1, 0.15, 0.25, 0.30, 0.50, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 24, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 48, 54, 56, 60, 64, 72, 80

Fast Keys 1, 3, 4

Fast Keys 1, 3, 5

3-10



Calibration Number The tube calibration number is a 16-digit number used to identify flowtubes calibrated at the Rosemount factory. The calibration number is also printed inside the flowtube terminal block or on the flowtube name plate. The number provides detailed calibration information to the Rosemount 8732. To function properly within accuracy specifications, the number stored in the transmitter must match the calibration number on the flowtube exactly.

NOTEFlowtubes from manufacturers other than Rosemount Inc. can also be calibrated at the Rosemount factory. Check the tube for Rosemount calibration tags to determine if a 16-digit tube calibration number exists for your flowtube.

NOTEBe sure the calibration number reflects a calibration to a Rosemount reference transmitter. If the calibration number was generated by a means other than a certified Rosemount flow lab, accuracy of the system may be compromised.

If your flowtube is not a Rosemount flowtube and was not calibrated at the Rosemount factory, please review “Calibration Number” on this page.

If your flowtube is imprinted with an eight-digit number or a k-factor, check in the flowtube wiring compartment for the sixteen-digit calibration number. If there is no serial number, contact the factory for a proper conversion.

PV Damping Adjustable between 0.0 and 256 seconds

PV Damping allows selection of a response time, in seconds, to a step change in flow rate. It is most often used to smooth fluctuations in output.

Fast Keys 1, 3, 6

Fast Keys 1, 3, 7

3-11



3-12



Section 4 Operation

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4-1

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4-1

Basic Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4-2

Advanced Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4-4

Advanced Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4-13

Detailed Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4-13

INTRODUCTION This section contains information for advanced configuration parameters and diagnostics.

The software configuration settings for the Rosemount 8732 can be accessed through a HART-based communicator, Local Operator Interface (LOI), or through a control system. The software functions for the HART Communicator are described in detail in this section of the manual. It provides an overview and summary of communicator functions. For more complete instructions, see the communicator manual. Before operating the Rosemount 8732 in an actual installation, you should review all of the factory set configuration data to ensure that they reflect the current application.

DIAGNOSTICS Diagnostics are used to verify that the transmitter is functioning properly, to assist in troubleshooting, to identify potential causes of error messages, and to verify the health of the transmitter and flowtube. Diagnostic tests can be initiated through the use of a HART-based communications device, the Local Operator Interface, or through the control system.

Rosemount offers several different diagnostic suites providing various functionality.

Standard diagnostics included with every Rosemount 8732 transmitter are Empty Pipe detection, Electronics Temperature monitoring, Coil Fault detection, and various loop and transmitter tests.

Advanced diagnostics suite option one (DA1 option) contains advanced diagnostics for High Process Noise detection and Grounding and Wiring fault detection.

Advanced diagnostics suite option two (DA2 option) contains advanced diagnostics for the 8714i Internal Meter Calibration Verification. This diagnostic is used to verify the accuracy and performance of the magnetic flow meter installation.

Diagnostic Controls The diagnostic controls menu provides a centralized location for enabling or disabling each of the diagnostics that are available. Note that for some diagnostics to be available, a diagnostics suite package is required.

HART Comm. 1, 2

HART Comm. 1, 2, 1

www.rosemount.com



Empty Pipe

Turn the empty pipe diagnostic on or off as required by the application. For more details on the empty pipe diagnostic, see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

High Process Noise

Turn the high process noise diagnostic on or off as required by the application. For more details on the high process noise diagnostic, see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Grounding / Wiring

Turn the grounding / wiring diagnostic on or off as required by the application. For more details on the grounding / wiring diagnostic, see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Electronics Temperature

Turn the electronics temperature diagnostic on or off as required by the application. For more details on the electronics temperature diagnostic, see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Basic Diagnostics The basic diagnostics menu contains all of the standard diagnostics and tests that are available in the 8732E transmitter.

Self Test

The transmitter test initiates a series of diagnostic tests that are not performed continuously during normal operation. It performs the following tests:

• Display Test

• RAM Test

• PROM Test

During the entire test, all outputs respond to flow signal. The test requires about ten seconds to complete.

AO Loop Test

The AO Loop test allows you to drive the transmitter output to a desired electrical current output on terminals 1 and 2. The user then has the ability to independently measure the actual loop current against the desired level set be the transmitter. On the LOI, the test will end after five minutes if the transmitter is not returned to normal operation manually.

4 mA

Fix the analog loop current at 4 mA.

20 mA

Fix the analog loop current at 20 mA.

HART Comm. 1, 2, 1, 1

HART Comm. 1, 2, 1, 2

HART Comm. 1, 2, 1, 3

HART Comm. 1, 2, 1, 4

HART Comm. 1, 2, 2

HART Comm. 1, 2, 2, 1

HART Comm. 1, 2, 2, 2

HART Comm. 1, 2, 2, 2, 1

HART Comm. 1, 2, 2, 2, 2

4-2



Simulate Alarm

Send the analog output into an alarm mA value. Actual mA value depends on the alarm configuration.

• Rosemount Standard High Alarm – 22.6 mA

• Rosemount Standard Low Alarm – 3.75 mA

• Namur Compliant High Alarm – 22.6 mA

• Namur Compliant Low Alarm – 3.5 mA

Other

Fix the analog loop current to some other mA value between 3.5 mA and 23.0 mA.

End

This command cancels the analog loop test and returns the analog output back into normal operating mode.

Pulse Output Loop Test

The Pulse Output Loop Test allows you to drive the frequency output at terminals 3 and 4 to a desired value. The user then has the ability to compare the pulse output value measured by auxiliary equipment to the desired pulse output level set by the transmitter. On the LOI the test will end after five minutes if the transmitter is not returned to normal operation manually.

Select Value

Set the value of the pulse output for the test to a value between 1 pulse/day to 10,000 Hz.

End

This command cancels the pulse output loop test and returns the pulse output back into normal operating mode.

Empty Pipe Limits

Empty Pipe allows you to view the current value and configure the diagnostic parameters. For more detail on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Empty Pipe Value

Read the current Empty Pipe Value. This number is a unitless number and is calculated based on multiple installation and process variables. For more detail on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

HART Comm. 1, 2, 2, 2, 3

HART Comm. 1, 2, 2, 2, 4

HART Comm. 1, 2, 2, 2, 5

HART Comm. 1, 2, 2, 3

HART Comm. 1, 2, 2, 3, 1

HART Comm. 1, 2, 2, 3, 2

HART Comm. 1, 2, 2, 4

HART Comm. 1, 2, 2, 4, 1

4-3



Empty Pipe Trigger Level

Limits: 3 to 2000

Configure the threshold limit that the empty pipe value must exceed before the diagnostic alert activates. Default from the factory is set to 100. For more detail on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Empty Pipe Counts

Limits: 5 to 50

Configure the number of consecutive times that the empty pipe value must exceed the empty pipe trigger level before the diagnostic alert activates. Counts are taken at 1.5 second intervals. Default from the factory is set to 5. For more detail on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.


Electronics Temperature allows you to view the current value for the electronics temperature.

Advanced Diagnostics The advanced diagnostics menu contains information on all of the additional diagnostics and tests that are available in the 8732 transmitter if one of the diagnostics suite packages was ordered.

Rosemount offers two advanced diagnostic suites. Functionality under this menu will depend on which of these suites are ordered.

Advanced diagnostics suite option one (DA1 option) contains advanced diagnostics for High Process Noise detection and Grounding and Wiring fault detection.

Advanced diagnostics suite option two (DA2 option) contains advanced diagnostics for the 8714i Internal Meter Calibration Verification. This diagnostic is used to verify the accuracy and performance of the magnetic flow meter installation.

8714i Calibration Verification™

This diagnostic allows you to test and verify that the flowtube, transmitter, or both are working within specifications. For more details on this diagnostic, see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Run 8714i Verification

Run the meter verification test to check the transmitter, flowtube, or entire installation.

Full Meter Verification

Run the internal meter verification to validate the entire installation, flowtube and transmitter at the same time.

HART Comm. 1, 2, 2, 4, 2

HART Comm. 1, 2, 2, 4, 3

HART Comm. 1, 2, 2, 5

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 1

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 1, 1

4-4



Transmitter Only

Run the internal meter verification to validate the transmitter only.

Flowtube Only

Run the internal meter verification to validate the flowtube only.

8714i Results

Review the results of the most recently performed 8714i Internal Meter Verification test. Information in this section details the measurements taken and if the meter passed the verification test. For more details on these results and what they mean, see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Test Condition

Displays the conditions that the 8714i Calibration Verification test was performed under. For more details on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Test Criteria

Displays the criteria that the 8714i Calibration Verification test was performed against. For more details on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

8714i Test Result

Displays the results of the 8714i Calibration Verification test as pass or fail. For more details on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Simulated Velocity

Displays the test velocity used to verify transmitter calibration. For more details on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Actual Velocity

Displays the velocity measured by the transmitter during the transmitter calibration verification test. For more details on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Velocity Deviation

Displays the deviation of the transmitter calibration verification test. For more details on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Transmitter Calibration Test Result

Displays the result of the transmitter calibration verification test as pass or fail. For more details on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 1, 2

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 1, 3

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 2

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 1

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 2

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 4

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 5

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 6

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 7

4-5



4-6

Flowtube Sensor Calibration Deviation

Displays the deviation of the flowtube sensor calibration verification test. For more details on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Flowtube Sensor Calibration Test Result

Displays the result of the flowtube sensor calibration verification test as pass or fail. For more details on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Coil Circuit Test Result

Displays the result of the coil circuit test as pass or fail. For more details on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

NOTE To access these features, you must scroll to this option in the HART Field Communicator.

Electrode Circuit Test Result

Displays the result of the electrode circuit test as pass or fail. For more details on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.


Flowtube Signature

The flowtube signature describes the flowtube characteristics to the transmitter and is an integral part of the flowtube meter verification test. From this menu you can view the current stored signature, have the transmitter take and store the flowtube signature, manually enter the signature values, and re-call the last saved good values for the flowtube signature. For more details on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Signature Values

Review the current values stored for the flowtube signature. For more details on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Re-Signature Meter

Have the transmitter measure and store the flowtube signature values. These values will then be used as the baseline for the meter verification test. Use this when connecting to older Rosemount or competitors’ flowtubes or installing the magnetic flowmeter system for the first time. For more details on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Recall Last Saved Values

Recalls the last saved “good” values for the flowtube signature.

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 8

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 9

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 10

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 11

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 3

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 3, 1

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 3, 2

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 3, 3



4-7

Set Pass/Fail Criteria

Set the maximum allowable deviation percentage test criteria for the 8714i Internal Meter Verification test. There are three tests that this criteria can be set for:

• Full Pipe; No Flow (Best test condition) – Default is 2%

• Full Pipe; Flowing – Default is 3%

• Empty Pipe – Default is 5%

NOTEIf the 8714i Internal Meter Verification test is done with an empty pipe, the electrode circuit will NOT be tested.

No Flow Limit

1 to 10 percent

Set the pass/fail test criteria for the 8714i Meter Verification test at Full Pipe, No Flow conditions.

Flowing Limit

1 to 10 percent

Set the pass/fail test criteria for the 8714i Meter Verification test at Full Pipe, Flowing conditions.

Empty Pipe Limit

1 to 10 percent

Set the pass/fail test criteria for the 8714i Meter Verification test at Empty Pipe conditions.

Measurements

View the measured values taken during the tube signature process. Values are shown for the Coil Resistance, Coil Signature, and Electrode Resistance.

Coil Resistance

View the measured value for the coil resistance taken during the flowtube signature process.

Coil Signature

View the measured value for the coil signature taken during the flowtube signature process.

Electrode Resistance

View the measured value for the electrode resistance taken during the flowtube signature process.

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 4

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 4, 1

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 4, 2

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 4, 3

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 5

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 5, 1

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 5, 2

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 1, 5, 3



4-20 mA Verify

The 4-20 mA verify test is a diagnostic built into the transmitter to verify that the analog loop is functioning correctly. For more details on this diagnostic, see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

4-20 mA Verification

Run the 4-20 mA verification test to check the integrity of the analog loop.

4-20 mA Verify Results

View the results of the 4-20 mA Loop Verification test.

Licensing

If a diagnostic suite was not ordered initially, advanced diagnostics can be licensed in the field. Access the licensing information from this menu. For more details on licensing, see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

License Status

Determine if a diagnostics suite has been licensed, and if so, which diagnostics are available for activation.

License Key

A license key is required to activate diagnostics in the field if the diagnostic suite was not initially ordered. This menu allows for gathering of necessary data to generate a license key and also the ability to enter the license key once it has been received.

Device ID

This function displays the Device ID and Software Revision for the transmitter. Both of these pieces of information are required to generate a license key.

License Key

Allows you to enter a license key to activate a diagnostic suite.

Diagnostic Variable Values

From this menu, all of the diagnostic variable values can be reviewed. This information can be used to get more information about the transmitter, flowtube, and process, or to get more detail about an alert that may have activated.

Empty Pipe Value

Read the current value of the Empty Pipe parameter. This value will read zero if Empty Pipe is turned off.

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 2

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 2, 1

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 2, 2

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 3

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 3, 1

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 3, 2

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 3, 2, 1

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 3, 2, 2

HART Comm. 1, 2, 4

HART Comm. 1, 2, 4, 1

4-8




Read the current value of the Electronics Temperature.

Line Noise

Read the current value of the amplitude of AC line noise measured on the transmitter’s electrode inputs. This value is used in the grounding / wiring diagnostic.

5 Hz Signal to Noise Ratio

Read the current value of the signal to noise ratio at 5 Hz. For optimum performance, a value greater than 100 is preferred. Values less than 25 will cause the High Process Noise alert to activate.


Read the current value of the signal to noise ratio at 37.5 Hz. For optimum performance, a value greater than 100 is preferred. Values less than 25 will cause the High Process Noise alert to activate.

Signal Power

Read the current value of the velocity of the fluid through the flowtube. Higher velocities result in greater signal power.

8714i Results

Review the results of the 8714i Internal Meter Verification tests. For more details on these results and what they mean, see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Test Condition

Displays the conditions that the 8714i Calibration Verification test was performed under. For more details on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Test Criteria

Displays the criteria that the 8714i Calibration Verification test was performed against. For more details on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

8714i Test Result

Displays the results of the 8714i Calibration Verification test as pass or fail. For more details on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Simulated Velocity

Displays the test velocity used to verify transmitter calibration. For more details on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

HART Comm. 1, 2, 4, 2

HART Comm. 1, 2, 4, 3

HART Comm. 1, 2, 4, 4

HART Comm. 1, 2, 4, 5

HART Comm. 1, 2, 4, 6

HART Comm. 1, 2, 4, 7

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 7, 1

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 7, 2

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 7, 3

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 7, 4

4-9



Actual Velocity

Displays the velocity measured by the transmitter during the transmitter calibration verification test. For more details on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Velocity Deviation

Displays the deviation of the transmitter calibration verification test. For more details on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Transmitter Verification Test Result

Displays the result of the transmitter calibration verification test as pass or fail. For more details on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Flowtube Sensor Verification Deviation

Displays the deviation of the flowtube sensor calibration verification test. For more details on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Flowtube Sensor Verification Result

Displays the result of the flowtube sensor calibration verification test as pass or fail. For more details on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Coil Circuit Test Result


Displays the result of the coil circuit test as pass or fail. For more details on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Electrode Circuit Test Result


Displays the result of the electrode circuit test as pass or fail. For more details on this parameter see Appendix C: Diagnostics.

Trims Trims are used to calibrate the analog loop, calibrate the transmitter, re-zero the transmitter, and calibrate the transmitter with another manufacturer’s flowtube. Proceed with caution whenever performing a trim function.

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 7, 5

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 7, 6

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 7, 7

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 7, 8

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 7, 9

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 7, 10

HART Comm. 1, 2, 3, 7, 11

HART Comm. 1, 2, 5

4-10



D/A Trim

The D/A Trim is used to calibrate the 4-20 mA analog loop output from the transmitter. For maximum accuracy, the analog output should be trimmed for your system loop. Use the following steps to complete the Output Trim function.

1. Set the loop to manual, if necessary.

2. Connect a precision ammeter in the 4–20 mA loop.

3. Initiate the Output Trim function with the LOI or Handheld Communicator.

4. Enter the 4 mA meter value when prompted to do so.


6. Return the loop to automatic control, if necessary.

The 4–20 mA trim is now completed. You may repeat the 4–20 mA trim to check the results, or use the analog output test.

Scaled D/A Trim

Scaled D/A trim enables you to calibrate the flowmeter analog output using a different scale than the standard 4-20 mA output scale. Non-scaled D/A trimming (described above), is typically performed using an ammeter where calibration values are entered in units of milliamperes. Both non-scaled D/A trimming and scaled D/A trimming allow you to trim the 4-20mA output to approximately ±5% of the nominal 4mA end point and ±3% of the nominal 20mA end point. Scaled D/A trimming allows you to trim the flowmeter using a scale that may be more convenient based upon your method of measurement.

For example, it may be more convenient for you to make current measurements by direct voltage readings across the loop resistor. If your loop resistor is 500 ohms, and you want to calibrate the meter using voltage measurements made across this resistor, you could rescale your trim points from 4-20mA to 4-20mA x 500 ohm or 2-10 VDC. Once your scaled trim points have been entered as 2 and 10, you can calibrate your flowmeter by entering voltage measurements directly from the voltmeter.

Digital Trim

Digital trim is the function by which the factory calibrates the transmitter. This procedure is rarely needed by customers. It is only necessary if you suspect the Rosemount 8732E is no longer accurate. A Rosemount 8714 Calibration Standard is required to complete a digital trim. Attempting a digital trim without a Rosemount 8714 Field Calibrator may result in an inaccurate transmitter or an error message. Digital trim must be performed only with the coil drive mode set to 5 Hz and with a nominal flowtube calibration number stored in the memory.

HART Comm. 1, 2, 5, 1

HART Comm. 1, 2, 5, 2

HART Comm. 1, 2, 5, 3

4-11



NOTEAttempting a digital trim without a Rosemount 8714 may result in an inaccurate transmitter, or a “DIGITAL TRIM FAILURE” message may appear. If this message occurs, no values were changed in the transmitter. Simply power down the Rosemount 8732E to clear the message.

To simulate a nominal flowtube with the Rosemount 8714, you must change the following four parameters in the Rosemount 8732E:

1. Tube Calibration Number—1000015010000000

2. Units—ft/s

3. PV URV—20 mA = 30.00 ft/s

4. PV LRV—4 mA = 0 ft/s

5. Coil Drive Frequency—5 Hz

The instructions for changing the Tube Calibration Number, Units, PV URV, and PV LRV are located in “Basic Setup” on page 3-7. Instructions for changing the Coil Drive Frequency can be found on page 4-19 in this section.

Set the loop to manual, if necessary, before you begin. Complete the following steps:

1. Power down the transmitter.

2. Connect the transmitter to a Rosemount 8714 flowtube simulator.

3. Power up the transmitter with the Rosemount 8714 connected and read the flow rate. The electronics need about a 5-minute warm-up time to stabilize.

4. Set the 8714 calibrator to the 30 ft/s setting.

5. The flow rate reading after warm-up should be between 29.97 and 30.03 ft/s.

6. If the reading is within the range, return the transmitter to the original configuration parameters.

7. If the reading is not within this range, initiate a digital trim with the LOI or Handheld Communicator. The digital trim takes about 90 seconds to complete. No transmitter adjustments are required.

Auto Zero

The auto zero function initializes the transmitter for use with the 37 Hz coil drive mode only. Run this function only with the transmitter and flowtube installed in the process. The flowtube must be filled with process fluid at zero flow. Before running the auto zero function, be sure the coil drive mode is set to 37 Hz (Auto Zero will not run with the coil drive frequency set at 5 Hz).

Set the loop to manual if necessary and begin the auto zero procedure. The transmitter completes the procedure automatically in about 90 seconds. A symbol appears in the lower right-hand corner of the display to indicate that the procedure is running.

HART Comm. 1, 2, 5, 4

4-12



Universal Trim

The universal auto trim function enables the Rosemount 8732E to calibrate flowtubes that were not calibrated at the Rosemount factory. The function is activated as one step in a procedure known as in-process calibration. If your Rosemount flowtube has a 16-digit calibration number, in-process calibration is not required. If it does not, or if your flowtube is made by another manufacturer, complete the following steps for in-process calibration.

1. Determine the flow rate of the process fluid in the flowtube.

NOTEThe flow rate in the line can be determined by using another flowtube in the line, by counting the revolutions of a centrifugal pump, or by performing a bucket test to determine how fast a given volume is filled by the process fluid.

2. Complete the universal auto trim function.

3. When the routine is completed, the flowtube is ready for use.

Status Status displays a summary of the health of the transmitter. If there are any alerts or error messages that have activated, they will be listed here.

ADVANCED CONFIGURATION

In addition to the basic configuration options and the diagnostic information and controls, the 8732 has many advanced functions that can also be configured as required by the application.

DETAILED SETUP The detailed setup function provides access to other parameters within the transmitter that can be configured such as coil drive frequency, output parameters, local display configuration, and other general information about the device.

Additional Parameters The additional parameters menu provides a means to configure optional parameters within the 8732E transmitter.

Coil Drive Frequency

Coil drive frequency allows pulse-rate selection of the flowtube coils.

5 Hz

The standard coil drive frequency is 5 Hz, which is sufficient for nearly all applications.

37 Hz

If the process fluid causes a noisy or unstable output, increase the coil drive frequency to 37 Hz. If the 37 Hz mode is selected, perform the auto zero function.

Density Value

The density value is used to convert from a volumetric flow rate to a mass flow rate using the following equation:

Qm = Qv � ρ

HART Comm. 1, 2, 5, 5

HART Comm. 1, 2, 6

HART Comm. 1, 4

HART Comm. 1, 4, 1

HART Comm. 1, 4, 1, 1

HART Comm. 1, 4, 1, 2

4-13



Where:

Qm is the mass flow rate

Qv is the volumetric flow rate, and

ρ is the fluid density

PV Upper Sensor Limit (USL)

The PV USL is the maximum value that the 20 mA value can be set to. This is the upper measuring limit of the transmitter and flowtube.

PV Lower Sensor Limit (LSL)

The PV LSL is the minimum value that the 4 mA value can be set to. This is the lower measuring limit of the transmitter and flowtube.

PV Minimum Span

The PV minimum span is the minimum flow range that must separate the 4 mA and 20 mA set point values.

Configure Outputs The configure outputs functionality contains functionality to configure the more advanced features that control the analog, pulse, auxiliary, and totalizer outputs of the transmitter.

Analog Output

Under this function the advanced features of the analog output can be configured.

PV Upper Range Value (URV)

The upper range value (URV), or analog output range, is preset to 30 ft/s at the factory. The units that appear will be the same as those selected under the units parameter.

The URV (20 mA point) can be set for both forward or reverse flow rate. Flow in the forward direction is represented by positive values and flow in the reverse direction is represented by negative values. The URV can be any value from –39.3 ft/s to +39.3 ft/s (-12 m/s to +12 m/s), as long as it is at least 1 ft/s from the lower range value (4 mA point). The URV can be set to a value less than the lower range value. This will cause the transmitter analog output to operate in reverse, with the current increasing for lower (or more negative) flow rates.


HART Comm. 1, 4, 1, 3

HART Comm. 1, 4, 1, 4

HART Comm. 1, 4, 1, 5

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 1

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 1, 1

4-14



PV Lower Range Value (LRV)

Reset the lower range value (LRV), or analog output zero, to change the size of the range (or span) between the URV and LRV. Under normal circumstances, the LRV should be set to a value near the minimum expected flow rate to maximize resolution. The LRV must be between –39.3 ft/s to +39.3 ft/s (-12 m/s to +12 m/s).

NOTEThe LRV can be set to a value greater than the URV, which will cause the analog output to operate in reverse. In this mode, the analog output will increase with lower (more negative) flow rates.

Example

If the URV is greater than the LRV, the analog output becomes 3.9 mA when the flow rate falls below the selected 4 mA point. The minimum allowable span between the URV and LRV is 1 ft/s. Do not set the LRV within 1 ft/s of the 20 mA point. For example, if the URV is set to 15.67 ft/s and if the desired URV is greater than the LRV, then the highest allowable analog zero setting would be 14.67 ft/s. If the desired URV is less than the LRV, then the lowest allowable LRV would be 16.67 ft/s.


PV Analog Output

The PV analog output displays the current analog output value (mA) of the transmitter corresponding to the current measured flow rate.

Analog Output Alarm Type

The analog output alarm type displays the alarm mode the 8732E is currently set for. This value is set by a switch on the electronics board. There are two available options for this setting:

• High

• Low

Loop Test

The loop test allows you to drive the transmitter output to a desired electrical current output on terminals 1 and 2. This capability allows you to check the entire current loop prior to start-up. On the LOI the test will end after five minutes if the transmitter is not returned to normal operation manually.

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 1, 2

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 1, 3

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 1, 4

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 1, 5

4-15



D/A Trim

The D/A Trim is used to calibrate the 4-20 mA analog loop output from the transmitter. For maximum accuracy, the analog output should be trimmed for your system loop. Use the following steps to complete the Output Trim function.

1. Set the loop to manual, if necessary.

2. Connect a precision ammeter in the 4–20 mA loop.

3. Initiate the Output Trim function with the LOI or Handheld Communicator.



6. Return the loop to automatic control, if necessary.

The 4–20 mA trim is now completed. You may repeat the 4–20 mA trim to check the results, or use the analog output test.

Scaled D/A Trim

Scaled D/A trim enables you to calibrate the flowmeter analog output using a different scale than the standard 4-20 mA output scale. Non-scaled D/A trimming (described above), is typically performed using an ammeter where calibration values are entered in units of milliamperes. Both non-scaled D/A trimming and scaled D/A trimming allow you to trim the 4-20mA output to approximately ±5% of the nominal 4mA end point and ±3% of the nominal 20mA end point. Scaled D/A trimming allows you to trim the flowmeter using a scale that may be more convenient based upon your method of measurement.

For example, it may be more convenient for you to make current measurements by direct voltage readings across the loop resistor. If your loop resistor is 500 ohms, and you want to calibrate the meter using voltage measurements made across this resistor, you could rescale your trim points from 4-20mA to 4-20mA x 500 ohm or 2-10 VDC. Once your scaled trim points have been entered as 2 and 10, you can calibrate your flowmeter by entering voltage measurements directly from the voltmeter.

Alarm Level

The alarm level allows you to drive the transmitter to preset values if an alarm occurs. There are two options:

• Rosemount Alarm and Saturation Values

• NAMUR-Compliant Alarm and Saturation Levels

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 1, 6

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 1, 7

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 1, 8

Table 4-1. Rosemount (Standard) Alarm and Saturation Values

Level 4-20 mA Saturation 4-20 mA Alarm

Low 3.9 mA ≤3.75 mA

High 20.8 mA ≥22.6 mA

4-16



Pulse Output

Under this function the pulse output of the 8732E can be configured.

Pulse Scaling

Transmitter may be commanded to supply a specified frequency between 1 pulse/ day at 39.37 ft/sec to 10,000 Hz at 1 ft/sec.

NOTELine size, special units, and density must be selected prior to configuration of the Pulse Scaling factor.

The pulse output scaling equates one transistor switch closure pulse to a selectable number of volume units. The volume unit used for scaling pulse output is taken from the numerator of the configured flow units. For example, if gal/min had been chosen when selecting the flow rate unit, the volume unit displayed would be gallons.

NOTEThe pulse output scaling is designed to operate between 0 and 10,000 Hz. The electronics will not accept a conversion factor that would result in a pulse frequency outside that range. The minimum conversion factor value is found by dividing the minimum span (in units of volume per second) by 10,000 Hz.

When selecting pulse output scaling, remember that the maximum pulse rate is 10,000 Hz. With the 110 percent overrange capability, the absolute limit is 11,000 Hz. For example, if you want the Rosemount 8732E to pulse every time 0.01 gallons pass through the flowtube, and the flow rate is 10,000 gal/min, you will exceed the 10,000 Hz full-scale limit:

The best choice for this parameter depends upon the required resolution, the number of digits in the totalizer, the extent of range required, and the maximum counter input frequency.

NOTEFor totalizing on the LOI, ten digits are available.

Table 4-2. NAMUR-Compliant Alarm and Saturation Values


Low 3.8 mA ≤3.5 mA

High 20.5 mA ≥22.6 mA

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 2

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 2, 1

10,000 gal/min

60 sec/min( ) × 60 sec/min( )---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16666.7 Hz=

4-17



4-18

Pulse Width

The factory default pulse width is 1.5 mS.

The width, or duration, of the pulse width can be adjusted to match the requirements of different counters or controllers (see Figure 4-1 on page 4-18). These are typically lower frequency applications (< 1000 Hz). The transmitter will accept values from 0.1 mS to 650 mS, with the actual minimum pulse width that can be generated is 1.3 mS.

For frequencies higher than 1000 Hz, it is recommended to set the pulse mode to 50% duty cycle.

If the pulse width is set too wide (more than 1/2 the period of the pulse) the transmitter will automatically default to a pulse width of 50% duty cycle.

Figure 4-1. Pulse Output

Example

If pulse width is set to 100 mS, the maximum output is 5 Hz; for a pulse width of 0.5 mS, the maximum output would be 1000 Hz (at the maximum frequency output there is a 50 percent duty cycle).

To achieve the greatest maximum frequency output, set the pulse width to the lowest value that is consistent with the requirements of the pulse output power source, pulse driven external totalizer, or other peripheral equipment.

Example

The maximum flow rate is 10,000 gpm. Set the pulse output scaling such that the transmitter outputs 10,000 Hz at 10,000 gpm.

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 2, 2

PULSE WIDTH MINIMUM PERIOD (50% duty cycle) MAXIMUM FREQUENCY

100 ms 200 ms

0.5 ms 1.0 ms

Pulse Width

Period

OPEN

CLOSED

1 Cycle

200 mS-------------------- 5 Hz=

1 Cycle

1.0 mS-------------------- 1000 Hz=

Pulse Scaling Flow Rate (gpm)

(60 s/min)(Frequency)-----------------------------------------------------------=

10,000 gpm

(60 s/min)(10,000 Hz)----------------------------------------------------------=

Pulse Scaling 0.0167 gal/pulse=

1 Pulse 0.0167 gallon=



NOTEChanges to pulse width are only required when there is a minimum pulse width required for external counters, relays, etc. If frequency generated by the transmitter requires a smaller pulse width than the pulse width selected, the transmitter will automatically go to 50% duty cycle.

Example

The external counter is ranged for 350 gpm and pulse is set for one gallon. Assuming the pulse width is 0.5 ms, the maximum frequency output is 5.833 Hz.

Example

The upper range value (20 mA) is 3000 gpm. To obtain the highest resolution of the pulse output, 10,000 Hz is scaled to the full scale analog reading.

Pulse Mode

The Pulse mode configures the frequency output of the pulse. It can be set to either 50% duty cycle, or fixed. There are two options that Pulse Mode can be configured to:

• Pulse Output

• Frequency Output

To use Pulse Width settings, Pulse Mode must be set to Pulse Output.

Pulse Output Loop Test

The Pulse Output Loop Test allows you to drive the frequency output at terminals 3 and 4 to a desired value. This capability allows you to check auxiliary equipment prior to start-up. On the LOI the test will end after five minutes if the transmitter is not returned to normal operation manually.

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 2, 3

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 2, 4

FrequencyFlow Rate (gpm)

(60 s/min)(Pulse Scaling gal/pulse)----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------=

350 gpm

(60 s/min)(1 gal/pulse)-----------------------------------------------------------=

5.833 Hz=

Pulse ScalingFlow Rate (gpm)

(60 s/min)(Frequency)-----------------------------------------------------------=

3000 gpm

(60 s/min)(10,000Hz)--------------------------------------------------------=

0.005 gal/pulse=

1 Pulse 0.005 gallon=

4-19



Digital Input / Digital Output

This menu is used to configure the optional digital input and digital output parameters of the 8732E transmitter. Note that this configuration option is only active if the auxiliary output suite (option code AX) was ordered.

Digital Input Channel 1

Configure the digital input value here. This controls the digital input to the transmitter on terminals 5(-) and 6(+). There are three options that the digital input can be configured for:

• Positive Zero Return (PZR)

• Totalizer Reset

Digital Output Channel 2

Configure the digital output value here. This controls the digital output from the transmitter on terminals 7(-) and 8(+). There are four options that the digital output can be configured for:

• Zero Flow

• Reverse Flow

• Transmitter Fault

• Empty Pipe

Reverse Flow

Enable or disable the transmitter’s ability to read reverse flow.

Reverse Flow allows the transmitter to read negative flow. This may occur when flow in the pipe is going the negative direction, or when either electrode wires or coil wires are reversed. This also enables the totalizer to count in the reverse direction.

Totalizer Setup

The totalizer setup menu allows for the viewing and configuration of the totalizer parameters.

Totalizer Units

Totalizer units allow for the configuration of the units that the totalized value will be displayed as. These units are independent of the flow units.

Measured Gross Total

Measured gross total provides the output reading of the totalizer. This value is the amount of process fluid that has passed through the flowmeter since the totalizer was last reset.

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 3

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 3, 1

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 3, 2

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 4

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 5

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 5, 1

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 5, 2

4-20



Measured Net Total

Measured net total provides the output reading of the totalizer. This value is the amount of process fluid that has passed through the flowmeter since the totalizer was last reset. When reverse flow is enabled, the net total represents the difference between the total flow in the forward direction less the total flow in the reverse direction.

Measured Reverse Total

Measured reverse total provides the output reading of the totalizer. This value is the amount of process fluid that has passed through the flowmeter in the reverse direction since the totalizer was last reset. This value is only totalized when reverse flow is enabled.

Start Totalizer

Start totalizer starts the totalizer counting from its current value.

Stop Totalizer

Stop totalizer interrupts the totalizer count until it is restarted again. This feature is often used during pipe cleaning or other maintenance operations.

Reset Totalizer

Reset totalizer resets the net totalizer value to zero. The totalizer must be stopped before resetting.

NOTEThe totalizer value is saved in the Non-Volatile memory of the electronics every three seconds. Should power to the transmitter be interrupted, the totalizer value will start at the last saved value when power is re-applied.

Alarm Level

The alarm level allows you to drive the transmitter to preset values if an alarm occurs. There are two options:

• Rosemount Alarm and Saturation Values

• NAMUR-Complaint Alarm and Saturation Levels

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 5, 3

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 5, 4

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 5, 5

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 5, 6

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 5, 7

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 6

Table 4-3. Rosemount (Standard) Alarm and Saturation Values


Low 3.9 mA ≤3.75 mA

High 20.8 mA ≥22.6 mA

Table 4-4. NAMUR-Compliant Alarm and Saturation Values


Low 3.8 mA ≤3.5 mA

High 20.5 mA ≥22.6 mA

4-21



HART Output

Multidrop configuration refers to the connection of several flowmeters to a single communications transmission line. Communication occurs digitally between a HART-based communicator or control system and the flowmeters. Multidrop mode automatically deactivates the analog output of the flowmeters. Using the HART communications protocol, up to 15 transmitters can be connected on a single twisted pair of wires or over leased phone lines. The use of a multidrop installation requires consideration of the update rate necessary from each transmitter, the combination of transmitter models, and the length of the transmission line. Multidrop installations are not recommended where intrinsic safety is a requirement. Communication with the transmitters can be accomplished with commercially available Bell 202 modems and a host implementing the HART protocol. Each transmitter is identified by a unique address (1-15) and responds to the commands defined in the HART protocol.

Variable Mapping

Variable mapping allows you to configure the variables that are mapped to the tertiary and quaternary variables.

Tertiary Variable

The tertiary variable maps the third variable of the transmitter. This variable is a HART only variable and can be read off of the HART signal with a HART enabled input card, or can be burst for use with a HART Tri-Loop to convert the HART signal to an analog output. Options available for mapping to this variable are:

• Forward Gross

• Forward Net

• Reverse Gross

• Electronics Temp

Quaternary Variable

The quaternary variable maps the fourth variable of the transmitter. This variable is a HART only variable and can be read off of the HART signal with a HART enabled input card, or can be burst for use with a HART Tri-Loop to convert the HART signal to an analog output. Options available for mapping to this variable are:

• Forward Gross

• Forward Net

• Reverse Gross

• Electronics Temp

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 7

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 7, 1

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 7, 1, 1

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 7, 1, 2

4-22



Polling Address

Poll Address enables you to set the poll address for a multidropped meter. The poll address is used to identify each meter on the multi-drop line. Follow the on-screen instructions to set the address at a number from 1 to 15. To set or change the flowmeter address, establish communication with the selected Rosemount 8732E in the loop.

NOTEThe Rosemount 8732E is set to poll address zero at the factory, allowing it to operate in the standard point-to-point manner with a 4–20 mA output signal. To activate multidrop communication, the transmitter poll address must be changed to a number between 1 and 15. This change deactivates the 4–20 mA analog output, setting it to 4 mA, and disables the failure mode alarm signal.

Number of Request Preambles

This is the number of preambles required by the 8732E for HART communications.

Number of Response Preambles

This is the number of preambles sent by the 8732E in response to any host request.

Burst Mode

Burst Mode Configuration

The Rosemount 8732E includes a burst mode function that broadcasts the primary variable or all dynamic variables approximately three to four times a second. The burst mode is a specialized function used in very specific applications. The burst mode function enables you to select the variables to broadcast while in the burst mode and to select the burst mode option.

The Burst Mode variable enables you to set the Burst Mode to the needs of your application. Options for the Burst Mode setting include:

• Off–Turns off the Burst Mode so that no data are broadcast on the loop.

• On–Turns Burst Mode on so that the data selected under Burst Option are broadcast over the loop.

Additional command options may appear that are reserved and do not apply to the Rosemount 8732E.

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 7, 2

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 7, 3

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 7, 4

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 7, 5

4-23



Burst Option

Burst option enables you to select the variables to broadcast over the transmitter burst. Choose one of the following options:

• PV–Selects the process variable for broadcast over the transmitter burst.

• Percent Range/Current–Selects the process variable as percent of range and analog output variables for broadcast over the transmitter burst.

• Process vars/crnt–Selects the process variables and analog output variables for broadcast over the transmitter burst.

• Dynamic Vars–Burst all dynamic variables in the transmitter.

LOI Configuration The LOI (local operator interface) configuration contains functionality to configure the LOI outputs of the transmitter.

Language

This allows you to configure the display language shown on the LOI. There are five options available:

• English

• Spanish

• Portuguese

• German

• French

Flowrate Display

This allows you to configure the items that the LOI will display when at the flowrate screen. There are five options available:

• Flowrate and % Span

• % Span and Net Total

• Flowrate and Net Total

• % Span and Gross Total

• Flowrate and Gross Total

Totalizer Display

This allows you to configure the items that the LOI will display when in the totalizer screen. There are two options available:

• Forward Total and Reverse Total

• Net Total and Gross Total

Display Lock

This allows you to enable or disable the display lock for the 8732E. Enabling the display lock will disable the operator interface keys to prevent inadvertent changes that may be caused by wiping the glass cover.

HART Comm. 1, 4, 2, 7, 6

HART Comm. 1, 4, 3

HART Comm. 1, 4, 3, 1

HART Comm. 1, 4, 3, 2

HART Comm. 1, 4, 3, 3

HART Comm. 1, 4, 3, 4

4-24



To lock/unlock the display, hold the UP ARROW for 10 seconds. When display lock is active, an “L” will flash in the lower right-hand corner of the display.

Signal Processing The 8732E contains several advanced functions that can be used to stabilize erratic outputs caused by process noise. The signal processing menu contains this functionality.

Operating Mode

The Operating Mode should be used only when the signal is noisy and gives an unstable output. Filter mode automatically uses 37 Hz coil drive mode and activates signal processing at the factory set default values. When using filter mode, perform an auto zero with no flow and a full flowtube sensor. Either of the parameters, coil drive mode or signal processing, may still be changed individually. Turning Signal Processing off or changing the coil drive frequency to 5 Hz will automatically change the Operating Mode from filter mode to normal mode.

Manually Configure Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The 8732E transmitter includes digital signal processing capabilities that can be used to condition the output from the transmitter by enabling noise rejection. See Appendix D: Digital Signal Processing for a more information on the DSP functionality.

Enable/Disable DSP

When ON is selected, the Rosemount 8732E output is derived using a running average of the individual flow inputs. Signal processing is a software algorithm that examines the quality of the electrode signal against user-specified tolerances. This average is updated at the rate of 10 samples per second with a coil drive frequency of 5 Hz, and 75 samples per second with a coil drive frequency of 37Hz. The three parameters that make up signal processing (number of samples, maximum percent limit, and time limit) are described below.

Samples

0 to 125 Samples

The number of samples function sets the amount of time that inputs are collected and used to calculate the average value. Each second is divided into tenths (1/10) with the number of samples equaling the number of 1/10 second increments used to calculate the average.

For example, a value of:

1 averages the inputs over the past 1/10 second

10 averages the inputs over the past 1 second

100 averages the inputs over the past 10 seconds

125 averages the inputs over the past 12.5 seconds

HART Comm. 1, 4, 4

HART Comm. 1, 4, 4, 1

HART Comm. 1, 4, 4, 2

HART Comm. 1, 4, 4, 2, 1

HART Comm. 1, 4, 4, 2, 2

4-25



4-26

% Limit

0 to 100 Percent

The maximum percent limit is a tolerance band set up on either side of the running average. The percentage value refers to deviation from the running average. For example, if the running average is 100 gal/min, and a 2 percent maximum limit is selected, then the acceptable range is from 98 to 102 gal/min.

Values within the limit are accepted while values outside the limit are analyzed to determine if they are a noise spike or an actual flow change.

Time Limit

0 to 256 Seconds

The time limit parameter forces the output and running average values to the new value of an actual flow rate change that is outside the percent limit boundaries. It thereby limits response time to flow changes to the time limit value rather than the length of the running average.

For example, if the number of samples selected is 100, then the response time of the system is 10 seconds. In some cases this may be unacceptable. By setting the time limit, you can force the 8732E to clear the value of the running average and re-establish the output and average at the new flow rate once the time limit has elapsed. This parameter limits the response time added to the loop. A suggested time limit value of two seconds is a good starting point for most applicable process fluids. The selected signal processing configuration may be turned ON or OFF to suit your needs.

Coil Drive Frequency

Coil drive frequency allows pulse-rate selection of the flowtube coils.

5 Hz

The standard coil drive frequency is 5 Hz, which is sufficient for nearly all applications.

37 Hz

If the process fluid causes a noisy or unstable output, increase the coil drive frequency to 37 Hz. If the 37 Hz mode is selected, perform the auto zero function with no flow and a full flowtube sensor.

Low Flow Cutoff

Low flow cutoff allows you to specify the flow rate, between 0.01 and 38.37 feet per second, below which the outputs are driven to zero flow. The units format for low flow cutoff cannot be changed. It is always displayed as feet per second regardless of the format selected. The low flow cutoff value applies to both forward and reverse flows.

Primary Variable Damping

0 to 256 Seconds

Primary Variable Damping allows selection of a response time, in seconds, to a step change in flow rate. It is most often used to smooth fluctuations in output.

HART Comm. 1, 4, 4, 2, 3

HART Comm. 1, 4, 4, 2, 4

HART Comm. 1, 4, 4, 3

HART Comm. 1, 4, 4, 4

HART Comm. 1, 4, 4, 5



Universal Auto Trim The universal auto trim function enables the Rosemount 8732E to calibrate flowtubes that were not calibrated at the Rosemount factory. The function is activated as one step in a procedure known as in-process calibration. If your Rosemount flowtube has a 16-digit calibration number, in-process calibration is not required. If it does not, or if your flowtube is made by another manufacturer, complete the following steps for in-process calibration.

1. Determine the flow rate of the process fluid in the flowtube.

NOTEThe flow rate in the line can be determined by using another flowtube in the line, by counting the revolutions of a centrifugal pump, or by performing a bucket test to determine how fast a given volume is filled by the process fluid.

2. Complete the universal auto trim function.

3. When the routine is completed, the flowtube is ready for use.

Device Info Information variables are used for identification of Flowmeters in the field and to store information that may be useful in service situations. Information variables have no effect on flowmeter output or process variables.

Manufacturer

Manufacturer is an informational variable provided by the factory. For the Rosemount 8732E, the Manufacturer is Rosemount.

Tag

Tag is the quickest variable to identify and distinguish between flowmeters. Flowmeters can be tagged according to the requirements of your application. The tag may be up to eight characters long.

Descriptor

Descriptor is a longer user-defined variable to assist with more specific identification of the particular flowmeter. It is usually used in multi-flowmeter environments and provides 16 characters.

Message

The message variable provides an even longer user-defined variable for identification and other purposes. It provides 32 characters of information and is stored with the other configuration data.

Date

Date is a user-defined variable that provides a place to save a date, typically used to store the last date that the transmitter configuration was changed.

HART Comm. 1, 4, 5

HART Comm. 1, 4, 6

HART Comm. 1, 4, 6, 1

HART Comm. 1, 4, 6, 2

HART Comm. 1, 4, 6, 3

HART Comm. 1, 4, 6, 4

HART Comm. 1, 4, 6, 5

4-27



Device ID

This function displays the Device ID of the transmitter. This is one piece of information required to generate a license code to enable diagnostics in the field.

Flowtube Sensor Serial Number

The PV sensor serial number is the serial number of the flowtube connected to the transmitter and can be stored in the transmitter configuration for future reference. The number provides easy identification if the flowtube needs servicing or for other purposes.

Flowtube Sensor Tag

Flowtube tag is the quickest and shortest way of identifying and distinguishing between flowtubes. Flowtubes can be tagged according to the requirements of your application. The tag may be up to eight characters long.

Write Protect

Write protect is a read-only informational variable that reflects the setting of the hardware security switch. If write protect is ON, configuration data are protected and cannot be changed from a HART-based communicator, the LOI, or control system. If write protect is OFF, configuration data may be changed using the communicator, LOI, or control system.

Revision Numbers


Revisions numbers are fixed informational variables that provide the revision number for different elements of your HART Communicator and Rosemount 8732E. These revision numbers may be required when calling the factory for support. Revision numbers can only be changed at the factory and are provided for the following elements:

Universal Revision Number

Universal revision number – Designates the HART Universal Command specification to which the transmitter is designed to conform.

Field Device Revision Number

Field device revision number – Designates the revision for the Rosemount 8732E specific command identification for HART compatibility.

HART Comm. 1, 4, 6, 6

HART Comm. 1, 4, 6, 7

HART Comm. 1, 4, 6, 8

HART Comm. 1, 4, 6, 9

HART Comm. 1, 4, 6, 10

HART Comm. 1, 4, 6, 10, 1

HART Comm. 1, 4, 6, 10, 2

4-28



Software Revision Number

This function displays the software revision number of the transmitter. This is one piece of information required to generate a license code to enable diagnostics in the field.

Final Assembly Number

Final Assembly Number – Factory set number that refers to the electronics of your flowmeter. The number is configured into the flowmeter for later reference.

Construction Materials


Construction materials contain information about the flowtube that is connected to the transmitter. This information is configured into the transmitter for later reference. This information can be helpful when calling the factory for support.

Flange Type

Flange type enables you to select the flange type for your magnetic transmitter system. This variable only needs to be changed if you have changed your flowtube. Options for this value are:

• 150# ANSI

• 300# ANSI

• 600# ANSI

• 900# ANSI

• PN 10

• PN 16

• PN 25

• PN 40

• PN 64

• Wafer

• Other

HART Comm. 1, 4, 6, 10, 3

HART Comm. 1, 4, 6, 10, 4

HART Comm. 1, 4, 6, 11

HART Comm. 1, 4, 6, 11, 1

4-29



4-30

Flange Material

Flange material enables you to select the flange material for your magnetic transmitter system. This variable only needs to be changed if you have changed your flowtube. Options for this value are:

• Carbon Steel

• 304 Stainless Steel

• 316 Stainless Steel

• Wafer

• Other

Electrode Type

Electrode type enables you to select the electrode type for your magnetic transmitter system. This variable only needs to be changed if you have replaced electrodes or if you have replaced your flowtube. Options for this value are:

• Standard

• Std & Ground

• Bullet

• Other

Electrode Material

Electrode Material enables you to select the electrode material for your magnetic transmitter system. This variable only needs to be changed if you have replaced electrodes or if you have replaced your flowtube. Options for this value are:

• 316L SST

• Hastelloy® C-276

• Tantalum

• Titanium

• 90% Platinum – 10% Iridium

• Alloy 20

• Other

Liner Material

Liner material enables you to select the liner material for the attached flowtube. This variable only needs to be changed if you have replaced your flowtube. Options for this value are:

• Teflon® (PTFE)

• Tefzel® (ETFE)

• PFA

• Polyurethane

• Natural Rubber

• Neoprene

• Other

HART Comm. 1, 4, 6, 11, 2

HART Comm. 1, 4, 6, 11, 3

HART Comm. 1, 4, 6, 11, 4

HART Comm. 1, 4, 6, 11, 5



4-31

Figure 4-2. Field Communicator Menu Tree for the Rosemount 8732E

1. D

evic

e Se

tup

2. P

V

3. P

V A

O

4. P

V L

RV

5.

PV

UR

V

1. P

V

2. P

V %

rnge

3.

PV

AO

4.

Tot

aliz

er S

etup

5.

Pul

se O

utpu

t

1. T

otal

izer

Uni

ts

2. G

ross

Tot

al

3. N

et T

otal

4.

Rev

erse

Tot

al

5. S

tart

Tot

aliz

er

6. S

top

Tota

lizer

7.

Res

et T

otal

ize r

1. D

iagn

ostic

Con

trols

2.

Bas

ic D

iagn

ostic

s

3. A

dvan

ced

Dia

gnos

tics

4. D

iagn

ostic

Var

iabl

es

5. T

rim

s 6.

Vie

w S

tatu

s

1. P

roce

ss

Var

iabl

es

2. D

iagn

ostic

s

3. B

asic

Se

tup

4. D

etai

led

Setu

p

5. R

evie

w

1. S

elf T

est

2. A

O L

oop

Test

3.

Pul

se O

utpu

t Loo

p Te

st

4. E

mpt

y Pi

pe L

imits

5.

Ele

ctro

nics

Tem

p

1. E

P V

alue

2.

Ele

ctro

nics

Tem

p 3.

Lin

e N

oise

4.

5 H

z SN

R

5. 3

7 H

z SN

R

6. S

igna

l Pow

er

7. 8

714i

Res

ults

1. P

V U

nits

2.

Spe

cial

Uni

ts

1. V

olum

e U

nit

2. B

ase

Vol

ume

Uni

t 3.

Con

vers

ion

Num

ber

4. B

ase

Tim

e U

nit

5. F

low

Rat

e U

nit

1. A

nalo

g O

utpu

t 2.

Pul

se O

utpu

t 3.

DI/

DO

Out

put

4. R

ever

se F

low

5.

Tot

aliz

er S

etup

6.

Ala

rm L

evel

7.

HA

RT

Out

put

1. P

V U

RV

2.

PV

LR

V

3. P

V A

O

4. A

O A

larm

Typ

e 5.

AO

Loo

p Te

st

6. D

/A T

rim

7.

Sca

led

D/A

Tri

m

8. A

larm

Lev

el

1. P

ulse

Sca

ling

2. P

ulse

Wid

th

3. P

ulse

Mod

e 4.

Pul

se O

utpu

t Loo

p Te

st

1. T

otal

izer

Uni

ts

2. G

ross

Tot

al

3. N

et T

otal

4.

Rev

erse

Tot

al

5. S

tart

Tota

lizer

6.

Sto

p To

taliz

er

7. R

eset

Tot

aliz

e r

1. V

aria

ble

Map

ping

2.

Pol

l Add

ress

3.

# o

f Req

Pre

ams

4.

# o

f Res

p Pr

eam

s 5.

Bur

st M

ode

6. B

urst

Opt

ion

1. O

pera

ting

Mod

e 2.

Man

Con

fig

DSP

3.

Coi

l Dri

ve F

req

4. L

ow F

low

Cut

off

5. P

V D

ampi

ng

1. C

oil D

rive

Fre

q 2.

Den

sity

Val

ue

3. P

V U

SL

4. P

V L

SL

5. P

V M

in S

pan

1. A

dditi

onal

Par

ams

2. C

onfi

gure

Out

put

3. L

OI C

onfi

g 4.

Sig

nal P

roce

ssin

g 5.

Uni

vers

al T

rim

6.

Dev

ice

Info

1. D

igita

l Inp

ut 1

2.

Dig

ital O

utpu

t 2

1. T

ag

2. F

low

Uni

ts

3. L

ine

Size

4.

PV

UR

V

5. P

V L

RV

6.

Cal

ibra

tion

Num

ber

7. P

V D

ampi

ng

1. F

lang

e T

ype

2. F

lang

e M

ater

ial

3. E

lect

rode

Typ

e 4.

Ele

ctro

de M

ater

ial

5. L

iner

Mat

eria

l

1. M

anuf

actu

rer

2. T

ag

3. D

escr

ipto

r 4.

Mes

sage

5.

Dat

e 6.

Dev

ice

ID

7. P

V S

enso

r S/N

8.

Flo

wtu

be T

ag

9. W

rite

Prot

ect

- R

evis

ion

No.

-

Con

stru

ctio

n M

ater

ials

1. U

nive

rsal

Rev

2.

Tra

nsm

itter

Rev

3.

Sof

twar

e R

ev

4. F

inal

Ass

embl

y #

1. S

tatu

s 2.

Sam

ples

3.

% L

imit

4. T

ime

Lim

it

1. L

angu

age

2. F

low

rate

Dis

play

3.

Tot

aliz

er D

ispl

ay

4. D

ispl

ay L

ock

1. D

/A T

rim

2.

Sca

led

D/A

Tri

m

3. D

igita

l Tri

m

4. A

uto

Zero

5.

Uni

vers

al T

rim

1. 8

714i

Cal

ibra

tion

Ver

ifica

tion

2. 4

-20

mA

Ver

ify

3. L

icen

sing

1. R

un 8

714i

Ver

ifica

tion

2. 8

714i

Res

ults

3.

Flo

wtu

be S

igna

ture

4.

Set

Pas

s/Fa

il C

rite

ria

5. M

easu

rem

ents

1. S

igna

ture

Val

ues

2. R

e-Si

gnat

ure

Met

er

3. R

ecal

l Las

t Sav

ed V

alue

s

1. L

icen

se S

tatu

s 2.

Lic

ense

Key

1.

Dev

ice

ID

2. L

icen

se K

ey

1. T

V is

2.

4V

is

1. 4

-20m

A V

erifi

catio

n 2.

4-2

0mA

Ver

ify

Res

ult

1. C

oil R

esis

tanc

e 2.

Coi

l Sig

natu

re

3. E

lect

rode

Res

ista

nce

1. N

o Fl

ow L

imit

2. F

low

ing,

Lim

it 3.

Em

pty

Pipe

Lim

it

1. T

est C

ondi

tion

2. T

est C

riter

ia

3. 8

714i

Tes

t Res

ult

4. S

imul

ated

Vel

ocity

5.

Act

ual V

eloc

ity

6. V

eloc

ity D

evia

tion

7. X

mtr

Cal

Tes

t Res

ult

8. T

ube

Cal

Dev

iatio

n 9.

Tub

e C

al T

est R

esul

t -

Coi

l Cir

cuit

Tes

t Res

ult

- El

ectro

de C

ircu

it Te

st

Res

ult

1. T

est C

ondi

tion

2. T

est C

riter

ia

3. 8

714i

Tes

t Res

ult

4. S

imul

ated

Vel

ocity

5.

Act

ual V

eloc

ity

6. V

eloc

ity D

evia

tion

7. X

mtr

Cal

Tes

t Res

ult

8. T

ube

Cal

Dev

iatio

n 9.

Tub

e C

al T

est R

esul

t -

Coi

l Cir

cuit

Tes

t Res

ult

- El

ectro

de C

ircu

it Te

st

Res

ult

1. E

P V

alue

2.

EP

Trig

. Lev

el

3. E

P C

ount

s



Figure 4-3. HART Fast KeyFunction HART Fast Keys

Process Variables 1, 1

Primary Variable (PV) 1, 1, 1

PV Percent of Range 1, 1,2

PV Analog Output (AO) 1, 1, 3

Totalizer Set-Up 1, 1, 4

Totalizer Units 1, 1, 4, 1

Gross Total 1,1,4,2

Net Total 1,1,4,3

Reverse Total 1,1,4,4

Start Totalizer 1,1,4,5

Stop Totalizer 1,1,4,6

Reset Totalizer 1,1,4,7

Pulse Output 1,1,5

Diagnostics 1,2

Diagnostic Controls 1,2,1

Basic Diagnostics 1,2,2

Self Test 1,2,2,1

AO Loop Test 1,2,2,2

Pulse Output Loop Test 1,2,2,3

Empty Pipe Limits 1,2,2,4

Empty Pipe (EP) Value 1,2,2,4,1

EP Trigger Level 1,2,2,4,2

EP Counts 1,2,2,4,3

Electronics Temp 1,2,2,5

Advanced Diagnostics 1,2,3

8714i Calibration Verification 1,2,3,1

Run 8714i Verification 1,2,3,1,1

8714i Results 1,2,3,1,2

Test Condition 1,2,3,1,2,1

Test Criteria 1,2,3,1,2,2

8714i Test Result 1,2,3,1,2,3

Simulated Velocity 1,2,3,1,2,4

Actual Velocity 1,2,3,1,2,5

Velocity Deviation 1,2,3,1,2,6

Transmitter Calibration Test Result 1,2,3,1,2,7

Tube Calibration Deviation 1,2,3,1,2,8

Tube Calibration Test Result 1,2,3,1,2,9

Coil Circuit Test Result* 1,2,3,1,2,10

Electrode Circuit Test Result* 1,2,3,1,2,11

Flowtube Signature 1,2,3,1,3

Signature Values 1,2,3,1,3,1

Re-Signature Meter 1,2,3,1,3,2

Recall Last Saved Values 1,2,3,1,3,3

Set Pass/Fail Criteria 1,2,3,1,4

No Flow Limit 1,2,3,1,4,1

Flowing Limit 1,2,3,1,4,2

Empty Pipe Limit 1,2,3,1,4,3

Measurements 1,2,3,1,5

4-20 mA Verify 1,2,3,2

4-20 mA Verification 1,2,3,2,1

4-20 mA Verify Result 1,2,3,2,2

Licensing 1,2,3,3

License Status 1,2,3,3,1

License Key 1,2,3,3,2

4-32



Device ID 1,2,3,3,2,1

License Key 1,2,3,3,2,2

Diagnostic Variables 1,2,4

EP Value 1,2,4,1


Line Noise 1,2,4,3

5 Hz Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) 1,2,4,4

37 Hz SNR 1,2,4,5

Signal Power 1,2,4,6

8714i results 1,2,4,7

Test Condition 1,2,4,7,1

Test Criteria 1,2,4,7,2

8714i Test Result 1,2,4,7,3

Simulated Velocity 1,2,4,7,4

Actual Velocity 1,2,4,7,5

Velocity Deviation 1,2,4,7,6

Transmitter Calibration Test Result 1,2,4,7,7

Tube Calibration Deviation 1,2,4,7,8

Tube Calibration Test Result 1,2,4,7,9

Coil Circuit Test Result* 1,2,4,7,--

Electrode Circuit Test Result* 1,2,4,7,--

Trims 1,2,5

D/A Trim\ 1,2,5,1

Scaled D/A Trim 1,2,5,2

Digital Trim 1,2,5,3

Auto Zero 1,2,5,4

Universal Trim 1,2,5,5

View Status 1,2,6

Basic Setup 1,3

Tag 1,3,1

Flow Units 1,3,2

PV Units 1,3,2,1

Special Units 1,3,2,2

Volume Unit 1,3,2,2,1

Base Volume Unit 1,3,2,2,2

Conversion Number 1,3,2,2,3

Base Time Unit 1,3,2,2,4

Flow Rate Unit 1,3,2,2,5

Line Size 1,3,3

PV Upper Range Value (URV) 1,3,4

PV Lower Range Value (LRV) 1,3,5

Calibration Number 1,3,6

PV Damping 1,3,7

Detailed Setup 1,4

Additional Parameters 1,4,1

Coil Drive Frequency 1,4,1,1

Density Value 1,4,1,2

PV Upper Sensor Limit (USL) 1,4,1,3

PV Lower Sensor Limit (LSL) 1,4,1,4

PV Minimum Span 1,4,1,5

Configure Output 1,4,2

Analog Output 1,4,2,1

PV URV 1,4,2,1,1

PV LRV 1,4,2,1,2

Function HART Fast Keys

4-33



PV AO 1,4,2,1,3

AO Alarm Type 1,4,2,1,4

AO Loop Test 1,4,2,1,5

D/A Trim 1,4,2,1,6

Scaled D/A Trim 1,4,2,1,7

Alarm Level 1,4,2,1,8

Pulse Output 1,4,2,2

Pulse Scaling 1,4,2,2,1

Pulse Width 1,4,2,2,2

Pulse Mode 1,4,2,2,3

Pulse Output Loop Test 1,4,2,2,4

DI/DO Output 1,4,2,3

Digital Input 1 1,4,2,3,1

Digital Output 2 1,4,2,3,2

Reverse Flow 1,4,2,4

Totalizer Set-Up 1,4,2,5

Totalizer Units 1,4,2,5,1

Gross Total 1,4,2,5,2

Net Total 1,4,2,5,3

Reverse Total 1,4,2,5,4

Start Totalizer 1,4,2,5,5

Stop Totalizer 1,4,2,5,6

Reset Totalizer 1,4,2,5,7

Alarm Level 1,4,2,6

HART Output 1,4,2,7

Variable Mapping 1,4,2,7,1

TV is 1,4,2,7,1,1

4V is 1,4,2,7,1,2

Poll Address 1,4,2,7,2

# of Req Preams 1,4,2,7,3

# of Resp Preams 1,4,2,7,4

Burst Mode 1,4,2,7,5

Burst Option 1,4,2,7,6

LOI Config 1,4,3

Language 1,4,3,1

Flowrate Display 1,4,3,2

Totalizer Display 1,4,3,3

Display Lock 1,4,3,4

Signal Processing 1,4,4

Operating Mode 1,4,4,1

Manual Configure DSP 1,4,4,2

Status 1,4,4,2,1

Samples 1,4,4,2,2

% Limit 1,4,4,2,3

Time Limit 1,4,4,2,4


Low Flow Cutoff 1,4,4,4

PV Damping 1,4,4,5

Universal Trim 1,4,5

Device Info 1,4,6

Manufacturer 1,4,6,1

Tag 1,4,6,2

Descriptor 1,4,6,3

Message 1,4,6,4

Date 1,4,6,5

Device ID 1,4,6,6


4-34



4-35

Figure 4-4. Local Operator Interface (LOI) Menu Tree for the Rosemount 8732E

PV Sensor Serial Number 1,4,6,7

Flowtube Tag 1,4,6,8

Write Protect 1,4,6,9

Revision No.* 1,4,6,10

Universal Rev 1,4,6,10,1

Transmitter Rev 1,4,6,10,2

Software Rev 1,4,6,10,3

Final Assembly # 1,4,6,10,4

Construction Materials* 1,4,6,11

Flange Type 1,4,6,11,1

Flange Material 1,4,6,11,2

Electrode Type 1,4,6,11,3

Electrode Material 1,4,6,11,4

Liner Material 1,4,6,11,5

Review 1,5


Diag Controls B asic Diag A dvanced Diag V ariablesT rims Status

E mpty Pipe Process Noise Ground/WiringE lec T emp

Self T est A O L oop T est Pulse Out T est E mpty Pipe E lec T emp

Ground/WiringProcess Noise 8714i4-20 mA V erify L icensing

R un 8714i V iew R esults T ube SignatureT est Criteria Measurements

V aluesR e-Signature R ecall V alues


No Flow Flowing, Full E mpty Pipe


E mpty Pipe E lec T emp L ine Noise 5Hz SNR 37Hz SNR Signal Power 8714i R esults

D/A T rim Digital T rim A uto Zero Universal T rim

4-20 mA V erify V iew R esults

T agFlow Units L ine Size PV UR V PV L R V Cal Number PV Damping

Coil FrequencyProc Density PV L SL PV USL PV Min Span

A nalogPulse DI/DO Config T otalizer R everse Flow HA R T

PV UR V PV L R V A larm T ype T est

Pulse Scaling Pulse Width Pulse Mode T est

DI 1 DO 2

T otalize Units T otal Display

B urst Mode B urst Command

Flange T ype Flange Matl E lectrode T ypeE lectrode Matl L iner Material

Software R ev Final A smbl #

T agDescriptionMessage Device ID PV Sensor S/N Flowtube T ag R evision Num Materials

Operating Mode SP Config Coil Frequency PV Damping L o-Flow Cutoff

Flow Display T otal Display L anguage

More Params Output Config L OI Config Sig Processing Device Info

PV Units Special Units T otalize Units

Diagnostics

B asic Setup

Detailed Setup



4-36



Section 5 Flowtube Installation


Flowtube Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5-3

Flowtube Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5-4

Installation (Flanged Flowtube) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5-7

Installation (Wafer Flowtube) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5-10

Installation (Sanitary Flowtube) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5-12

Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5-12

Process Leak Protection (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5-16

This section covers the steps required to physically install the magnetic flowtube. For electrical connections and cabling see Section 2: Installation. Instructions and procedures in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Please refer to the following safety messages before performing any operation in this section.

SAFETY MESSAGES This symbol is used throughout this manual to indicate that special attention to warning information is required.




that the operating environment of the flowtube and transmitter is consistent with the

appropriate hazardous area approval.

Do not connect a Rosemount 8732E to a non-Rosemount flowtube that is located in an

explosive atmosphere.

www.rosemount.com




Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the

appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Please review

the approvals section of the 8732E reference manual for any restrictions associated with a

safe installation.

Before connecting a HART-based communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure

the instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or

non-incendive field wiring practices.

Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury

Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can

cause electrical shock.

The flowtube liner is vulnerable to handling damage. Never place anything through the

flowtube for the purpose of lifting or gaining leverage. Liner damage can render the flowtube

useless.

To avoid possible damage to the flowtube liner ends, do not use metallic or spiral-wound

gaskets. If frequent removal is anticipated, take precautions to protect the liner ends. Short

spool pieces attached to the flowtube ends are often used for protection.

Correct flange bolt tightening is crucial for proper flowtube operation and life. All bolts must

be tightened in the proper sequence to the specified torque limits. Failure to observe these

instructions could result in severe damage to the flowtube lining and possible flowtube

replacement.

Emerson Process Management can supply lining protectors to prevent liner damage during

removal, installation, and excessive bolt torquing.

5-2



FLOWTUBE HANDLING Handle all parts carefully to prevent damage. Whenever possible, transport the system to the installation site in the original shipping containers. Teflon®-lined flowtubes are shipped with end covers that protect it from both mechanical damage and normal unrestrained distortion. Remove the end covers just before installation.

Flanged 6- through 36-inch flowtubes come with a lifting lug on each flange. The lifting lugs make the flowtube easier to handle when it is transported and lowered into place at the installation site.

Flanged ½- to 4-inch flowtubes do not have lugs. They must be supported with a lifting sling on each side of the housing.

Figure 5-1 shows flowtubes correctly supported for handling and installation. Notice the plywood end pieces are still in place to protect the flowtube liner during transportation.

Figure 5-1. Rosemount 8705 Flowtube Support for Handling

See ”Safety Messages” on pages 5-1 and 5-2 for complete warning information.

½- through 4-Inch Flowtubes

6-Inch and Larger Flowtubes

5-3



FLOWTUBE MOUNTING Physical mounting of a flowtube is similar to installing a typical section of pipe. Conventional tools, equipment, and accessories (bolts, gaskets, and grounding hardware) are required.

Upstream/DownstreamPiping

To ensure specification accuracy over widely varying process conditions, install the flowtube a minimum of five straight pipe diameters upstream and two pipe diameters downstream from the electrode plane (see Figure 5-2).

Figure 5-2. Upstream and Downstream Straight Pipe Diameters

Flowtube Orientation The flowtube should be installed in a position that ensures the flowtube remains full during operation. Figures 5-3, 5-4, and 5-5 show the proper flowtube orientation for the most common installations. The following orientations ensure that the electrodes are in the optimum plane to minimize the effects of entrapped gas.

Vertical installation allows upward process fluid flow and is generally preferred. Upward flow keeps the cross-sectional area full, regardless of flow rate. Orientation of the electrode plane is unimportant in vertical installations. As illustrated in Figures 5-3 and 5-4, avoid downward flows where back pressure does not ensure that the flowtube remains full at all times.

Figure 5-3. Vertical Flowtube Orientation

FLOW

5 Pipe Diameters 2 Pipe Diameters

FLOW

FLOW

5-4



Figure 5-4. Incline or Decline Orientation

Horizontal installation should be restricted to low piping sections that are normally full. Orient the electrode plane to within 45 degrees of horizontal in horizontal installations. A deviation of more than 45 degrees of horizontal would place an electrode at or near the top of the flowtube thereby making it more susceptible to insulation by air or entrapped gas at the top of the flowtube.

Figure 5-5. Horizontal Flowtube Orientation

The electrodes in the Rosemount 8711 are properly oriented when the top of the flowtube is either vertical or horizontal, as shown in Figure 5-6. Avoid any mounting orientation that positions the top of the flowtube at 45 degrees from the vertical or horizontal position.

FLOW

FLOW

FLOW

5-5



Figure 5-6. Rosemount 8711 Mounting Position

Flow Direction The flowtube should be mounted so that the FORWARD end of the flow arrow, shown on the flowtube identification tag, points in the direction of flow through the tube (see Figure 5-7).

Figure 5-7. Flow Direction

45° Electrode Plane

45° Electrode Plane

FLOW

5-6



INSTALLATION (FLANGED FLOWTUBE)

The following section should be used as a guide in the installation of the flange-type Rosemount 8705 and Rosemount 8707 High-Signal Flowtubes. Refer to page 5-10 for installation of the wafer-type Rosemount 8711 Flowtube.

Gaskets The flowtube requires a gasket at each of its connections to adjacent devices or piping. The gasket material selected must be compatible with the process fluid and operating conditions. Metallic or spiral-wound gaskets can damage the liner. If the gaskets will be removed frequently, protect the liner ends. All other applications (including flowtubes with lining protectors or a grounding electrode) require only one gasket on each end connection, as shown in Figure 5-8. If grounding rings are used, gaskets are required on each side of the grounding ring, as shown in Figure 5-9.

Figure 5-8. Gasket Placement

Figure 5-9. Gasket Placement with Non-attached Grounding Rings

Flange Bolts Suggested torque values by flowtube line size and liner type are listed in Table 5-1 on page 5-8 for ASME B16.5 (ANSI) flanges and Table 5-2 and Table 5-3 for DIN flanges. Consult the factory for other flange ratings. Tighten flange bolts in the incremental sequence as shown in Figure 5-10. See Table 5-1 and Table 5-2 for bolt sizes and hole diameters.


Gasket (Supplied by user)

Gasket (Supplied by user)Grounding Ring

Gasket (Supplied by user)

5-7



NOTEDo not bolt one side at a time. Tighten each side simultaneously. Example: 1. Snug left2. Snug right3. Tighten left4. Tighten rightDo not snug and tighten left and then snug and tighten right. Failure to do so will result in liner damage.

Always check for leaks at the flanges after tightening the flange bolts. Failure to use the correct flange bolt tightening methods can result in severe damage. All flowtubes require a second torquing 24 hours after initial flange bolt tightening.

Table 5-1. Flange Bolt Torque Specifications for Rosemount 8705 and 8707 High-Signal Flowtubes

Teflon/Tefzel liner Polyurethane liner

Size Code Line Size

Class 150

(pound-feet)

Class 300

(pound-feet)

Class 150

(pound-feet)

Class 300

(pound-feet)

005 1/2-inch (15 mm) 8 8 — —

010 1 inch (25 mm) 8 12 — —

015 11/2 inch (40 mm) 13 25 7 18

020 2 inch (50 mm) 19 17 14 11

030 3 inch (80 mm) 34 35 23 23

040 4 inch (100 mm) 26 50 17 32

060 6 inch (150mm) 45 50 30 37

080 8 inch (200 mm) 60 82 42 55

100 10 inch (250 mm) 55 80 40 70

120 12 inch (300 mm) 65 125 55 105

140 14 inch (350 mm) 85 110 70 95

160 16 inch (400 mm) 85 160 65 140

180 18 inch (450 mm) 120 170 95 150

200 20 inch (500 mm) 110 175 90 150

240 24 inch (600 mm) 165 280 140 250

300 30 inch (750 mm) 195 415 165 375

360 36 inch (900 mm) 280 575 245 525


5-8



Figure 5-10. Flange Bolt Torquing Sequence

Table 5-2. Flange Bolt Torque and Bolt Load Specifications for Rosemount 8705

Teflon/Tefzel liner

Size

Code

PN10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 40

Line Size (Newton-meter) (Newton) (Newton-meter) (Newton) (Newton-meter) (Newton) (Newton-meter) (Newton)

005 1/2-inch (15 mm) 7 3209 7 3809 7 3809 7 4173

010 1 inch (25 mm) 13 6983 13 6983 13 6983 13 8816

015 11/2 inch (40 mm) 24 9983 24 9983 24 9983 24 13010

020 2 inch (50 mm) 25 10420 25 10420 25 10420 25 14457

030 3 inch (80 mm) 14 5935 14 5935 18 7612 18 12264

040 4 inch (100 mm) 17 7038 17 7038 30 9944 30 16021

060 6 inch (150mm) 23 7522 32 10587 60 16571 60 26698

080 8 inch (200 mm) 35 11516 35 11694 66 18304 66 36263

100 10 inch (250 mm) 31 10406 59 16506 105 25835 105 48041

120 12 inch (300 mm) 43 14439 82 22903 109 26886 109 51614

140 14 inch (350 mm) 42 13927 80 22091 156 34578 156 73825

160 16 inch (400 mm) 65 18189 117 28851 224 45158 224 99501

180 18 inch (450 mm) 56 15431 99 24477 — — — 67953

200 20 inch (500 mm) 66 18342 131 29094 225 45538 225 73367

240 24 inch (600 mm) 104 25754 202 40850 345 63940 345 103014

4-Bolt 8-Bolt

12-Bolt 14-Bolt

20-Bolt

Torque the flange bolts in increments according to

the above numerical sequence.

5-9



INSTALLATION (WAFER FLOWTUBE)

The following section should be used as a guide in the installation of the Rosemount 8711 Flowtube. Refer to page 5-7 for installation of the flange-type Rosemount 8705 and 8707 High-Signal flowtube.

Gaskets The flowtube requires a gasket at each of its connections to adjacent devices or piping. The gasket material selected must be compatible with the process fluid and operating conditions. Metallic or spiral-wound gaskets can damage the liner. If the gaskets will be removed frequently, protect the liner ends. If grounding rings are used, a gasket is required on each side of the grounding ring.

Alignment and Bolting 1. On 11/2 - through 8-inch (40 through 200 mm) line sizes, place centering rings over each end of the flowtube. The smaller line sizes, 0.15- through 1-inch (4 through 25 mm), do not require centering rings.

2. Insert studs for the bottom side of the flowtube between the pipe flanges. Stud specifications are listed in Table 5-4. Using carbon steel bolts on smaller line sizes, 0.15- through 1-inch (4 through 25 mm), rather than the required stainless steel bolts, will degrade performance.

Table 5-3. Flange Bolt Torque and Bolt Load Specifications for Rosemount 8705

Size

Code Line Size

Polyurethane Liner

PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 40

(Newton-meter) (Newton) (Newton-meter) (Newton) (Newton-meter) (Newton) (Newton-meter) (Newton)

005 1/2-inch (15 mm) 1 521 1 826 2 1293 6 3333

010 1 inch (25 mm) 2 1191 3 1890 5 2958 10 5555

015 11/2 inch (40 mm) 5 1960 7 3109 12 4867 20 8332

020 2 inch (50 mm) 6 2535 10 4021 15 6294 26 10831

030 3 inch (80 mm) 5 2246 9 3563 13 5577 24 19998

040 4 inch (100 mm) 7 3033 12 4812 23 7531 35 11665

060 6 inch (150mm) 16 5311 25 8425 47 13186 75 20829

080 8 inch (200 mm) 27 8971 28 9487 53 14849 100 24687

100 10 inch (250 mm) 26 8637 49 13700 87 21443 155 34547

120 12 inch (300 mm) 36 12117 69 19220 91 22563 165 36660

140 14 inch (350 mm) 35 11693 67 18547 131 29030 235 47466

160 16 inch (400 mm) 55 15393 99 24417 189 38218 335 62026

200 20 inch (500 mm) 58 15989 114 25361 197 39696 375 64091

240 24 inch (600 mm) 92 22699 178 36006 304 56357 615 91094

5-10



3. Place the flowtube between the flanges. Make sure that the centering rings are properly placed in the studs. The studs should be aligned with the markings on the rings that correspond to the flange you are using.

4. Insert the remaining studs, washers, and nuts.

5. Tighten to the torque specifications shown in Table 5-5. Do not overtighten the bolts or the liner may be damaged.

NOTEOn the 4- and 6- inch PN 10-16, insert the flowtube with rings first and then insert the studs. The slots on this ring scenario are located on the inside of the ring.

Figure 5-11. Gasket Placement with Centering Rings

Flange Bolts Flowtube sizes and torque values for both Class 150 and Class 300 flanges are listed in Table 5-5. Tighten flange bolts in the incremental sequence, shown in Figure 5-10.

Always check for leaks at the flanges after tightening the flange bolts. All flowtubes require a second torquing 24 hours after initial flange bolt tightening.

Table 5-4. Stud Specifications

Nominal Flowtube Size Stud Specifications

0.15 – 1 inch (4 – 25 mm) 316 SST ASTM A193, Grade B8M

Class 1 threaded mounted studs

11/2 – 8 inch (40 – 200 mm) CS, ASTM A193, Grade B7, threaded mounting studs

Customer-supplied Gasket

FLOWInstallation, Studs Nuts and Washers

Centering Rings

5-11



INSTALLATION (SANITARY FLOWTUBE)

Gaskets The flowtube requires a gasket at each of its connections to adjacent devices or piping. The gasket material selected must be compatible with the process fluid and operating conditions. Gaskets are supplied with all Rosemount 8721 Sanitary flowtubes except when the process connection is an IDF sanitary screw type.

Alignment and Bolting Standard plant practices should be followed when installing a magmeter with sanitary fittings. Unique torque values and bolting techniques are not required.

Figure 5-12. Rosemount 8721 Sanitary Installation

GROUNDING Process grounding the flowtube is one the most important details of flowtube installation. Proper process grounding ensures that the transmitter amplifier is referenced to the process. This creates the lowest noise environment for the transmitter to make a stable reading. Use Table 5-6 to determine which grounding option to follow for proper installation.

Table 5-5. Flange bolt Torque Specifications of Rosemount 8711 Flowtubes

Size Code Line Size Pound-feet Newton-meter

15F 0.15 inch (4 mm) 5 6.8

30F 0.30 inch (8 mm) 5 6.8

005 1/2-inch (15 mm) 5 6.8

010 1 inch (25 mm) 10 13.6

015 11/2 inch (40 mm) 15 20.5

020 2 inch (50 mm) 25 34.1

030 3 inch (80 mm) 40 54.6

040 4 inch (100 mm) 30 40.1

060 6 inch (150 mm) 50 68.2

080 8 inch (200 mm) 70 81.9

User supplied clamp

User supplied gasket

5-12



NOTEConsult factory for installations requiring cathodic protection or situations where there are high currents or high potential in the process.

The flowtube case should always be earth grounded in accordance with national and local electrical codes. Failure to do so may impair the protection provided by the equipment. The most effective grounding method is direct connection from the flowtube to earth ground with minimal impedance.

The Internal Ground Connection (Protective Ground Connection) located in side the junction box is the Internal Ground Connection screw. This screw is identified by the ground symbol:

Figure 5-13. No Grounding Options or Grounding Electrode in Lined Pipe

Table 5-6. Grounding Installation

Grounding Options

Type of Pipe No Grounding Options Grounding Rings Grounding Electrodes Lining Protectors

Conductive Unlined Pipe See Figure 5-13 Not Required Not Required See Figure 5-14

Conductive Lined Pipe Insufficient Grounding See Figure 5-14 See Figure 5-13 See Figure 5-14

Non-Conductive Pipe Insufficient Grounding See Figure 5-15 See Figure 5-16 See Figure 5-15

5-13



Figure 5-14. Grounding with Grounding Rings or Lining Protectors

Figure 5-15. Grounding with Grounding Rings or Lining Protectors

Grounding Rings or Lining Protectors

Grounding Rings or Lining Protectors

5-14



Figure 5-16. Grounding with Grounding Electrodes

5-15



PROCESS LEAK PROTECTION (OPTIONAL)

The Rosemount 8705 Flowtube housing is fabricated from carbon steel to perform two separate functions. First, it provides shielding for the flowtube magnetics so that external disturbances cannot interfere with the magnetic field and thus affect the flow measurement. Second, it provides the physical protection to the coils and other internal components from contamination and physical damage that might occur in an industrial environment. The housing is completely welded and gasket-free.

The three housing configurations are identified by the W0, W1, or W3 in the model number option code when ordering. Below are brief descriptions of each housing configuration, which are followed by a more detailed overview.

• Code W0 — sealed, welded coil housing (standard configuration)

• Code W1 — sealed, welded coil housing with a relief valve capable of venting fugitive emissions to a safe location (additional plumbing from the flowtube to a safe area, installed by the user, is required to vent properly)

• Code W3 — sealed, welded coil housing with separate electrode compartments capable of venting fugitive emissions (additional plumbing from the flowtube to a safe area, installed by the user, is required to vent properly)

Standard Housing Configuration

The standard housing configuration is identified by a code W0 in the model number. This configuration does not provide separate electrode compartments with external electrode access. In the event of a process leak, these models will not protect the coils or other sensitive areas around the flowtube from exposure to the pressure fluid (Figure 5-17).

Figure 5-17. Standard Housing Configuration — Sealed Welded Housing (Option Code W0)

1/2–14 NPT Conduit Connection

(no relief valve)

5-16



Relief Valves The first optional configuration, identified by the W1 in the model number option code, uses a completely welded coil housing. This configuration does not provide separate electrode compartments with external electrode access. This optional housing configuration provides a relief valve in the housing to prevent possible overpressuring caused by damage to the lining or other situations that might allow process pressure to enter the housing. The relief valve will vent when the pressure inside the flowtube housing exceeds 5 psi. Additional piping (provided by the user) may be connected to this relief valve to drain any process leakage to safe containment (see Figure 5-18).

Figure 5-18. Coil-Housing Configuration — Standard Welded Housing With Relief Valve (Option Code W1)

Process Leak Containment

The second optional configuration, identified as option code W3 in the model number, divides the coil housing into three compartments: one for each electrode and one for the coils. Should a damaged liner or electrode fault allow process fluid to migrate behind the electrode seals, the fluid is contained in the electrode compartment. The sealed electrode compartment prevents the process fluid from entering the coil compartment where it would damage the coils and other internal components.

The electrode compartments are designed to contain the process fluid at full line pressure. An o-ring sealed cover provides access to each of the electrode compartments from outside the flowtube; drainports are provided in each cover for the removal of fluid.

NOTEThe electrode compartment could contain full line pressure and it must be depressurized before the cover is removed.

Optional:Use drain port to

plumb to a safe area (Supplied by user)

1/2 – 14 NPT Conduit Connection

¼'' NPT – 5 psi Pressure Relief Valve

5-17



Figure 5-19. Housing Configuration — Sealed Electrode Compartment (Option Code W3)

If necessary, capture any process fluid leakage, connect the appropriate piping to the drainports, and provide for proper disposal (see Figure 5-19).

Fused Glass Seal

Sealed Electrode Compartment

1/2 - 27 NPT

O-Ring Seal

Optional:Use drain port to

plumb to a safe area (Supplied by user)Grounding Electrode Port

5-18



Section 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6-1

Installation Check and Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6-2

Diagnostic Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6-3

Transmitter Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6-7

Quick Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6-9

This section covers basic transmitter and flowtube sensor troubleshooting. Problems in the magnetic flowmeter system are usually indicated by incorrect output readings from the system, error messages, or failed tests. Consider all sources when identifying a problem in your system. If the problem persists, consult your local Rosemount representative to determine if the material should be returned to the factory. Emerson Process Management offers several diagnostics that aid in the troubleshooting process.

Instructions and procedures in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Please read the following safety messages before performing any operation described in this section. Refer to these warnings when appropriate throughout this section.

SAFETY INFORMATION

The 8732E performs self diagnostics on the entire magnetic flowmeter system: the transmitter, the flowtube, and the interconnecting wiring. By sequentially troubleshooting each individual piece of the magmeter system, it becomes easier to pin point the problem and make the appropriate adjustments.

If there are problems with a new magmeter installation, see “Installation Check and Guide” on page 6-2 for a quick guide to solve the most common installation problems. For existing magmeter installations, Table 6-5 lists the most common magmeter problems and corrective actions.




that the operating environment of the flowtube and transmitter is consistent with the

appropriate FM or CSA approval.

Do not connect a Rosemount 8732E to a non-Rosemount flowtube that is located in an


Mishandling products exposed to a hazardous substance may result in death or serious

injury. If the product being returned was exposed to a hazardous substance as defined by

OSHA, a copy of the required Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDA) for each hazardous

substance identified must be included with the returned goods.

www.rosemount.com



6-2

INSTALLATION CHECK AND GUIDE

Use this guide to check new installations of Rosemount magnetic flowmeter systems that appear to malfunction.

Before You Begin

Transmitter

Apply power to your system before making the following transmitter checks.

1. Verify that the correct flowtube calibration number is entered in the transmitter. The calibration number is listed on the flowtube nameplate.

2. Verify that the correct flowtube line size is entered in the transmitter. The line size value is listed on the flowtube nameplate.

3. Verify that the analog range of the transmitter matches the analog range in the control system.

4. Verify that the forced analog output and forced pulse output of the transmitter produces the correct output at the control system.

Flowtube

Be sure that power to your system is removed before beginning flowtube checks.

1. For horizontal flow installations, ensure that the electrodes remain covered by process fluid.

For vertical or inclined installations, ensure that the process fluid is flowing up into the flowtube to keep the electrodes covered by process fluid.

2. Ensure that the grounding straps on the flowtube are connected to grounding rings, lining protectors, or the adjacent pipe flanges. Improper grounding will cause erratic operation of the system.

Wiring

1. The signal wire and coil drive wire must be twisted shielded cable. Emerson Process Management, Rosemount division. recommends 20 AWG twisted shielded cable for the electrodes and 14 AWG twisted shielded cable for the coils.

2. The cable shield must be connected at both ends of the electrode and coil drive cables. Connection of the signal wire shield at both ends is necessary for proper operation. It is recommended that the coil drive wire shield also be connected at both ends for maximum flowmeter performance

3. The signal and coil drive wires must be separate cables, unless Emerson Process Management specified combo cable is used. See Table 2-3 on page 2-16.

4. The single conduit that houses both the signal and coil drive cables should not contain any other wires.

Process Fluid

1. The process fluid conductivity should be 5 microsiemens (5 micro mhos) per centimeter minimum.

2. The process fluid must be free of air and gasses.

3. The flowtube should be full of process fluid.



DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES

Problems in the magnetic flowmeter system are usually indicated by incorrect output readings from the system, error messages, or failed tests. Consider all sources in identifying a problem in your system.

Table 6-1. Rosemount 8732E Basic Diagnostic Messages

Message Potential Cause Corrective Action

“Empty Pipe” Empty Pipe None - message will clear when pipe is full

Wiring Error Check that wiring matches appropriate wiring diagrams - see Appendix D:

Wiring Diagrams

Electrode Error Perform flowtube tests C and D (see Table 6-6 on page 6-10)

Conductivity less than 5 microhms

per cm

Increase Conductivity to less or equal than 5 microhms per cm

Intermittent Diagnostic Adjust tuning of Empty Pipe parameters

“Coil Open Circuit” Improper wiring Check coil drive wiring and flowtube coils

Perform flowtube test A - Flowtube Coil

Other manufacturer’s flowtube Change coil current to 75 mA

Perform a Universal Auto Trim to select the proper coil current

Circuit Board Failure Replace Rosemount 8732E Electronics

Verify the transmitter is not a

Rosemount 8712H

Replace Rosemount 8712H with Rosemount 8712C/U/H/D

Coil Circuit OPEN Fuse Return to factory for fuse replacement

“Auto Zero Failure” Flow is not set to zero Force flow to zero, perform autozero

Unshielded cable in use Change wire to shielded cable

Moisture problems See moisture problems in “Accuracy Section”

“Auto-Trim Failure” No flow in pipe while performing

Universal Auto Trim

Establish a known flow in tube, and perform Universal Auto-Trim calibration

Wiring error Check that wiring matches appropriate wiring diagrams - see Appendix D:

Wiring Diagrams

Flow rate is changing in pipe while

performing Universal Auto-Trim

routine

Establish a constant flow in tube, and perform Universal Auto-Trim

calibration

Flow rate through flowtube is

significantly different than value

entered during Universal Auto-Trim

routine

Verify flow in tube and perform Universal Auto-Trim calibration

Incorrect calibration number

entered into transmitter for

Universal Auto-Trim routine

Replace flowtube calibration number with 1000005010000001

Wrong tube size selected Correct tube size setting - See “Line Size” on page 3-8

Flowtube failure Perform flowtube tests C and D (see Table 6-6 on page 6-10)

“Electronics Failure” Electronics self check failure Replace Electronics

“Electronics Temp Fail” Ambient temperature exceeded the

electronics temperature limits

Move transmitter to a location with an ambient temperature range of -40 to

165 °F (-40 to 74 °C)

“Reverse Flow” Electrode or coil wires reverse Verify wiring between flowtube and transmitter

Flow is reverse Turn ON Reverse Flow Enable to read flow

Flowtube installed backwards Re-install flowtube correctly, or switch either the electrode wires (18 and 19)

or the coil wires (1 and 2)

“PZR Activated”

(Positive Zero Return)

External voltage applied to

terminals 5 and 6

Remove voltage to turn PZR off

“Pulse Out of Range” The transmitter is trying to

generate a frequency greater than

11,000 Hz

Increase pulse scaling to prevent pulse output going above 11,000 Hz

“Analog Out of Range” Flow rate is greater than analog

output Range

Reduce flow, increase Analog Output Range

6-3



Table 6-2. Rosemount 8732E Advanced Diagnostic Messages (Suite 1 - Option Code DA1)

“Flowrate > 43 ft/sec” Flow rate is greater than 43 ft/sec Lower flow velocity, increase pipe diameter

Improper wiring Check coil drive wiring and flowtube coils

Perform flowtube test A - Flowtube Coil (see Table 6-6 on page 6-10)

“Digital Trim Failure”

(Cycle power to clear

messages, no changes

were made)

The calibrator (8714B/C/D) is not

connected properly

Review calibrator connections

Incorrect calibration number

entered into transmitter

Replace flowtube calibration number with 1000005010000001

Calibrator is not set to 30 FPS Change calibrator setting to 30 FPS

Bad calibrator Replace calibrator


Grounding/Wiring Fault Improper installation of wiring See “Flowtube Sensor Connections” on page 2-16

Coil/Electrode shield not

connected

See “Flowtube Sensor Connections” on page 2-16

Improper process grounding See “Grounding” on page 5-12

Faulty ground connection Check wiring for corrosion, moisture in the terminal block, and refer to

“Grounding” on page 5-12

Flowtube sensor not full Verify flowtube sensor is full

High Process Noise Slurry flows - mining/pulp stock Decrease the flow rate below 10 ft/s (3 m/s)

Complete the possible solutions listed under “Step 2: Process Noise” on

page 6-9

Chemical additives upstream of the

flowtube sensor

Move injection point downstream of the flowtube sensor, or move the

flowtube sensor


page 6-9

Electrode not compatible with the

process fluid

Refer to the Rosemount Magnetic Flowmeter Material Selection Guide

(00816-0100-3033)

Air in line Move the flowtube sensor to another location in the process line to ensure

that it is full under all conditions

Electrode coating Use bulletnose electrodes

Downsize flowtube sensor to increases flowrate above 3 ft/s (1 m/s)

Periodically clean flowtube sensor

Styrofoam or other insulating

particles


page 6-9

Consult factory

Low conductivity fluids

(below 10 microsiemens/cm)

Trim electrode and coil wires - refer to “Cable Preparation Detail” on

page 2-17

Table 6-1. Rosemount 8732E Basic Diagnostic Messages


6-4



Table 6-3. Rosemount 8732E Advanced Diagnostic Messages (Suite 2 - Option Code DA2)


8714i Failed

Transmitter Calibration Verification

test failed

Verify pass/fail criteria

Rerun 8714i Calibration Verification under no flow conditions

Verify calibration using 8714D Calibration Standard

Perform digital trim

Replace electronics board

Flowtube Sensor Calibration test

failed


Perform flowtube sensor test - see Table 6-6 on page 6-10

Flowtube Sensor Coil Circuit test

failed



Flowtube Sensor Electrode Circuit

test failed



4-20 mA loop

verification failed

Analog loop not powered Check 4-20 mA internal/external loop power switch - see “Internal/External

Analog Power” on page 2-4

Check external supply voltage to the transmitter

Check for parallel paths in the current loop

Transmitter Failure Perform transmitter self test

Perform manual analog loop test

Replace the electronics board

Table 6-4. Basic Troubleshooting–Rosemount 8732E

Symptom Potential Cause Corrective Action

Output at 0 mA No power to transmitter Check power source and connections to the transmitter

Blown fuse Check the fuse and replace with an appropriately rated fuse, if necessary

Electronics failure Verify transmitter operation with an 8714 Field Calibrator or replace the

electronic board

Analog output improperly

configured

Check the analog power switch

Output at 4 mA Open coil drive circuit Check coil drive circuit connections at the flowtube and at the transmitter

Transmitter in multidrop mode Configure Poll Address to 0 to take transmitter out of multidrop mode

Low Flow Cutoff set too high Configure Low Flow Cutoff to a lower setting or increase flow to a value

above the low flow cutoff

PZR Activated Open PZR switch at terminals 5 and 6 to deactivate the PZR

Flow is in reverse direction Enable Reverse Flow function

Shorted coil Coil check – perform flowtube test

Empty pipe Fill pipe


electronic board

Output at 20.8 mA Transmitter not ranged properly Reset the transmitter range values –

see “PV URV (Upper Range Value)” on page 3-10;

Check tube size setting in transmitter and make sure it matches your actual

tube size – see “Line Size” on page 3-8

Output at alarm level Electronics failure Cycle power. If alarm is still present, verify transmitter operation with an 8714

Field Calibrator or replace the electronic board

Pulse output at zero,

regardless of flow

Wiring error Check pulse output wiring at terminals 3 and 4. Refer to wiring diagram for

your flowtube and pulse output

PZR activated Remove signal at terminals 5 and 6 to deactivate the PZR.

No power to transmitter Check pulse output wiring at terminals 3 and 4. Refer to wiring diagram for

your flowtube and pulse output

Power the transmitter

Reverse flow Enable Reverse Flow function


electronic board

Pulse output incorrectly

configured

Review configuration and correct as necessary

6-5



Communication problems

with the Handheld

Communicator

4–20 mA output configuration Check analog power switch (internal/external). The Handheld Communicator

requires a 4–20 mA output to function

Communication interface wiring

problems

Incorrect load resistance (250 � minimum);

Check appropriate wiring diagram

Low batteries in the Handheld

Communicator

Replace the batteries in the Handheld Communicator – see the

communicator manual for instructions

Old revision of software in the

Handheld Communicator

Consult your local sales office about updating to the latest revision

of software

Error Messages on LOI or

Handheld Communicator

Many possible causes depending

upon the message

See the Table 3-2 for the LOI or Handheld Communicator messages.

Table 6-4. Basic Troubleshooting–Rosemount 8732E


6-6



TRANSMITTER TROUBLESHOOTINGTable 6-5. Advanced Troubleshooting–Rosemount 8732E


Does not appear to be within

rated accuracy

Transmitter, control system, or other

receiving device not configured

properly

Check all configuration variables for the transmitter, flowtube,

communicator, and/or control system

Check these other transmitter settings:

•Flowtube calibration number

•Units

•Line size

Perform a loop test to check the integrity of the circuit – see

“Quick Troubleshooting” on page 6-9

Electrode Coating Use bulletnose electrodes;

Downsize flowtube to increase flow rate above 3 ft/s;

Periodically clean flowtube

Air in line Move the flowtube to another location in the process line to

ensure that it is full under all conditions.

Moisture problem Perform the flowtube Tests A, B, C, and D

(see Table 6-6 on page 6-10)

Improper wiring If electrode shield and signal wires are switched, flow indication

will be about half of what is expected. Check wiring diagrams for

your application.

Flow rate is below 1 ft/s

(specification issue)

See accuracy specification for specific transmitter and flowtube

Auto zero was not performed when the

coil drive frequency was changed from

5 Hz to 37 Hz

Set the coil drive frequency to 37 Hz, verify the flowtube sensor

is full, verify there is no flow, and perform the auto zero function.

Flowtube failure–Shorted electrode Perform the flowtube Tests C and D


Flowtube failure–Shorted or open coil Perform the flowtube Tests A and B


Transmitter failure Verify transmitter operation with an 8714 Field Calibrator or

replace the electronic board

Noisy Process Chemical additives upstream of

magnetic flowmeter

Complete the Noisy Process Basic procedure. Move injection

point downstream of magnetic flowmeter, or move magnetic

flowmeter.

Sludge flows–Mining/Coal/

Sand/Slurries (other slurries with

hard particles)

Decrease flow rate below 10 ft/s

Styrofoam or other insulating particles

in process

Complete the Noisy Process Basic procedure;

Consult factory

Electrode coating Use replaceable electrodes in Rosemount 8705.

Use a smaller flowtube to increase flow rate above 3 ft/s.

Periodically clean flowtube.


ensure that it is full under all conditions.

Low conductivity fluids (below 10

micromhos/cm)• Trim electrode and coil wires – see “Conduit Cables” on

page 2-14

• Keep flow rate below 3 FPS

• Integral mount transmitter

• Use 8712-0752-1,3 cable

• Use N0 approval flowtube

6-7



Meter output is unstable Medium to low conductivity fluids (10–

25 micromhos/cm) combined with

cable vibration or 60 Hz interference

Eliminate cable vibration:

• Integral mount

• Move cable to lower vibration run

• Tie down cable mechanically

• Trim electrode and coil wires

• See “Conduit Cables” on page 2-14

• Route cable line away from other equipment

powered by 60 Hz

• Use 8712-0752-1,3 cable

Electrode incompatibility Check the Technical Data Sheet, Magnetic Flowmeter Material

Selection Guide (document number 00816-0100-3033), for

chemical compatibility with electrode material.

Improper grounding Check ground wiring – see “Mount the Transmitter” on page 2-3

for wiring and grounding procedures

High local magnetic or electric fields Move magnetic flowmeter (20–25 ft away is usually acceptable)

Control loop improperly tuned Check control loop tuning

Sticky valve (look for periodic

oscillation of meter output)

Service valve

Flowtube failure Perform the flowtube Tests A, B, C, and D

(See Table 6-6 on page 6-10)

Analog output loop problem Check that the 4 to 20 mA loop matches the digital value.

Perform analog output test.

Reading does not appear to be

within rated accuracy

Transmitter, control system, or other

receiving device not configured

properly

Check all configuration variables for the transmitter, flowtube,

communicator, and/or control system

Check these other transmitter settings:

Flowtube calibration number

Units

Line size

Electrode coating Use bulletnose electrodes in the Rosemount 8705 Flowtube.

Downsize the flowtube to increase the flow rate above 3 ft/s.

Periodically clean the flowtube


ensure that it is full under all conditions

Flow rate is below 1 ft/s

(specification issue)

See the accuracy specification for specific transmitter and

flowtube

Insufficient upstream/downstream

pipe diameter

Move flowtube to location where 5 pipe diameters upstream and

2 pipe diameters downstream is possible

Cables for multiple magmeters run

through same conduit

Run only one conduit cable between each flowtube and

transmitter

Auto zero was not performed when the

coil drive frequency was changed from

5 Hz to 37.5 Hz

Perform the auto zero function with full pipe and no flow

Flowtube failure—shorted electrode See Table 6-6 on page 6-10

Flowtube failure—shorted or open coil See Table 6-6 on page 6-10

Transmitter failure Replace the electronics board

Transmitter wired to correct flowtube Check wiring

Advanced Troubleshooting continued on next page

Table 6-5. Advanced Troubleshooting–Rosemount 8732E


6-8



QUICK TROUBLESHOOTING

Step 1: Wiring Errors The most common magmeter problem is wiring between the flowtube and the transmitter in remote mount installations. The signal wire and coil drive wire must be twisted shielded cable: 20 AWG twisted shielded cable for the electrodes and 14 AWG twisted shielded cable for the coils. Ensure that the cable shield is connected at both ends of the electrode and coil drive cables. Signal and coil drive wires must have their own cables. The single conduit that houses both the signal and coil drive cables should not contain any other wires. For more information on proper wiring practices, refer to Section 2: Installation, “Transmitter to Flowtube Wiring” on page 2-12.

Step 2: Process Noise In some circumstances, process conditions rather than the magmeter can cause the meter output to be unstable. Possible solutions for addressing a noisy process situation are given below. When the output attains the desired stability, no further steps are required.

Use the Auto Zero function to initialize the transmitter for use with the 37.5 Hz coil drive mode only. Run this function only with the transmitter and flowtube installed in the process. The flowtube must be filled with process fluid with zero flow rate. Before running the auto zero function, be sure the coil drive mode is set to 37.5 Hz.

Set the loop to manual if necessary and begin the auto zero procedure. The transmitter completes the procedure automatically in about 90 seconds. A symbol appears in the lower right-hand corner of the display to indicate that the procedure is running.

1. Change the coil drive to 37.5 Hz. Complete the Auto Zero function, if possible (see “Coil Drive Frequency” on page 3-15).

2. Increase the damping (see “Damping” on page 3-9).

Noisy process Chemical additives upstream of

magnetic flowmeter

Complete the possible solutions listed under

“Step 2: Process Noise” on page 6-9

Move the injection point downstream of the magnetic flowmeter,

or move the magnetic flowmeter

Sludge flows—mining/coal/sand/

slurries (other slurries with hard

particles)

Decrease the flow rate below 10 ft/s

Styrofoam or other insulating particles

in the process

Complete the possible solutions listed under

“Step 2: Process Noise” on page 6-9

Consult the factory.

Electrode coating Use bulletnose electrodes in the Rosemount 8705 Flowtube

Use a smaller flowtube to increase the flow rate above 3 ft/s

Periodically clean the flowtube

Air in the line Move the flowtube to another location in the process line to

ensure that it is full under all conditions

Meter output is unstable Electrode incompatibility Check the Magnetic Flowmeter Material Selection Guide

(00816-0100-3033) for chemical compatibility with electrode

material located on www.rosemount.com

Improper grounding See “Grounding” on page 4-12

High local magnetic or electric fields Move the magnetic flowmeter (5 ft away is usually acceptable)

Sticky valve (Look for periodic

oscillation of meter output)

Service valve

Table 6-5. Advanced Troubleshooting–Rosemount 8732E


6-9



If the preceding steps fail to resolve the process noise symptoms, consult your Rosemount sales representative about using a high-signal magnetic flowmeter system.

Step 3: Installed Flowtube Tests

If a problem with an installed flowtube is identified, Table 6-6 can assist in troubleshooting the flowtube. Before performing any of the flowtube tests, disconnect or turn off power to the transmitter. To interpret the results, the hazardous location certification for the flowtube must be known. Applicable codes for the Rosemount 8705 are N0, N5, and KD. Applicable codes for the Rosemount 8707 are N0 and N5. Applicable codes for the Rosemount 8711 are N0, N5, E5, and CD. Always check the operation of test equipment before each test.

If possible, take all readings from inside the flowtube junction box. If the flowtube junction box is inaccessible, take measurements as close as possible. Readings taken at the terminals of remote-mount transmitters that are more than 100 feet away from the flowtube may provide incorrect or inconclusive information and should be avoided. A flowtube circuit diagram is provided in Figure 6-1 on page 6-11.

Table 6-6. Flowtube Test

Test

Flowtube

Location

Required

Equipment

Measuring at

Connections Expected Value Potential Cause Corrective Action

A. Flowtube

Coil

Installed or

Uninstalled

Multimeter 1 and 2 = R • Open or

Shorted Coil

• Remove and

replace flowtube

B. Shields to

Case

Installed or

Uninstalled

Multimeter 17 and

and case

ground

17 and case

ground

• Moisture in

terminal block

• Leaky electrode

• Process behind

liner

• Clean terminal

block

• Remove

flowtube

C. Coil Shield

to Coil

Installed or

Uninstalled

Multimeter 1 and

2 and

(< 1nS)

(< 1nS)• Process behind

liner

• Leaky electrode

• Moisture in

terminal block

• Remove

flowtube and dry

• Clean terminal

block

• Confirm with

flowtube coil

test

D. Electrode

Shield to

Electrode

Installed LCR (Set to

Resistance

and 120 Hz)

18 and 17 = R1

19 and 17 = R2

R1 and R2 should be stable

NO:

N5, E5, CD,

ED:

• Unstable R1 or

R2 values

confirm coated

electrode

• Shorted

electrode

• Electrode not in

contact with

process

• Empty Pipe

• Low conductivity

• Leaky electrode

• Remove coating

from flowtube

wall

• Use bulletnose

electrodes

• Repeat

measurement

• Pull tube,

complete test in

Table 6-7 and

Table 6-8 on

page 6-12 out of

line.

2Ω R 18Ω≤ ≤

0.2Ω<

∞Ω

∞Ω

R1 R– 2 300Ω≤

R1 R– 2 1500Ω≤

6-10



To test the flowtube, a multimeter capable of measuring conductance in nanosiemens is preferred. Nanosiemens is the reciprocal of resistance.

or

Figure 6-1. Flowtube Circuit Diagram

Step 4: Uninstalled Flowtube Tests

An uninstalled flowtube can also be used for flowtube troubleshooting. To interpret the results, the hazardous location certification for the flowtube must be known. Applicable codes for the Rosemount 8705 are N0, N5, and KD. Applicable codes for the Rosemount 8707 are N0 and N5. Applicable codes for the Rosemount 8711 are N0, N5, E5, and CD.

A flowtube circuit diagram is provided in Figure 6-1. Take measurements from the terminal block and on the electrode head inside the flowtube. The measurement electrodes, 18 and 19, are on opposite sides in the inside diameter. If applicable, the third grounding electrode is in between the other two electrodes. On Rosemount 8711 flowtubes, electrode 18 is near the flowtube junction box and electrode 19 is near the bottom of the flowtube (Figure 6-2). The different flowtube models will have slightly different resistance readings. Flanged flowtube resistance readings are in Table 6-7 while wafer flowtube resistance readings are in Table 6-8.

1nanosiemens1

1gigaohm----------------------------=

1nanosiemens1

1 109ohm×

-------------------------------=

68.1k� (not applicable for flowtubes with N0 hazardous certification approval option code)

Flowtube Housing

68.1k�

See “Safety Information” on page 6-1 for complete warning information.

6-11



Figure 6-2. 45° Electrode Plane

To insure accuracy of resistance readings, zero out multimeter by shorting and touching the leads together. Table 6-7. Uninstalled Rosemount 8705 / 8707 Flanged Flowtube Tests

Measuring at Connections

Hazardous Location Certifications

N0 N5, KD

18 and Electrode(1)

(1) It is difficult to tell from visual inspection alone which electrode is wired to which number terminal in the terminal block. Measure both electrodes. One electrode should result in an open reading, while the other electrode should be less than 275 .

19 and Electrode(1)

17 and Grounding Electrode

17 and Ground Symbol

17 and 18 Open Open

17 and 19 Open Open

17 and 1 Open Open

Table 6-8. Uninstalled Rosemount 8711 Wafer Flowtube Tests

Measuring at Connections

Hazardous Location Certification

N0 N5, E5, CD

18 and Electrode(1)

(1) Measure the electrode closest to the junction box

19 and Electrode(2)

(2) Measure the electrode farthest away from the junction box.

17 and Grounding Electrode

17 and Grounding Symbol

17 and 18 Open Open

17 and 19 Open Open

17 and 1 Open Open

Ω

275≤ Ω 61kΩ R 75k≤ ≤ Ω

275≤ Ω 61kΩ R 75k≤ ≤ Ω

0.3≤ Ω 0.3≤ Ω

0.3≤ Ω 0.3≤ Ω

0.3≤ Ω 61kΩ R 75k≤ ≤ Ω

275≤ Ω 61kΩ R 75k≤ ≤ Ω

0.3≤ Ω 0.3≤ Ω

0.3≤ Ω 0.3≤ Ω

6-12



Appendix A Reference Data

Dimensional Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page A-31

Magnetic Flowmeter Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page A-40

Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page A-43

Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page A-48

Rosemount 8732E Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . page A-48

Rosemount 8712D Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . page A-50

Rosemount 8712H Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . page A-51

Rosemount 8742C Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . page A-52

ROSEMOUNT 8732E TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS

Functional Specifications

Flowtube Sensor Compatibility

Compatible with Rosemount 8705, 8711, 8721, and 570TM flowtube sensors.

Compatible with Rosemount 8707 flowtube sensor with D2 Dual Calibration Option.

Compatible with AC and DC powered flowtube sensors of other manufacturers.

Flowtube Sensor Coil Resistance

25 Ω maximum

Flow Rate Range

Capable of processing signals from fluids that are traveling between 0.04 and 40 ft/s (0.01 to 12 m/s) for both forward and reverse flow in all flowtube sensor sizes. Full scale continuously adjustable between –40 and 40 ft/s (–12 to 12 m/s).

Conductivity Limits

Process liquid must have a conductivity of 5 microsiemens/cm (5 micromhos/cm) or greater for 8732E. Excludes the effect of interconnecting cable length in remote mount transmitter installations.

Power Supply

90 -250 V AC ±10%, 50–60 Hz or 12-42 V DC

www.rosemount.com



AC Power Supply Requirements

Units powered by 90-250 V AC have the following power requirements.

Figure A-1. 50 Hz AC Requirements

Figure A-2. 60 Hz AC Requirements

DC Load Limitations (Analog Output)

Maximum loop resistance is determined by the voltage level of the external power supply, as described by:

Figure A-3. DC Load Limitations

NOTEHART Communication requires a minimum loop resistance of 250 ohms.

8.4

8.6

8.8

9

9.2

9.4

9.6

9.8

10

90 120 170 220 250

Power Supply (Volts)Po

wer

Dra

w (W

atts

)

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

App

aren

t Pow

er (V

olt-A

mps

)

8.6

8.8

9

9.2

9.4

9.6

9.8

10

90 120 170 220 250


Pow

er D

raw

(Wat

ts)

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

App

aren

t Pow

er (V

olt-A

mps

)

Rmax = 41.7(Vps – 10.8)

Vps = Power Supply Voltage (Volts)

Rmax = Maximum Loop Resistance (Ohms)


Lo

ad (

Oh

ms)

OperatingRegion

1250

1000

500

010.8 42

A-2



DC Supply Current Requirements

Units powered by 12-42 V dc power supply may draw up to 1 amp of current.

Figure A-4. DC Current Requirements

Installation Coordination

Installation (overvoltage) Category II

Power Consumption

10 watts maximum

Switch-on currentAC: Maximum 26 A (< 5 ms) at 250 V AC

DC: Maximum 30 A (< 5 ms) at 42 V DC

Ambient Temperature Limits

Operating–40 to 165 °F (–40 to 74 °C) without local operator interface

13 to 149 °F (–25 to 65 °C) with local operator interface

Storage–40 to 185 °F (–40 to 85 °C)

Humidity Limits

0–100% RH to 150 °F (65 °C)

Enclosure Rating

NEMA 4X CSA Type 4X, IEC 60529, IP67 (transmitter), Pollution Degree 2

Output Signals

Analog Output Adjustment4–20 mA, jumper-selectable as internally or externally powered 10 to 30 V dc; 0 to 1000 Ω load.

Engineering units—lower and upper range values are user-selectable.

Output automatically scaled to provide 4 mA at lower range value and 20 mA at upper range value. Full scale continuously adjustable between -40 and 40 ft/s (-12 to 12 m/sec), 1 ft/s (0.3 m/s) minimum span.

0

0.25

0.5

0.75

1

12 18 24 30 36 42

Power Supply (Volts)Su

pply

Cur

rent

(Am

ps)

A-3



HART Communications, digital flow signal, superimposed on 4–20 mA signal, available for control system interface. 250 Ω required for HART communications.

Scalable Frequency Adjustment

0-10,000 Hz, jumper-selectable as internally or externally powered 10 to 30 V dc, translator

switch closure up to 5.75 w. Pulse value can be set to equal desired volume in selected

engineering units. Pulse width adjustable from 0.5 to 100 m/s. Local operator interface

automatically calculates and displays maximum allowable output frequency.

Digital Output Function

Externally powered at 5 to 24 V dc, transistor switch closure up to 3 W to indicate either:

Reverse Flow: Activates switch closure output when reverse flow is detected. The reverse

flow rate is displayed.

Zero Flow: Activates switch closure output when flow goes to 0 ft/s.

Empty Pipe: Activates switch closure output when empty pipe is detected.

Transmitter Fault: Activates switch closure output when a transmitter fault is detected.

Digital Input Function


Net Total Reset: Resets the net totalizer value to zero.

Positive Zero Return (PZR): Simulates zero-flow condition.

Software Lockout

Security lockout switch on the electronics board can be set to deactivate all LOI and HART-based

communicator functions to protect configuration variables from unwanted or accidental change.

Display Lockout

All optical switches on the display can be locked locally from the display layout configuration

screen by holding the upper right optical switch for 10 seconds. The display can be reactivated

holding the same switch for 10 seconds.

Output Testing

Analog Output Test

Transmitter may be commanded to supply a specified current between 3.5 and 23 mA.

Pulse Output Test

Transmitter may be commanded to supply a specified frequency between 1 and 10,000 Hz.

Turn-on Time

5 minutes to rated accuracy from power up; 5 seconds from power interruption.

Start-up Time

50 ms from zero flow.

Low Flow Cutoff

Adjustable between 0.01 and 38.37 ft/s (0.003 and 11.7 m/s). Below selected value, output is

driven to the zero flow rate signal level.

Overrange Capability

Signal output will remain linear until 110% of upper range value or 43 ft/s (13 m/s). The signal

output will remain constant above these values. Out of range message displayed on LOI and the

HART Communicator.

Damping

Adjustable between 0 and 256 seconds.

Flowtube Sensor Compensation

Rosemount flowtube sensors are flow-calibrated and assigned a calibration factor at the factory.

The calibration factor is entered into the transmitter, enabling interchangeability of flowtube

sensors without calculations or a compromise in accuracy.

A-4



A-5

8732E transmitters and other manufacturer’s flowtube sensors can be calibrated at known

process conditions or at the Rosemount NIST-Traceable Flow Facility. Transmitters calibrated on

site require a two-step procedure to match a known flow rate.

Diagnostics

Basic

Self test

Transmitter faults

Analog output test

Pulse output test

Tunable empty pipe

Reverse flow

Coil circuit fault

Electronics temperature

Advanced (DA1 Suite)

Ground/wiring fault

High process noise

4-20 mA loop verification

Advanced (DA2 Suite)

8714i Calibration Verification

4-20 mA loop verification

Performance Specifications

(System specifications are given using the frequency output and with the unit at reference

conditions.)

Accuracy(1)

Includes the combined effects of linearity, hysteresis, repeatability, and calibration uncertainty.

Rosemount 8732E with 8705/8707 Flowtube Sensor:

Standard system accuracy is ±0.25% of rate ±1.0 mm/sec from 0.04 to 6 ft/s (0.01 to 2 m/s);

above 6 ft/s (2 m/s), the system has an accuracy of ±0.25% of rate ±1.5 mm/sec.

Optional high accuracy is ±0.15% of rate ±1.0 mm/sec from 0.04 to 13 ft/s (0.01 to 4 m/s);

above 13 ft/s (4 m/s), the system has an accuracy of ±0.18% of rate.(2)

Rosemount 8732E with 8711 Flowtube Sensor:

Standard system accuracy is ±0.25% of rate ±2.0 mm/sec from 0.04 to 40 ft/s (0.01 to 12

m/s).


above 13 ft/s (4 m/s), the system has an accuracy of ±0.18% of rate.

Rosemount 8732E with 8721 Flowtube Sensor:

Standard system accuracy is ±0.5% of rate from 1 to 40 ft/s (0.3 to 12 m/s); between 0.04 and

1.0 ft/s (0.01 and 0.3 m/s), the system has an accuracy of ±0.005 ft/s (0.0015 m/s).

Optional high accuracy is ±0.25% of rate from 3 to 40 ft/s (1 to 12 m/s).

Rosemount 8732E with Other Manufacturers’ Flowtube Sensors:

When calibrated in the Rosemount Flow Facility, system accuracies as good as 0.5% of rate

can be attained.

There is no accuracy specification for other manufacturers’ flowtube sensors calibrated in the

process line.

Analog Output Effect

Analog output has the same accuracy as frequency output plus an additional ±4μA.

Vibration Effect

IEC 60770-1

(1) Operating at Coil Drive Frequency of 37 Hz increases uncertainty by ±0.05% of rate.

(2) For Flowtube Sensor sizes greater than 12 in. (300 mm) the high accuracy is ±0.25% of rate

from 3 to 40 ft/sec (1 to 12 m/sec).



Repeatability

±0.1% of reading

Response Time (Analog Output)

50 ms maximum response to step change in input

Stability

±0.1% of rate over six months

Ambient Temperature Effect

±0.25% change over operating temperature range

EMC Compliance

EN61326-1 1997 + A1/A2 (Industrial) electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) for process and

laboratory apparatus.

Dead TimeAt 5 Hz, up to 100 ms

At 37 Hz, up to 13.3 ms

Physical Specifications Materials of Construction

Housing

Low copper aluminum, NEMA 4X and IEC 60529 IP66

Pollution Degree 2

Paint

Polyurethane

Cover Gasket

Rubber

Electrical Connections

Two 1/2–14 NPT connections provided on the transmitter housing (optional third connection

available). PG13.5 and CM20 adapters are available. Screw terminals provided for all

connections. Power wiring connected to transmitter only. Integrally mounted transmitters are

factory wired to the flowtube sensor.

Transmitter Weight

Approximately 7 pounds (3.2 kg). Add 1 pound (0.5 kg) for Option Code M4.

A-6



Rosemount 8712D/H Transmitter Specifications



8712D: Compatible with Rosemount 8705, 8711, 8721, and 570TM flowtube sensors. Compatible

with Rosemount 8707 flowtube sensor with D2 Dual calibration option. Compatible with AC and

DC powered flowtube sensors of other manufacturers.

8712H: Only compatible with 8707 High-Signal flowtube sensor.


Flow Rate Range

8712D: Capable of processing signals from fluids that are traveling between 0.01 and 40 ft/s (0 to

12 m/s) for both forward and reverse flow in all flowtube sensor sizes. Full scale continuously

adjustable between –40 and 40 ft/s (–12 to 12 m/s).

8712H: Capable of processing signals from fluids that are traveling between 0.04 and 30 ft/s

(0.01 to 10 m/s) for both forward and reverse flow in all flowtube sensor sizes. Full scale

continuously adjustable between –30 and 30 ft/s (–10 to 10 m/s).

Conductivity Limits

Process liquid must have a conductivity of 5 microsiemens/cm (5 micromhos/cm) or greater for

Rosemount 8712D. Process liquid must have a conductivity of 50 microsiemens/cm (50

micromhos/cm) for the 8712H. Excludes the effect of interconnecting cable length in remote

mount transmitter installations.

Power Supply

DC Load Limitations (Analog Output)

Maximum loop resistance is determined by the voltage level of the external power supply, as

described by:

Figure A-5. DC Load Limitations

NOTEHART Communication requires a minimum loop resistance of 250 ohms.

Rosemount 8712D: 350 � maximum

Rosemount 8712H: 12 � maximum

8712D: 90-250 V ac ±10%, 50–60 Hz or 12–42 V dc

8712H: 115 V ac ±10%, 50–60 Hz

Rmax = 41.7(Vps – 10.8)

Vps = Power Supply Voltage (Volts)

Rmax = Maximum Loop Resistance (Ohms)


Lo

ad (

Oh

ms)

OperatingRegion

1250

1000

500

010.8 42

A-7



Supply Current Requirements (8712D)


FIGURE 1. DC Current Requirements



Power Consumption


Operating

Storage

–22 to 176 °F (–40 to 80 °C)

Humidity Limits

0–100% RH at 120 °F (49 °C), decreases linearly to 10% RH at 130 °F (54 °C)

Enclosure Ratings

Enclosure Type 4X, IP65

Output Signals

Analog Output Adjustment

4–20 mA, jumper-selectable as internally or externally powered 5 to 24 V dc; 0

to 1000 Ω load.

Engineering units—lower and upper range values are user-selectable.

Output automatically scaled to provide 4 mA at lower range value and 20 mA at upper range

value.

8712D: Full scale continuously adjustable between -40 and 40 ft/s (-12 to 12 m/sec), 1 ft/s

(0.3 m/s) minimum span.

8712H: Full scale continuously adjustable between -30 and 30 ft/s (-10 to 10 m/sec), 1 ft/s

(0.3 m/s) minimum span.

8712D: 10 watts maximum

8712H: 300 watts maximum

8712D: –20 to 140°F (–29 to 60 °C) with local

operator interface

–40 to 165°F (–40 to 74 °C) without local

operator interface

8712H: –20 to 130 °F (–29 to 54 °C) with or without

local operator interface

12 18 24 30 36 420.0

0.3

0.8

1.0

0.5


Su

pp

ly C

urr

en

t (A

mp

s)

A-8



HART Communications, digital flow signal, superimposed on 4–20 mA signal, available for

control system interface. 250 Ω required for HART communications.

Scalable Frequency Adjustment

8712D: 0-10,000Hz, externally powered at 5 to 24 V dc, transistor switch closure supports

power loads up to 2W for frequencies up to 4000Hz, and 5 V dc at 0.1 W at maximum

frequency of 10,000 Hz. Pulse can be set to equal desired velocity or volume in user

selectable engineering units. Pulse width is adjustable from 1.5 to 500 msec, below 1.5 msec

pulse width automatically switches to 50% duty cycle.

8712H: 0-1000 Hz, externally powered at 5 to 24 V dc, transistor switch closure up to 5.75 W.

Pulse value can be set to equal desired volume in selected engineering units. Pulse width

adjustable from 0.5 to 100 m/s. Local operator interface automatically calculates and displays

maximum allowable output frequency.

Auxiliary Output Function


Reverse Flow: Activates switch closure output when reverse flow is detected. The reverse

flow rate is displayed.

Zero Flow: Activates switch closure output when flow goes to 0 ft/s.

Positive Zero Return (PZR)

Forces outputs of the transmitter to the zero flow rate signal level. Activated by applying a

contact closure.

Software Lockout

Security lockout jumper on the electronics board can be set to deactivate all LOI and

HART-based communicator functions to protect configuration variables from unwanted or

accidental change.

Output Testing

Analog Output Test

Transmitter may be commanded to supply a specified current between 3.75 and 23.25 mA

Pulse Output Test

8712D: Transmitter may be commanded to supply a specified frequency between 1 pulse/

day and 10,000 Hz

8712H: Transmitter may be commanded to supply a specified frequency between 1 and 1000

Hz

Turn-on Time

8712D: 5 minutes to rated accuracy from power up, 5 seconds from power interruption

8712H: 30 minutes to rated accuracy from power up, 5 seconds from power interruption

Start-up Time

0.2 seconds from zero flow

Low Flow Cutoff

Adjustable between 0.04 and 1 ft/s (0.01 and 0.3 m/s). Below selected value, output is driven to

the zero flow rate signal level.

(8712D is adjustable between 0.01 and 1 ft/s).

Overrange Capability

Signal output will remain linear until 110% of upper range value. The signal output will remain

constant above these values. Out of range message displayed on LOI and the

HART Communicator.

Damping

8712D: Adjustable between 0.0 and 256 seconds

8712H: Adjustable between 0.2 and 256 seconds

A-9







8712D transmitters and other manufacturer’s flowtube sensors can be calibrated at known

process conditions or at the Rosemount NIST-Traceable Flow Facility. Transmitters calibrated on

site require a two-step procedure to match a known flow rate.


(System specifications are given using the frequency output and with the unit at referenced

conditions.)

Accuracy(1)


Rosemount 8712D with 8705/8707 Flowtube Sensor:





Rosemount 8712D with 8711 Flowtube Sensor:


m/s).



Rosemount 8712D with 8721 Flowtube Sensor:




Rosemount 8712D with Other Manufacturers’ Flowtube Sensors:

When calibrated in the Rosemount Flow Facility, system accuracies as good as 0.5% of rate

can be attained.

There is no accuracy specification for other manufacturers’ flowtube sensors calibrated in the

process line.

Rosemount 8712H with 8707 Flowtube Sensor

System accuracy is ±0.5% of rate from 3 to 30 ft/s (1 to 10 m/s); between 0.04 and 3.0 ft/s

(0.01 and 0.3 m/s), the system has an accuracy of ±0.015 ft/s (0.005 m/s).

Analog Output Effect

8712D: Analog output has the same accuracy as frequency output plus an additional 0.05% of

span.

8712H: Analog output has the same accuracy as frequency output plus an additional 0.1% of

span.

Vibration Effect

±0.1% of span per SAMA PMC 31.1, Level 2

Repeatability

±0.1% of reading




A-10



A-11

Response Time

0.2 seconds maximum response to step change in input

Stability





8712D: 0.25% over operating temperature range

8712H: ±1% per 100 °F (37.8 °C)

RFI EffectClass 1, A, B, C: ±0.5% of span at 3 V/m per SAMA PMC 33.1, wires and conduit

EN61326-1 1997 + A1/A2 (Industrial) electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) for process and


Supply Voltage EffectTransmitter meets supply voltage effect requirements of SAMA PMC 31.1, Section 5.10.1 through

5.10.5. Transmitter withstands surges in supply voltage as specified in IEEE 472, 1974

Physical Specifications Materials of Construction

Housing

Low-copper aluminum, NEMA 4X and IEC 60529 IP65

Pollution Degree 2

Paint

Polyurethane

Cover Gasket

Rubber


Four 1/2–14 NPT connections provided on the base of the transmitter. Screw terminals provided

for all of the connections. Power wiring connected to the transmitter only. Remote mounted

transmitters require only a single conduit connection to the flowtube sensor.

NOTEIf 3/4 - 14 NPT connections are required, 1/2 to 3/4 inch adapter kits are available for order.

Line Power Fuses

90–250 V ac systems (8712D)

2 amp, Quick-acting Bussman AGCI or equivalent

12–42 V dc systems (8712D)

3 amp, Quick-acting Bussman AGCI or equivalent

115 V ac systems (8712H)

5 amp, Quick-acting Bussman AGCI or equivalent (Rosemount 8712H only).

Transmitter WeightTransmitter approximately 9 lb (4 kg). Add 1 lb (0.5 kg) for local operator interface.

A-12



Rosemount 8742C Transmitter Specifications



Compatible with Rosemount 8705, 8711, 8721, and 570TM flowtube sensors.

Compatible with Rosemount 8707 flowtube sensor with D2 Dual Calibration Option.

Conductivity Limits

Process liquid must have a conductivity of 5 microsiemens/cm (5 micromhos/cm) or greater for

8742C. Excludes the effects of interconnecting cable length in remote mount transmitter

installations.


25 � maximum

Flow Rate Range

Capable of processing signals from fluids that are traveling between 0 and 40 ft/s (0 to 12 m/s) for

both forward and reverse flow in all flowtube sensor sizes.

Power Supply

90–250 V ac, 50–60 Hz, 15–50 V dc

Supply Current Requirements


Figure A-6. DC Current Requirements



Power Consumption

10 watts maximum


Operating

–40 to 165 °F (–40 to 74 °C) without local display

–13 to 147 °F (–25 to 65 °C) with local display

Storage

–40 to 185 °F (–40 to 85 °C)

Humidity Limits

0–100% RH to 150 °F (65 °C)


15 5020 30 40

Su

pp

ly C

urr

en

t (A

mp

s)

1.0

0.75

0.5

0.25

0

I = 10/V

I = Supply current requirement (Amps)

V = Power supply voltage (Volts)

A-13



Enclosure Rating

NEMA 4X CSA Type 4X, IEC 60529, IP67 (transmitter),

Pollution Degree 2

Output Signal

Manchester-encoded digital signal that conforms to IEC 1158-2 and ISA 50.02

FOUNDATION™ Fieldbus

SpecificationsSchedule Entries

Seven (7)

Links

Twenty (20)

Virtual Communications Relationships (VCRs)

One (1) predefined (F6, F7)

Nineteen (19) configurable (see Table 1)

Table A-1. Block Information

Reverse FlowDetects and reports reverse flow

Software LockoutA write-lock switch and software lockout are provided in the resource function block.

Turn-on Time30 minutes to rated accuracy from power up;

10 seconds communication from power interruption

Start-up Time0.2 seconds from zero flow

Low Flow CutoffAdjustable between 0 and 1 ft/s. Below selected value, output is driven to the zero flow rate.

Overrange CapabilitySignal output continues to 110% of upper range value setting, then remains constant. Messages

are supplied to the fieldbus network.

DampingAdjustable between 0 and 255 seconds

Block

Execution Time

(Milliseconds)

Resource (RB) —

Transducer (TB) —

Analog Input (AI) 15

Proportional/Integral/

Derivative (PID)

25

Integrator (INT) 20

Arithmatic (AR) 20

A-14




(System specifications are given using the unit at referenced conditions.)

Accuracy(1)


Rosemount 8742C with 8705/8707 Flowtube Sensor:

Standard system accuracy is ±0.3% of rate ±1.0 mm/sec from 0.04 to 40 ft/s (0.01 to 12 m/s).

Optional high accuracy is ±0.2% of rate ±1.0 mm/sec from 0.04 to 40 ft/s (0.01 to 12 m/s)(2).

Rosemount 8742C with 8711 Flowtube Sensor:


Optional high accuracy is ±0.2% of rate ±1.0 mm/sec from 0.04 to 40 ft/s (0.01 to 12 m/s).





Vibration EffectIEC 60770-1

Repeatability±0.1% of reading

Response Time0.2 seconds maximum response to step change in input

Stability±0.1% of rate over six months

Ambient Temperature Effect±0.25% of rate over operating temperature range

EMC ComplianceEN61326-1 1997 + A1/A2 3(Industrial) electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) for process and


Transient ProtectionThe 8742C transmitter prevents damage to the flowmeter from transients compliant to:

IEC 6100 – 4-4 (for burst currents)

IEC 6100 – 4-5 (for surge currents)

Mounting Position EffectNone when installed to ensure flowtube sensor remains full

Physical Specifications Materials of Construction (Transmitter)

Housing

Low-copper aluminum

Paint

Polyurethane

Cover Gasket

Rubber




A-15




Two 1/2–14 NPT with number 8 screw terminal connections are provided for electrical wiring.

PG13.5 and CM20 adapters are available. Screw terminals provided for all connections. Power

wiring connected to transmitter only. Integrally mounted transmitters are factory wired to the

flowtube sensor.

Mounting

Integrally mounted transmitters do not require interconnecting cables. The local display and

transmitter can be rotated in 90° increments. Remote mounted transmitters require only a single

conduit connection to the flowtube sensor.

Weight

Approximately 7 pounds (3.2 kg). Add 0.5 pounds (0.5 kg) for local display.

A-16



Rosemount 8705 Flanged and 8707 High-Signal Flanged Flowtube Sensors Specifications


ServiceConductive liquids and slurries

Line Sizes1/2–36 inch (15–900 mm) for Rosemount 8705

3–36 inch (80–600 mm) for Rosemount 8707

InterchangeabilityRosemount 8705 Flowtube Sensors are interchangeable with 8712D, 8732, and 8742C

Transmitters. Rosemount 8707 High-Signal Flowtube Sensors are interchangeable with 8712H

High-Signal Transmitters. System accuracy is maintained regardless of line size or optional

features. Each flowtube sensor nameplate has a sixteen-digit calibration number that can be

entered into a transmitter through the Local Operator Interface (LOI) or the HART Communicator

on the 8712D and the 8732E. In a FOUNDATION™ fieldbus environment, the 8742C can be

configured using the DeltaV™ fieldbus configuration tool or another FOUNDATION fieldbus

configuration device. No further calibration is necessary.

Upper Range Limit40 ft/s (12 m/s)

Process Temperature Limits

Teflon (PTFE) Lining

–20 to 350 °F (–29 to 177 °C)

Tefzel (ETFE) Lining

–20 to 300 °F (–29 to 149 °C)

PFA Lining

-20 to 350 °F (-29 to 177 °C)

Polyurethane Lining

0 to 140 °F (–18 to 60 °C)

Neoprene Lining

0 to 185 °F (–18 to 85 °C)

Linatex Lining

0 to 158 °F (–18 to 70 °C)


–30 to 150 °F (–34 to 65 °C)

Pressure LimitsSee Table 1 and Table 3

Vacuum Limits


Full vacuum to 350 °F (177 °C) through 4-inch (100 mm) line sizes. Consult factory for

vacuum applications with line sizes of 6 inches (150 mm) or larger.

All Other Standard Flowtube Sensor Lining Materials

Full vacuum to maximum material temperature limits for all available line sizes.

Submergence ProtectionIP 68. Continuous to 30 feet (10 meters)

Recommended with sealed cable glands

A-17



Conductivity LimitsProcess liquid must have a conductivity of 5 microsiemens/cm (5 micromhos/cm) or greater for

8705. Process liquid must have a conductivity of 50 microsiemens/cm (50 micromhos/cm) for

8707 when used with 8712H, 5 microsiemens/cm when used with other transmitters. Excludes

the effect of interconnecting cable length in remote mount transmitter installations.

A-18




(System specifications are given using the frequency output and with the unit at referenced conditions.)

TABLE 1. Temperature vs. Pressure Limits(1)

Flowtube Sensor Temperature vs. Pressure Limits for ASME B16.5 Class Flanges (1/2- to 36-inch line sizes) (2)

Pressure

Flange Material Flange Rating@ -20 to 100 °F(-29 to 38 °C)

@ 200 °F(93 °C)

@ 300 °F(149 °C)

@ 350 °F(177 °C)

Carbon Steel

Class 150 285 psi 260 psi 230 psi 215 psi


Class 600 (3) 1000 psi 800 psi 700 psi 650 psi

Class 600 (4) 1480 psi NA NA NA

Class 900 2220 psi

304 Stainless Steel



Class 600 (5) 1000 psi 800 psi 700 psi 650 psi

Class 600 (6) 1440 psi NA NA NA

Class 900 2160 psi

(1) Liner temperature limits must also be considered. Polyurethane, Linatex, and Neoprene have temperature limits of 140°F, 158°F, and 185°F, respectively.(2) 30- and 36-inch AWWA C207 Table 2 Class D rated to 150 psi at atmospheric temperature.(3) Option Code C6(4) Option Code C7(5) Option Code S6(6) Option Code S7

TABLE 2. Temperature vs. Pressure Limits (1)

Flowtube Sensor Temperature vs. Pressure Limits for AS2129 Table D and E Flanges (4- to 24-inch line sizes)

Pressure

Flange Material Flange Rating@ -200 to 50 °F(-320 to 122 °C)

@ 100 °F(212 °C)

@ 150°F(302 °C)

@ 200 °F(392 °C)

Carbon SteelD 101.6 psi 101.6 psi 101.6 psi 94.3 psi

E 203.1 psi 203.1 psi 203.1 psi 188.6 psi

(1) Liner temperature limits must also be considered. Polyurethane, Linatex, and Neoprene have temperature limits of 140°F, 158°F, and 185°F, respectively.

TABLE 3. Temperature vs. Pressure Limits (1)

Flowtube Sensor Temperature vs. Pressure Limits for DIN Flanges (15 to 600 mm line sizes)

Pressure

Flange Material Flange Rating@ -196 to 50 °C(-320 to 122 °F)

@ 100 °C(212 °F)

@ 150°C(302 °F)

@ 175°C(347 °F)

Carbon Steel

PN 10 10 bar 10 bar 9.7 bar 9.5 bar

PN 16 16 bar 16 bar 15.6 bar 15.3 bar

PN 25 25 bar 25 bar 24.4 bar 24.0 bar

PN 40 40 bar 40 bar 39.1 bar 38.5 bar

304 Stainless Steel

PN 10 9.1 bar 7.5 bar 6.8 bar 6.5 bar

PN 16 14.7 bar 12.1 bar 11.0 bar 10.6 bar

PN 25 23 bar 18.9 bar 17.2 bar 16.6 bar

PN 40 36.8 bar 30.3 bar 27.5 bar 26.5 bar

(1) Liner temperature limits must also be considered. Polyurethane, Linatex, and Neoprene have temperature limits of 140°F, 158°F, and 185°F, respectively.

A-19



Accuracy(1)


Rosemount 8705/8707 with 8732E and 8712D:





Rosemount 8742C with 8705/8707 Flowtube Sensor:


Optional high accuracy is ±0.2% of rate ±1.0 mm/sec from 0.04 to 40 ft/s (0.01 to 12 m/s)(2).

Rosemount 8707 with 8712H:

System accuracy is ±0.5% of rate from 3 to 30 ft/s (1 to 10 m/s); between 0.04 and 3.0 ft/s

(0.01 and 0.3 m/s), the system has an accuracy of ±0.005 ft/s (0.0015 m/s).


Mounting Position EffectNone when installed to ensure flowtube sensor remains full

Physical Specifications Non-Wetted Materials

Flowtube Sensor

AISI Type 304 SST

Flanges

Carbon steel, AISI Type 304/304L SST,

or Type 316/316L SST

Housing

Welded steel

Paint

Polyurethane

Process Wetted Materials

Lining

PFA, Teflon (PTFE), Tefzel (ETFE), polyurethane, neoprene, Linatex

Electrodes

316L SST, Hastelloy C-276, tantalum, 80% platinum-20% iridium, titanium




A-20



Process Connections

ASME B16.5 (ANSI) Class 150, Class 300,

Class 600, or Class 900

0.5- to 30-inch (Class 150)

0.5- to 24-inch (Class 300)

0.5- to 10-inch (Class 600 derated to 1000 psi max)

1- to 8-inch (Full rated Class 600 and 900)

AWWA C207 Table 3 Class D

30- and 36-inch

EN 1092 (DIN) PN 10, 16, 25, and 40

PN10: Not available for flange sizes from 15 to 150 mm

PN16: Not available for flange sizes from 15 to 80 mm

PN 25: Not available for flange sizes from 15 to 150 mm

PN40: Available for all flange sizes

AS 2129 Table D and E

0.5- to 36 inch

AISI Type 304 SST Sanitary Tri-Clover

3-A-compliant quick disconnect ferrule-mounted to ASME B16.5 (ANSI) Class 150 flange;

0.5- to 3-inch.

Electrical ConnectionsTwo 1/2–14 NPT connections with number 8 screw terminals are provided in the terminal

enclosure for electrical wiring.

Grounding ElectrodeA grounding electrode is installed similarly to the measurement electrodes through the flowtube

sensor lining on 8705 flowtube sensors. It is available in all electrode materials.

Grounding RingsGrounding rings are installed between the flange and the tube face on both ends of the flowtube

sensor. A single ground ring option is available for flanged flowtube sensors. If selected, the

single ground ring should be installed on the upstream side of the flowtube sensor for optimum

results. Grounding rings have an I.D. slightly larger than the flowtube sensor I.D. and an external

tab to attach ground wiring. Grounding rings are available in 316L SST, Hastelloy-C, titanium, and

tantalum.

Lining ProtectorsLining protectors are installed between the flange and the tube face on both ends of the flowtube

sensor. The leading edge of lining material is protected by the lining protector; lining protectors

cannot be removed once they are installed. Lining protectors are available in 316L SST,

Hastelloy-C, and titanium.

DimensionsSee Figure 2, Figure 3, and Figure 5 and Table 21, Table 8, and Table 9.

WeightSee Table 4 and Table 5

A-21



TABLE 4. Flowtube Sensor Weight (ASME)

Nominal Line Size(1) Inches (mm)

Flowtube Sensor Flange RatingFlowtube Sensor Weight

lb (kg)ASME B16.5 (ANSI) DIN

½ (15)

½ (15)

150

300

PN 40 20 (9)

22 (10)

1 (25)

1 (25)

150

300

PN 40 20 (9)

22 (10)

1½ (40)

1½ (40)

150

300

PN 40 22 (10)

24 (11)

2 (50)

2 (50)

150

300

PN 40 26 (12)

28 (13)

3 (80)

3 (80)

150

300

PN 40 40 (18)

47 (21)

4 (100)

4 (100)

150

300

PN 16 48 (22)

65 (30)

6 (150)

6 (150)

150

300

PN 16 81 (37)

93 (42)

8 (200)

8 (200)

150

300

PN 10 110 (50)

162 (74)

10 (250)

10 (250)

150

300

PN 10 220 (98)

300 (136)

12 (300)

12 (300)

150

300

PN 10 330 (150)

435 (197)

14 (350)

16 (400)

150

150

PN 10

PN 10

370 (168)

500 (227)

18 (450)

20 (500)

150

150

PN 10

PN 10

600 (272)

680 (308)

24 (600) 150 PN 10 1,000 (454)

30 (750)

36 (900)

150

125

-

-

1,747 (792)

1,975 (898)

(1) 30- and 36-inch AWWA C207 Table 2 Class D rated to 150 psi at atmospheric temperature.

TABLE 5. Flowtube Sensor weights (AS2129)

Nominal Line Size Inches (mm) AS2129 Flowtube Sensor Weight lb (kg)

4 (100)

4 (100)

D

E

33 (15)

37 (17)

6 (150)

6 (150)

D

E

66 (30)

71 (32)

8 (200)

8 (200)

D

E

86 (39)

88 (40)

10 (250)

10 (250)

D

E

187 (85)

201 (91)

12 (300)

12 (300)

D

E

273 (124)

284 (129)

14 (350)

14 (350)

D

E

293 (133)

317 (144)

16 (400)

16 (400)

D

E

386 (175)

430 (195)

18 (450)

18 (450)

D

E

516 (234)

569 (258)

20 (500)

20 (500)

D

E

569 (258)

626 (284)

24 (600)

24 (600)

D

E

855 (388)

974 (442)

A-22



A-23

Rosemount 8711 Wafer Flowtube Sensor Specifications


ServiceConductive liquids and slurries

Line Sizes0.15- through 8-inch (4 through 200 mm)

InterchangeabilityRosemount 8711 Flowtube Sensors are interchangeable with 8732E, 8712D and 8742C

Transmitters. System accuracy is maintained regardless of line size or optional features. Each

flowtube sensor nameplate has a sixteen-digit calibration number that can be entered into a

transmitter through the Local Operator Interface (LOI) or the HART Communicator on the

Rosemount 8712D and the 8732E. In a FOUNDATION fieldbus environment, the 8742C can be

configured using the DeltaV fieldbus configuration tool or another FOUNDATION fieldbus

configuration device. No further calibration is necessary.

Upper Range Limit40 ft/s (12 m/s)



–20 to 300 °F (–29 to 149 °C) for 0.5- through 8-inch

(15–200 mm) line sizes

–20 to 200 °F (–29 to 93 °C) for 0.15- and 0.3-inch

(4 and 8 mm) line sizes


-20 to 350 °F (-29 to 177 °C)

Ambient Temperature Limits–30 to 150 °F (–34 to 65 °C)

Maximum Safe Working Pressure at 100 °F (38 °C)


Full vacuum to 740 psi (5.1 MPa) for 0.5- through 8-inch

(15 through 200 mm) flowtube sensors

285 psi (1.96 MPa) for 0.15- and 0.30-inch (4 and 8 mm) flowtube sensors


Full vacuum through 4-inch (100 mm) line sizes. Consult factory for vacuum applications with

line sizes of 6 inches (150 mm) or larger.

Conductivity LimitsProcess liquid must have a conductivity of 5 microsiemens/cm (5 micromhos/cm) or greater for

8711. Excludes the effect of interconnecting cable length in remote mount

transmitter installations.





conditions.)

Accuracy(1)

Rosemount 8711 with 8732E and 8712D:


m/s).





Optional high accuracy is ±0.2% of rate ±1.0 mm/sec from 0.04 to 40 ft/s (0.01 to 12 m/s).


Mounting Position EffectNo effect when installed to ensure flowtube sensor remains full

Physical Specifications

Non-Wetted Materials

Flowtube Sensor

303 SST (ASTM A-743)

Coil Housing

Investment cast steel (ASTM A-27)

Paint

Polyurethane

Process-Wetted Materials

Lining

Tefzel (ETFE), Teflon (PTFE)

Electrodes

316L SST, Hastelloy C-276, tantalum,

80% platinum—20% iridium, titanium


A-24



Process Connections

Mounts between these Flange Configurations

ASME B16.5 (ANSI): Class 150, 300

EN 1092 (DIN): PN 10 and 25

BS: 10 Table D, E, and F

Studs, Nuts, and Washers(1)

ASME B16.5 (ANSI)

0.15- through 1-inch (4 through 25 mm):

316 SST, ASTM A193, Grade B8M, Class 1 threaded mounting studs; ASTM A194, Grade

8M heavy hex nuts; SAE per ANSI B18.2.1, Type A, Series N flat washers.

1.5- through 8-inch (40 through 200 mm):

CS, ASTM A193, Grade B7, Class 1 threaded mounting studs; ASTM A194, Grade 2H heavy

hex nuts; SAE per ANSI B18.2.1, Type A, Series N flat washers; all items clear, chromate

zinc-plated.

EN 1092 (DIN)

4 through 25 mm (0.15- through 1-inch):

316 SST ASTM A193, Grade B8M Class 1 threaded mounting studs; ASTM A194, Grade 8M,

DIN 934 H=D, metric heavy hex nuts; 316 SST, A4, DIN 125 flat washers.

40 through 200 mm (1.5- through 8-inch):

CS, ASTM A193, Grade B7 threaded mounting studs; ASTM A194, Grade 2H, DIN 934 H=D,

metric heavy hex nuts; CS, DIN 125 flat washers; all items yellow zinc-plated.

Electrical ConnectionsTwo 1/2–14 NPT connections with number 8 screw terminals are provided in the terminal


Grounding ElectrodeA grounding electrode is installed similarly to the measurement electrodes through the flowtube

sensor lining. It is available in all electrode materials.

Grounding RingsGrounding rings are installed between the flange and the tube face on both ends of the flowtube

sensor. They have an I.D. slightly larger than the flowtube sensor I.D. and an external tab to

attach ground wiring. Grounding rings are available in 316L SST, Hastelloy C-276, titanium, and

tantalum.

Dimensions and WeightSee Figure 4, Figure 5, and Table 10

(1) 0.15 and 0.30 inch (4 and 80 mm) flowtube sensors mount between 1/2-inch flange.

A-25



Rosemount 8721 Sanitary Flowtube Sensor Specifications

NOTEAll transmitter specifications can be found in the Product Data Sheet 00813-0100-4727.


Service

Conductive liquids and slurries

Line Sizes1/2 -4 inch (15–100 mm)

Flowtube Sensor Compatibility and Interchangeability

The Rosemount 8721 Flowtube Sensors are interchangeable with Rosemount 8732, 8742, and

8712D transmitters. System accuracy is maintained regardless of line size or optional features.

Each flowtube sensor nameplate has a sixteen-digit calibration number that can be entered into

the transmitter through the Local Operator Interface (LOI) or the HART Communicator. No further

calibration is necessary.





Conductivity Limits

Process liquid must have a conductivity of 5 microsiemens/cm

(5 micromhos/cm) or greater. Excludes the effect of interconnecting cable length in remote mount

transmitter installations.


5Ω to 10Ω (line size dependant)

Flow Rate Range

Capable of processing signals from fluids that are traveling between 0.04 and 33 ft/s (0.01 to 10

m/s) for both forward and reverse flow in all flowtube sensor sizes. Full scale continuously

adjustable between –33 and 33 ft/s (–10 to 10 m/s).

Flowtube Sensor Ambient Temperature Limits

14 to 140 °F (–15 to 60 °C)


PFA Lining

-20 to 350 °F (-29 to 177 °C)

A-26



Pressure Limits

Vacuum Limits

Full vacuum at maximum lining material temperature; consult factory.

Submergence Protection (Flowtube Sensor)

IP68. Continuous to 30 ft (10 m).



conditions).

Accuracy

Rosemount 8732, 8742, or 8712D with 8721 Flowtube Sensor

System accuracy is ±0.5% of rate from 1 to 30 ft/s (0.3 to 10 m/s); includes combined effects

of linearity, hysteresis, repeatability, and calibration uncertainty; between 0.04 and 1.0 ft/s

(0.01 and 0.5 m/s), the system has an accuracy of ±0.005 ft/s.

Repeatability

±0.1% of reading

Response Time

0.2 seconds maximum response to step change in input

Stability



±1% per 100 °F (37.8 °C)

Mounting Position Effect

None when installed to ensure flowtube sensor remains full.

Physical Specifications Mounting

Integrally mounted transmitters are factory-wired and do not require interconnecting cables. The

transmitter can rotate in 90° increments. Remote mounted transmitters require only a single

conduit connection to the flowtube sensor.

Line Size

Max Working

Pressure

CE Mark Max. Working

Pressure

1/2 (15) 300 psi (20.7 bar) 300 psi (20.7 bar)

1 (25) 300 psi (20.7 bar) 300 psi (20.7 bar)

11/2 (40) 300 psi (20.7 bar) 300 psi (20.7 bar)

2 (50) 300 psi (20.7 bar) 300 psi (20.7 bar)

21/2 (65) 300 psi (20.7 bar) 240 psi (16.5 bar)

3 (80) 300 psi (20.7 bar) 198 psi (13.7 bar)

4 (100) 210 psi (14.5 bar) 148 psi (10.2 bar)

A-27



Cable Requirements for Remote Transmitters

Remote transmitter installations require equal lengths of signal and coil drive cables. Lengths

from 5 to 1,000 feet (1.5 to 300 meters) may be specified, and will be shipped with the flowtube

sensor. When ordering the combination cable, the lengths specified must be from 5 to 500 feet

(1.5 to 150 meters). For optimum performance, separate signal and coil cables are

recommended.

Non-Wetted Materials (Flowtube Sensor)

Flowtube Sensor

304 Stainless Steel (wrapper), 304 Stainless Steel (pipe)

Terminal Junction Box

Cast aluminum, polyurethane coated

Optional: 304 Stainless Steel

Paint

Polyurethane

Weight

8732E Transmitter

5.25 pounds

8732E Transmitter with LOI

6.90 pounds

Aluminum remote junction box

1.84 pounds

TABLE 6. Recommended Cable for Remote Mounting

Description P/N

Signal Cable (20 AWG) Belden 8762,

Alpha 2411 equivalent

08712-0061-0001

Coil Drive Cable (14 AWG) Belden 8720,


08712-0060-0001

Combination Signal and Coil Drive Cable 08712-0752-0001

TABLE 7. 8721 Flowtube Sensor weight (pounds)

Line Size

Flowtube Sensor Only

008721-0350 Tri-Clamp fitting (each)

0.5 4.84 0.58

1.0 4.52 0.68

1.5 5.52 0.88

2.0 6.78 1.30

2.5 8.79 1.66

3.0 13.26 2.22

4.0 21.04 3.28

A-28



Process Wetted Materials (Flowtube Sensor)

Liner

PFA with Ra < 32μinch (0.81μm)

Electrodes

316L SST with Ra < 15μinch (0.38μm)

Hastelloy C-276 with Ra < 15μinch (0.38μm)

80% Platinum-20% Iridium with Ra < 15μinch (0.38μm)

Process Connections

The Rosemount 8721 Sanitary Flowtube Sensor is designed using a standard IDF fitting as the

basis for providing a flexible, hygienic interface for a variety of process connections. The

Rosemount 8721 Flowtube Sensor has the threaded or “male” end of the IDF fitting on the ends

of the base flowtube sensor. The flowtube sensor can be directly connected with user supplied

IDF fittings and gaskets. If other process connections are needed, the IDF fittings and gaskets

can be provided and welded directly into the sanitary process tubing, or can be supplied with

adapters to standard Tri-Clamp® process connections.

Tri-Clamp® Sanitary Coupling

IDF Sanitary Coupling (screw type)

IDF specification per BS4825 part 4

Weld Nipple

DIN 11851

DIN 11864

SMS 1145

Cherry-Burrell I-Line

Process Connection Material

316L Stainless Steel with Ra < 32μinch (0.81μm)

Optional Electropolished Surface Finish

with Ra < 15μinch (0.38μm)

Process Connection Gasket Material

Silicone

EPDM

Viton

Electrical Connections (Flowtube Sensor)

Two 3/4–14 NPT connections with number 8 screw terminals are provided in the terminal


Flowtube Sensor Dimensions

Refer to Figure A-2

A-29



Rosemount 8714D Reference Calibration Standard Specifications



Operating

–30 to 140 °F (–34 to 60 °C)

Storage

–40 to 140 °F (–40 to 60 °C)

Humidity Limits0 to 95% relative humidity


Accuracy±0.05% of rate at 30 ft/s at 25 °C

±0.10% of rate at 10 ft/s and 3 ft/s

Warm-up Time30 minutes

Ambient Temperature Effect< 0.015% of rate per 10 °F (< 0.027% per 10 °C)

Humidity EffectNo effect from 0 to 60% relative humidity

< 0.10% of rate from 60 to 90% relative humidity

Long-Term Stability< 0.10% of rate shift in one year

Physical Specifications Electrical ConnectionsElectrical connections are compatible with 8712D, 8732 or 8742 terminal blocks. Electrical

connections are not compatible with 8712H terminal block.

MountingAny position is acceptable

Materials of Construction

Housing

Extruded aluminum

Covers

Stamped aluminum, silk-screened

Paint

Polyurethane

Weight

Approximately 3 lb (2 kg)

A-30



DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS

Figure A-7. Rosemount 8732E Transmitter

1/2-14 NPT, CM20, or PG 13.5

Electrical Conduit

Connections (3 places)

LOI Cover

11.02(280)

1/2-14 NPT, CM20, or

PG 13.5 Flowtube

Sensor Conduit

Connections

(2 places)

10.5

(267)

5.82

(148)

5.10

(130)

5.10

(130)

7.49

(190)6.48

(165)1.94

(49)

8.81

(224)

3.07

(78)

3.00

(76)

3.43

(87)

A-31



Figure A-8. Rosemount 8712D/H Transmitter

4.31

(109)

LOI Keypad

Cover

9.01

(229)

11.15

(283)

2.81

(71)3.11

(79)

12.02

(305)

0.44

(11)

Ground Lug

1/2–14 NPT

Conduit

Connection

(4 Places)

WITH STANDARD COVER

NOTEDimensions are in inches (millimeters)

2.96

(75)WITH LOI COVER

A-32



Figure A-9. Rosemount 8742C Transmitter

5.10

(130)

6.48 (165)

3.07

(78)

8.81

(224)

3.43

(87)

1/2-14” NPT, CM20, or PG 13.5 Electrical Conduit Connections (2 places)

1/2-14 NPT, CM20, or

PG 13.5 Flowtube

Sensor Conduit

Connections

(2 places)

7.49 (190)

1.94

(49)

3.00

(76)

LOI Cover

10.5

(267)

11.02

(280)

Note

Dimensions in inches (millimeters)

5.82

(148)

A-33



FIGURE 2. Rosemount 8705 and 8707 Flowtube Sensors, Typical of 0.5- through 4-inch (15 through 100 mm) Line Sizes

FIGURE 3. Rosemount 8705 and 8707 Flowtube Sensors, Typical of 6- through 36-inch (150 through 900 mm) Line Sizes

2.00

(50.8)

1.8

(46)

A

4.02

(102)

2.6

(66)

Relief

Valve

1/2-14 NPT

Conduit

Connection

5.00

(127)

2.6

(66)

H

L

C

Notes

Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)

See Table 8 and Table 9 for variable dimensions

W1 Housing Configuration (Sealed, welded housing with pressure relief valve)

A

1.8

(46)

4.02

(102)2.00

(51)

2.6

(66)

D

W3 Housing

Configuration

L

H

C

5.00

(127)

2.66

(66)

Notes


See Table 8 and Table 9 for variable dimensions

W3 Housing Configuration (Sealed welded housing with

separate electrode compartments)

A-34



TABLE 8. Rosemount 8705 and 8707 Dimensions in Inches (Millimeters) (Dimensions with ASME B16.5 (ANSI) Flanges) (1)

Refer to Dimensional Drawings, Figure 2, Figure 3, and Figure 5

Line Size(2) and

Flange Rating

Body Height

“H”

Liner Face

Diameter

“A”

Overall Flowtube

Sensor Length

“L”(3)Flange Diameter

“D” Liner Thickness Inside Diameter

0.5–150

0.5–300

0.5–600

6.75 (171)

6.75 (171)

6.75 (171)

1.38 (35)

1.38 (35)

1.38 (35)

7.88 (200)

7.88 (200)

8.67 (220)

3.50 (89)

3.75 (95)

3.75 (95)

0.09 (2.3)

0.09 (2.3)

0.09 (2.3)

0.49 (12.5)

0.49 (12.5)

0.49 (12.5)

1–150

1–300

1–600

1–900

6.75 (171)

6.75 (171)

6.75 (171)

6.75 (171)

2.00 (51)

2.00 (51)

1.62 (41)

1.62 (41)

7.88 (200)

7.88 (200)

8.67 (220)

9.66 (245)

4.25 (108)

4.88 (124)

4.88 (124)

5.88 (149)

0.09 (2.3)

0.09 (2.3)

0.09 (2.3)

0.13 (3.3)

0.91 (23)

0.91 (23)

0.91 (23)

0.80 (20)

1.5–150

1.5 –300

1.5–600

1.5–900

7.10 (180)

7.10 (180)

7.10 (180)

7.10 (180)

2.88 (73)

2.88 (73)

2.88 (73)

2.50 (64)

7.88 (200)

7.88 (200)

8.63 (219)

9.52 (242)

5.00 (127)

6.12 (155)

6.12 (155)

7.00 (178)

0.12 (3.1)

0.12 (3.1)

0.13 (3.3)

0.13 (3.3)

1.44 (37)

1.44 (37)

1.36 (35)

1.25 (32)

2–150

2–300

2–600

2–900

7.10 (180)

7.10 (180)

7.10 (180)

7.10 (180)

3.62 (92)

3.62 (92)

3.62 (92)

3.25 (83)

7.88 (200)

7.88 (200)

8.78 (223)

10.26 (261)

6.00 (152)

6.50 (165)

6.50 (165)

8.50 (216)

0.12 (3.1)

0.12 (3.1)

0.13 (3.3)

0.13 (3.3)

1.91 (49)

1.91 (49)

1.82 (46)

1.69 (43)

3–150

3–300

3–600

3–900

8.10 (206)

8.10 (206)

8.10 (206)

8.10 (206)

5.00 (127)

5.00 (127)

5.00 (127)

4.63 (118)

7.88 (200)

8.63 (219)

12.4 (315)

12.8 (326)

7.50 (191)

8.25 (210)

8.25 (210)

9.50 (241)

0.15 (3.8)

0.15 (3.8)

0.13 (3.3)

0.13 (3.3)

2.96 (75)

2.96 (75)

2.76 (70)

2.37 (60)

4–150

4–300

4–600

4–900

8.45 (215)

8.45 (215)

8.45 (215)

8.45 (215)

6.19 (157)

6.19 (157)

6.19 (157)

5.81 (148)

9.84 (250)

10.88 (276)

12.83 (326)

13.89 (353)

9.00 (229)

10.00 (254)

10.75 (273)

11.50 (292)

0.15 (3.8)

0.15 (3.8)

0.13 (3.3)

0.13 (3.3)

3.96 (101)

3.96 (101)

3.72 (95)

3.37 (86)

6–150

6–300

6–600

6–900

9.45 (240)

9.45 (240)

9.45 (240)

9.45 (240)

8.50 (216)

8.50 (216)

8.50 (216)

8.00 (203)

11.81 (300)

13.06 (332)

14.23 (361)

15.51 (394)

11.00 (279)

12.50 (318)

14.00 (356)

15.00 (381)

0.19 (4.8)

0.19 (4.8)

0.19 (4.8)

0.16 (4.1)

5.98 (152)

5.69 (144)

5.69 (144)

4.86 (123)

8–150

8–300

8–600

8–900

10.42 (265)

10.42 (265)

10.42 (265)

10.42 (265)

10.62 (270)

10.62 (270)

10.62 (270)

10.00 (254)

13.78 (350)

15.60 (396)

16.72 (428)

18.47 (469)

13.50 (343)

15.00 (381)

16.50 (419)

18.50 (470)

0.19 (4.8)

0.17 (4.3)

0.17 (4.3)

0.17 (4.3)

7.94 (202)

7.64 (194)

7.64 (194)

6.65 (169)

10–150

10–300

10–600

11.78 (299)

11.78 (299)

11.78 (299)

12.75 (324)

12.75 (324)

12.75 (324)

15.00 (381)

17.13 (435)

19.54 (496)

16.00 (406)

17.50 (444)

20.00 (508)

0.26 (6.5)

0.26 (6.5)

0.26 (6.5)

9.87 (251)

9.48 (241)

9.21 (234)

12–150

12–300

12.86 (327)

12.86 (327)

15.00 (381)

15.00 (381)

18.00 (457)

20.14 (512)

19.00 (483)

20.50 (52)

0.26 (6.7)

0.26 (6.7)

11.87 (301)

11.48 (292)

14–150

14–300

13.92 (354)

13.92 (354)

16.25 (413)

16.25 (413)

21.00 (533)

23.25 (591)

21.00 (533)

23.00 (584)

0.19 (4.8)

0.19 (4.8)

13.16 (334)

12.79 (325)

16–150

16–300

14.93 (379)

14.93 (379)

18.50 (470)

18.50 (470)

24.00 (610)

26.25 (667)

23.50 (597)

25.50 (648)

0.19 (4.8)

0.19 (4.8)

15.12 (384)

14.75 (375)

18–150

18–300

18–450

16.19 (411)

16.19 (411)

21.00 (533)

21.00 (533)

27.00 (686)

30.12 (765)

25.00 (635)

28.00 (711)

0.19 (4.8)

0.19 (4.8)

17.09 (434)

16.35 (415)

20–150

20–300

17.20 (437)

17.20 (437)

23.00 (584)

23.00 (584)

30.00 (762)

33.25 (845)

27.50 (698)

30.50 (774)

0.19 (4.8)

0.19 (4.8)

18.96 (482)

18.21 (463)

24–150

24–300

19.48 (495)

19.48 (495)

27.25 (692)

27.25 (692)

36.00 (914)

39.64 (1007)

32.00 (813)

36.00 (914)

0.19 (4.8)

0.19 (4.8)

22.94 (583)

22.06 (560)

30

36

22.23 (565)

26.10 (663)

33.80 (859)

40.27 (1023)

37.25 (946)

40.88 (1038)

38.75 (984)

46.00 (1168)

0.19 (4.8)

0.19 (4.8)

28.75 (730)

35.00 (889)

(1) AS2129 Table D and E flange dimensions match ANSI 150# dimensions.(2) 30- and 36-inch AWWA C207 Table 2 Class D rated to 150 psi at 150 °F.(3) When 2 grounding rings are specified, add 0.25 inch (6.35 mm) for 0.50- through 14-inch (15 through 350 mm) flowtube sensors, add 0.50 inch (12.7 mm)

for 16-inch (400 mm) and larger. When lining protectors are specified, add 0.25 inch (6.35 mm) for ½- through 12-inch (15 through 300 mm) flowtube sensors, add 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) for 14- through 36-inch (350 through 900 mm) flowtube sensors.

A-35



TABLE 9. Rosemount 8705 Flowtube Sensor Dimensions with DIN Flanges in Millimeters (Inches)

Line Size(1)

and Flange

Rating

Body Height

“H”

Liner Face

Diameter

“A”

Overall Flowtube

Sensor Length

“L”(2)Flange Diameter

“D” Liner Thickness Inside Diameter

15 mm PN 10–40 171 (6.75) 45 (1.77) 200 (7.88) 95 (3.74) 2.3 (0.09) 12.5 (.49)

25 mm PN 10–40 171 (6.75) 68 (2.68) 200 (7.88) 115 (4.53) 2.3 (0.09) 23.1 (.91)

40 mm PN 10–40 180 (7.10) 88 (3.46) 200 (7.87) 150 (5.91) 3.1 (0.12) 37 (1.44)

50 mm PN 10–40 180 (7.10) 102 (4.02) 200 (7.87) 165 (6.50) 3.1 (0.12) 49 (1.91)

80 mm PN 10–40 206 (8.10) 138 (5.43) 200 (7.87) 200 (7.87) 3.8 (0.15) 75.2 (2.96)

100 mm PN 10–16 215 (8.45) 162 (6.38) 250 (9.84) 220 (8.66) 3.8 (0.15) 100.6 (3.96)

100 mm PN 25–40 215 (8.45) 162 (6.38) 250 (9.84) 235 (9.25) 3.8 (0.15) 100.6 (3.96)

150 mm PN 10 240 (9.45) 212 (8.35) 300 (11.81) 285 (11.22) 4.7 (0.19) 152 (5.98)

150 mm PN 16 240 (9.45) 215 (8.46) 300 (11.81) 220 (8.66) 4.7 (0.19) 152 (5.98)

150 mm PN 25 240 (9.45) 218 (8.58) 300 (11.81) 300 (11.81) 4.7 (0.19) 152 (5.98)

150 mm PN 40 240 (9.45) 218 (8.58) 332 (13.07) 300 (11.81) 4.7 (0.19) 144 (5.67)

200 mm PN 10 265 (10.42) 268 (10.55) 350 (13.78) 240 (13.39) 4.9 (0.19) 202 (7.94)

200 mm PN 16 265 (10.42) 268 (10.55) 350 (13.78) 340 (13.39) 4.9 (0.19) 202 (7.94)

200 mm PN 25 265 (10.42) 278 (10.94) 350 (13.78) 360 (14.17) 4.9 (0.19) 202 (7.94)

200 mm PN 40 265 (10.42) 285 (11.22) 396 (15.60) 375 (14.76) 4.3 (0.17) 194 (7.64)

250 mm PN 10 299 (11.78) 320 (12.60) 381 (15.00) 395 (15.55) 6.6 (0.26) 251 (9.88)

250 mm PN 16 299 (11.78) 320 (12.60) 381 (15.00) 405 (15.94) 6.6 (0.26) 251 (9.88)

250 mm PN 25 299 (11.78) 335 (13.19) 381 (15.00) 425 (16.73) 6.6 (0.26) 251 (9.88)

250 mm PN 40 299 (11.78) 345 (13.58) 435 (17.13) 450 (17.72) 6.6 (0.26) 240 (9.45)

300 mm PN 10 327 (12.86) 370 (14.57) 457 (18.00) 445 (17.52) 6.6 (0.26) 302 (11.87)

300 mm PN 16 327 (12.86) 378 (14.88) 457 (18.00) 460 (18.11) 6.6 (0.26) 302 (11.87)

300 mm PN 25 327 (12.86) 395 (15.55) 457 (18.00) 485 (19.09) 6.6 (0.26) 302 (11.87)

300 mm PN 40 327 (12.86) 410 (16.14) 512 (20.14) 515 (20.28) 6.6 (0.26) 292 (11.48)

350 mm PN 10 354 (13.92) 430 (16.93) 534 (21.03) 505 (19.88) 7.4 (0.19) 334 (13.16)

350 mm PN 16 354 (13.92) 438 (17.24) 534 (21.03) 520 (20.47) 7.4 (0.19) 334 (13.16)

350 mm PN 25 354 (13.92) 450 (17.72) 534 (21.03) 555 (21.85) 7.4 (0.19) 334 (13.16)

350 mm PN 40 354 (13.92) 465 (18.31) 591 (23.25) 580 (22.83) 7.4 (0.19) 12.79 (325)

400 mm PN 10 379 (14.93) 482 (18.98) 610 (24.00) 565 (22.24) 7.4 (0.19) 384 (15.12)

400 mm PN 16 379 (14.93) 490 (19.29) 610 (24.00) 580 (22.83) 7.4 (0.19) 384 (15.12)

400 mm PN 25 379 (14.93) 505 (19.88) 610 (24.00) 620 (24.41) 7.4 (0.19) 384 (15.12)

400 mm PN 40 379 (14.93) 535 (21.06) 667 (26.25) 660 (25.98) 7.4 (0.19) 375 (14.75)

500 mm PN 10 437 (17.20) 585 (23.03) 762 (30.00) 670 (26.38) 7.4 (0.19) 482 (18.96)

500 mm PN 16 437 (17.20) 610 (24.02) 762 (30.00) 715 (28.15) 7.4 (0.19) 482 (18.96)

500 mm PN 25 437 (17.20) 615 (24.21) 762 (30.00) 730 (28.74) 7.4 (0.19) 482 (18.96)

500 mm PN 40 437 (17.20) 615 (24.21) 845 (33.25) 755 (29.72) 7.4 (0.19) 463 (18.21)

600 mm PN 10 495 (19.48) 685 (26.97) 914 (36.00) 780 (30.71) 7.4 (0.19) 583 (22.94)

600 mm PN 16 495 (19.48) 725 (28.54) 914 (36.00) 840 (33.07)) 7.4 (0.19) 583 (22.94)

600 mm PN 25 495 (19.48) 720 (28.35) 914 (36.00) 845 (33.27) 7.4 (0.19) 581 (22.87)

Dimensions with DIN Flanges

(1) Consult factory for larger line sizes.(2) When 2 grounding rings are specified, add 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) for 15 mm through 350 mm (½- through 14 in.) flowtube sensors or 12.7 mm (0.50 in.) for

400 mm (16 in.) and larger. When lining protectors are specified, add 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) for 15 mm through 300 mm (½- through 12-in.) flowtube sensors, 12.7 mm (0.50 in.) for 350 mm through 900 mm (14- through 36-in.) flowtube sensors.

A-36



FIGURE 4. Rosemount 8711 Dimensional Drawings (0.15-inch through 1-inch line sizes)

A

B”

Flow

5.00

(127)

D

Grounding

Clamp1/2–14 NPT

ConduitConnection

(2 places)

C

NOTE

Dimensions are in

inches (millimeters)

See Table 10 for

variable dimensions

2.6

(66)

1.8

(46)

4.02 (102)

FIGURE 5. Rosemount 8711 Dimensional Drawings (1.5-inch through 8-inch line sizes)

B

A

2.6

(66)

1.8

(46)

4.02 (102) 5.00 (127)

NOTE


See Table 10 for variable dimensions

Flow

D

Grounding

Clamp

C

1/2–14 NPT

Conduit

Connection

(2 places)

A-37



FIGURE 6. Dimensional Drawings of Rosemount 8721 Flowtube Sensors Typical of 1 through 4inch (25 through 100mm) line sizes.

TABLE 10. Rosemount 8711 Flowtube Sensor Dimensions and Weight

Nominal

Line Size

Inches (mm)

Flowtube Sensor Housing Dimensions Flowtube Sensor

Length

“D” Inside Diameter

Weight

lb (kg)“A” Max. “B” “C”

0.15(1)

0.30(1)

(4)

(8)

4.00

4.00

(102)

(102)

5.44

5.44

(138)

(138)

3.56

3.56

(90)

(90)

2.17

2.17

(55)

(55)

.150

.300

(4)

(7)

4

4

(2)

(2)

0.5

1

1.5

(15)

(25)

(40)

4.00

4.31

4.42

(102)

(109)

(112)

5.44

6.06

7.41

(138)

(154)

(188)

3.56

4.50

3.28

(90)

(114)

(83)

2.17

2.17

2.73

(55)

(55)

(69)

.593

.970

1.50

(15)

(24)

(38)

4

5

5

(2)

(2)

(2)

2

3

4

(50)

(80)

(100)

4.64

5.26

5.87

(118)

(134)

(149)

7.94

9.19

10.41

(202)

(233)

(264)

3.91

5.16

6.38

(99)

(131)

(162)

3.26

4.68

5.88

(83)

(119)

(149)

1.92

2.79

3.70

(50)

(76)

(99)

7

13

22

(3)

(6)

(10)

6

8

(150)

(200)

6.97

8.00

(177)

(2003)

12.60

14.66

(320)

(372)

8.56

10.63

(217)

(270)

6.87

8.86

(174)

(225)

5.825

7.875

(148)

(200)

35

60

(16)

(27)

(1) 0.15 and 0.30 inch (4 and 8 mm) flowtube sensors mount between ½-inch (13 mm) flange.

4.02 (102)

2.00 (50.8)

1.8

(46)2.6

(66)

C

BA

1/2-14NPT Conduit

Connections

5.00 (127)

Grounding Clamp

D

E

IDF Code B

TABLE 11. Rosemount 8721 Dimensions in Inches (Millimeters). Refer to Dimensional Drawing Figure 1.

Line Size

Flowtube Sensor

Dimensions A Body Diameter B

Flowtube Sensor Height

C Body Length D IDF Length E

1/2 (15) 0.62 (15.8) 2.87 (73.0) 5.51 (140.0) 2.13 (54.0) 3.66 (93.0)

1 (25) 0.87 (22.2) 2.87 (73.0) 5.51 (140.0) 2.13 (54.0) 3.66 (93.0)

11/2 (40) 1.37 (34.9) 3.50 (88.9) 6.14 (155.9) 2.40 (61.0) 3.96 (100.5)

2 (50) 1.87 (47.6) 4.00 (101.5) 6.63 (168.5) 2.83 (72.0) 4.41 (112.0)

21/2 (65) 2.38 (60.3) 4.53 (115.0) 7.17 (182.0) 3.58 (91.0) 5.23 (133.0)

3 (80) 2.87 (73.0) 5.57 (141.5) 8.21 (208.5) 4.41 (112.0) 5.98 (152.0)

4 (100) 3.84 (97.6) 6.98 (177.0) 9.61 (244.0) 5.20 (132.0) 6.77 (172.0)

A-38



Figure A-10. Dimensional Drawings of Rosemount 8721 Flowtube Sensors Typical of 1 through 4inch (25 through 100mm) line sizes

F

JK

Weld Nipple Option

G

NOTE


Tri-Clamp

TABLE 12. Rosemount 8721 Process Connection Lay Length in Inches (Millimeters).

Refer to Figure A-6.

Line Size

Weld Nipple

Length F

Weld Nipple

Tube ID J

Weld Nipple

Tube OD K

Tri Clamp

Length G

1/2 (15) 5.61 (142) 0.62 (15.75) 0.75 (19.05) 8.31 (211)

1 (25) 5.61 (142) 0.87 (22.2) 1.00 (25.65) 7.85 (199)

11/2 (40) 5.92 (150) 1.37 (34.9) 1.68 (42.7) 8.17 (207)

2 (50) 6.35 (161) 1.87 (47.6) 2.01 (51.05) 8.60 (218)

21/2 (65) 7.18 (182) 2.37 (60.3) 2.51 (63.75) 9.43 (239)

3 (80) 7.93 (201) 2.87 (73.0) 3.01 (76.45) 10.18 (258)

4 (100) 9.46 (240) 3.84 (97.6) 4.01 (101.85) 11.70 (297)

A-39



NOTEThe Rosemount 8732E Connector Type is compatible with the Rosemount 8742.

MAGNETIC FLOWMETER SIZING

Flowmeter Sizing

Because of its effect on flow velocity, flowtube sensor size is an important

consideration. It may be necessary to select a magnetic flowmeter that is

larger or smaller than the adjacent piping to ensure the fluid velocity is in the

specified measuring range of the flowtube sensor. Suggested guidelines and

examples for sizing normal velocities in different applications are listed in

Table 13, Table 14, and Table 15. Operation outside these guidelines may

also give acceptable performance.

To convert flow rate to velocity, use the appropriate factor listed in Table 13

and the following equation:

FIGURE 7. Rosemount 8714D Calibration Standard

2.69

(68.3)

4.13

(104.9)

7.19

(182.6)

Rosemount 8732E

Connector Type

Rosemount 8712D Connector Type

Note:

The Rosemount 8714D is shipped with

both the 8712D and 8732E Connector

Types

TABLE 13. Sizing Guidelines

Application Velocity Range (ft/s)

Velocity Range

(m/s)

Normal Service 2–20 0.6–6.1

Abrasive Slurries 3–10 0.9–3.1

Non-Abrasive

Slurries

5–15 1.5–4.6

A-40



Example: SI Units

Magmeter Size: 100 mm (factor from Table 14 = 492.0)

Normal Flow Rate: 800 L/min

Example: English Units

Magmeter Size: 4 inch (factor from Table 14 = 39.679)

Normal Flow Rate: 300 GPM

TABLE 14. Line Size vs. Conversion Factor

Nominal Line Size

Inches (mm)

Gallons Per Minute

Factor

Liters Per

Minute Factor

0.15 (4) 0.055 0.683

0.30 (8) 0.220 2.732

½ (15) 0.947 11.745

1 (25) 2.693 33.407

1½ (40) 6.345 78.69

2 (50) 10.459 129.7

3 (80) 23.042 285.7

4 (100) 39.679 492.0

6 (150) 90.048 1,116

8 (200) 155.94 1,933

10 (250) 245.78 3,048

12 (300) 352.51 4,371

14 (350) 421.70 5,229

16 (400) 550.80 6,830

18 (450) 697.19 8,645

20 (500) 866.51 10,745

24 (600) 1,253.2 15,541

30 (750) 2,006.0 24,877

36 (900) 2,935.0 36,398

Velocity =Flow Rate

Factor

Velocity =

Velocity = 1.7 m/s

800 (L/min)

492.0

Velocity =

Velocity = 7.56 ft/s

300 (gpm)

39.679

A-41



Upstream/Downstream Piping Length

To ensure specification accuracy over widely varying process conditions,

install the flowtube sensor with a minimum of five straight pipe diameters

upstream and two straight pipe diameters downstream from the electrode

plane. See Figure 8. This procedure should adequately allow for disturbances

created by elbows, valves, and reducers.

FIGURE 8. Upstream and Downstream Straight Pipe Diameters

Flowtube Sensor Grounding

A reliable ground path is required between the flowtube sensor and the

process fluid. Optional grounding rings, grounding electrodes, and lining

protectors are available with 8700 Series flowtube sensors to ensure proper

grounding. See Table 22 and Table 8.

TABLE 15. Line Size vs. Velocity/Rate

Nominal

Line Size in

Inches

(mm)

Minimum/Maximum Flow Rate

Gallons per Minute Liters per Minute

at 0.04 ft/s

(Low-flow

Cutoff)

at 1 ft/s

(Min Range

Setting) at 3 ft/s

at 30 ft/s

(Max Range

Setting)

at 0.012 m/s

(Low-flow

Cutoff)

at 0.3 m/s

(Min Range

Setting) at 1 m/s

at 10 m/s

(Max Range

Setting)

.15 (4) 0.002 0.055 0.16 1.65 0.01 0.21 0.68 6.83

.30 (8) 0.009 0.220 0.66 6.60 0.03 0.83 2.73 27.321/2 (15) 0.038 0.947 2.84 28.412 0.14 3.58 11.74 117.45

1 (25) 0.108 2.694 8.08 80.813 0.41 10.18 33.40 334.07

11/2 (40) 0.254 6.345 19.03 190.36 0.96 23.98 78.69 786.9

2 (50) 0.418 10.459 31.37 313.77 1.58 39.54 129.7 1,297

3 (80) 0.922 23.042 69.12 691.26 3.49 87.10 285.7 2,857

4 (100) 1.588 36.679 119.0 1,190.4 6.00 138.6 492.0 4,920

6 (150) 3.600 90.048 270.1 2,701.4 13.61 340.3 1,116 11,167

8 (200) 6.240 155.94 467.7 4,677.8 23.59 589.4 1,933 19,337

10 (250) 9.840 245.78 737.3 7,373.4 37.20 929.0 3,048 30,480

12 (300) 14.200 352.51 1,059 10,575 53.68 1,332 4,371 43,715

14 (350) 16.800 421.70 1,265 12,651 63.50 1,594 5,230 52,296

16 (400) 22.000 550.80 1,652 16,524 83.16 2,082 6,830 68,304

18 (450) 27.800 697.19 2,091 20,916 105.0 2,635 8,646 86,459

20 (500) 34.600 866.51 2,599 25,995 130.7 3,275 10,740 107,457

24 (600) 50.200 1,253.2 3,759 37,596 189.7 4,737 15,540 155,414

30 (750) 80.200 2,006.0 6,018 60,180 303.1 7,582 24,880 248,773

36 (900) 117.40 2,935.0 8,805 88,050 443.7 11,094 36,390 363,983

Flow

5 Pipe Diameters 2 Pipe Diameters

A-42



PRODUCT SELECTION GUIDE

Several flowtube sensor types, liner types, electrode materials, electrode types, grounding options, and transmitters are available for the Rosemount 8700 Series Magnetic Flowmeter System to ensure compatibility with virtually any application and installation. See Table 17 for information on liner types, Table 18 for information on electrodes materials and electrode types, Table 19 and Table 20 for grounding options and installation, and Table 21 for transmitter selection. Other material options not mentioned here are available. Contact your local sales representative for alternative material selection. For further guidance on selecting materials, refer to the Magnetic Flowmeter Material Selection Guide located on Rosemount.com (Technical Data Sheet Number 00816-0100-3033). For more information regarding product offering and ordering information, refer to “Ordering Information” on page A-48 in this product data sheet.

TABLE 16. Flowtube Sensor Selection

Flowtube

Sensor General Characteristics

8705 • Standard Process Flowtube Sensor

• Flanged Process Connections

• Welded, sealed coil housing

• 1/2-inch (15mm) to 36-inch (900mm)

• Pulse DC Technology

• Standard, grounding, and bulletnose

8707 • High Signal Flowtube Sensor

• Flanged Process System Flowtube Sensor

• Welded, sealed coil housing

• 3-inch (80mm) to 36-inch (900mm)

• High current pulsed DC technology ideal for

high noise applications


electrodes available

8711 • Wafer (flangeless) design

• Economical, compact, and lightweight

alternative to flanged flowtube sensors

• 0.15-inch (4mm) to 8-inch (200mm)

• Pulsed DC technology


electrodes available

8721 • Hygienic flowtube sensor

• Designed for food, beverage, and

pharmaceutical applications

• 3-A and EHEDG certified

• 1/2-inch (15mm) to 4-inch (100mm)

• Pulsed DC technology

• Variety of industry standard process

connections

• Suitable for CIP/SIP

A-43



TABLE 17. Lining Material Selection

Liner Material General Characteristics

PFA • Best chemical resistance

• Better abrasion resistance than Teflon

(PTFE)

• Best high temperature capabilities

• -20 to 350°F (-29 to 177 °C)

Teflon (PTFE) • Highly chemical resistant

• Excellent high temperature capabilities

• -20 to 350°F (-29 to 177 °C)

Tefzel (ETFE) • Excellent chemical resistance

• Better abrasion resistance than Teflon

(PTFE)

• -20 to 300°F (-29 to 149 °C)

Polyurethane • Excellent abrasion resistance for small and

medium particles

• Limited chemical resistance

• 0 to 140°F (-18 to 60 °C)

• Typically applied in clean water

Neoprene • Very good abrasion resistance for small

and medium particles

• Better chemical resistance than

polyurethane

• 0 to 185°F (-18 to 85 °C)

• Typically applied in water with chemicals,

and sea water

Linatex Rubber • Very good abrasion resistance for large

particles

• Limited chemical resistance especially in

acids

• Softer material than polyurethane and

neoprene

• 0 to 158°F (-18 to 70 °C)

• Typically applied in mining slurries

A-44



TABLE 18. Electrode Selection

Electrode Material General Characteristics

316L Stainless Steel • Good corrosion resistance

• Good abrasion resistance

• Not recommended for sulfuric or

hydrochloric acids

Hastelloy C-276 • Better corrosion resistance

• High strength

• Good in slurry applications

• Effective in oxidizing fluids

Tantalum • Excellent corrosion resistance

• Not recommended for hydrofluoric

acid, fluosolic acid, or sodium

hydroxide

80% Platinum • Best chemical resistance

• Expensive material

• not recommended for aquaregia

Titanium • Better chemical resistance

• Better abrasion resistance

• Good for sea water applications

• Not recommended for hydrofluoric or

sulfuric acid

Electrode Type General Characteristics

Standard

Measurement• Lowest cost

• Good for most applications

Standard

Measurement +

Grounding (Also see

Table 22 and

Table 20 for

grounding options

and installation

• Low cost grounding option especially

for large line sizes

• Minimum conductivity of 100

microsiemens/cm

• Not recommended for electrolysis or

galvanic corrosion applications

Bulletnose • Slightly more expensive

• Best option for coating processes

A-45



TABLE 19. Grounding Options

Grounding Options General Characteristics

No Grounding Options

(grounding straps)• Acceptable for conductive unlined

pipe

• Grounding straps provided at no cost

by Emerson Process Management,

Inc.

Grounding Electrodes • Same material as measurement

electrodes

• Sufficient grounding option when

process fluid conductivity is greater

than 100 microsiemens/cm

• Not recommended in electrolysis or

galvanic corrosion applications

Grounding Rings • Low conductivity process fluids

• Cathodic or electrolysis applications

that may have stray currents in or

around the process

• Variety of materials for process fluid

compatibility

Lining Protectors • Protect upstream edge of flowtube

sensor from abrasive fluids

• Permanently installed on flowtube

sensor

• Protect liner material from over

torquing of flange bolts

• Provide ground path and eliminate

need for grounding rings or

grounding electrode

A-46



TABLE 20. Grounding Installation

TABLE 21. Transmitter Selection

Type of Pipe

Grounding Options

No Grounding Option (Straps Only)

Grounding

Rings Grounding Electrode Lining Protectors

Conductive Unlined Pipe Acceptable Not Required Not Required Acceptable (Not Required)

Conductive Lined Pipe Not Acceptable Acceptable Acceptable Acceptable

Non-Conductive Pipe Not Acceptable Acceptable Acceptable Acceptable

Transmitter General Characteristics

8732E • Ideal for integral mount transmitter installations

• Advanced Diagnostics (DA1 and DA2 Suites)

available

• Optical Switch LOI

• Optional DI/DO available

8712D • Remote mount transmitter

• Easy to use LOI with dedicated configuration

buttons

• Advanced Diagnostics (DA1 Suite) available

8712H • Remote mount transmitter

• High-Signal Pulsed DC for use with the

High-Signal 8707 Flowtube Sensor

• Ideal for noisy applications - mining/pulp

stock/other slurries

• 115 V AC power only

8742C • FOUNDATION fieldbus transmitter

• Integral or remote mount

• Advanced Diagnostics (D01 Suite) available

A-47



ORDERING INFORMATION

ROSEMOUNT 8732E ORDERING INFORMATIONModel Product Description

8732E Magnetic Flowmeter Transmitter

Code Transmitter Style

S Standard

Code Transmitter Mount

T Integral Mount

R Remote Mount

Code Transmitter Power Supply

1 AC Power Supply (90 to 250 V AC, 50-60Hz)

2 DC Power Supply (12 to 42 V DC)

Code Outputs

A 4-20 mA Digital Electronics (HART Protocol)

B 4-20 mA Digital Electronics (HART Protocol) with Intrinsically Safe Output(1)

Code Conduit Entry

2 Conduits

1 1/2 - 14 NPT, 2 Conduit Entries

2 CM20, 2 Conduit Entries(2)

3 PG 13.5, 2 Conduit Entries(2)

3 Conduits

4 1/2 - 14 NPT, 3 Conduit Entries

5 CM20, 3 Conduit Entries(2)

6 PG 13.5, 3 Conduit Entries(2)

Code Safety Approvals(3)

NA No Safety Approval

FM & CSA

N0 FM Class 1 Div 2 for non-flammable: CSA Class 1 Div 2 (Pending)

N5 FM Class 1 Div 2 for flammable fluids (Pending)

E5 FM Class 1 Div 1, explosion-proof (Pending)

ATEX

E1 ATEX flameproof Ex de IIC, and ATEX Dust Approval (Pending)

ED ATEX flameproof Ex de IIB T6, and ATEX Dust Approval (Pending)

N1 ATEX Type n Ex nAnL IIC and ATEX Dust Approval(4) (Pending)

ND ATEX Dust Approval (Pending)

IECEx

E7 IECEx flameproof Ex de IIC, and IECEx Dust Approval (Pending)

EF IECEx flameproof Ex de IIB T6, and IECEx Dust Approval (Pending)

N7 IECEx Type n Ex nAnL IIC and IECEx Dust Approval(4) (Pending)

NF IECEx Dust Approval (Pending)

Russian GOST

EM Russian GOST flameproof 1 Ex d IIBT6x (Pending)

NEPSI (China)

E3 NEPSI flameproof approval (Pending)

INMETRO (Brazil)

E2 INMETRO flameproof EX de IIC (Pending)

Continued On Next Page

A-48



Code Options

PlantWeb Product/Process Diagnostics

DA1 Magmeter HART Diagnostic Suite 1: Includes High Process Noise and Ground/Wiring Fault Detection

DA2 Magmeter HART Diagnostic Suite 2: Includes 8714i Calibration Verification

Discrete Input/Discrete Output

AX DI/DO

Other Options

C1 Custom Configuration (CDS Required)

D1 High Accuracy Calibration (0.15% of rate for matched tube and transmitter)(5)

DT Heavy Duty Tagging

M4 Local Operator Interface

GE M12, 4-Pin, Male Connector (Eurofast)

GM A Size Mini, 4-Pin, Male Connector (Minifast)

GT Description TBD - Male Connector (Minifast)

C4 Analog Output Levels Compliant with NAMUR Recommendations NE43, 18-January-1994, and High Alarm Level

CN Analog Output Levels Compliant with NAMUR Recommendations NE43, 18-January-1994, and Low Alarm Level

QIG Language

YA Danish

YD Dutch

YF French

YG German

YH Finnish

YI Italian

YN Norwegian

YP Portuguese

YS Spanish

YR Russian

YW Swedish

Typical Model Number: 8732E S T 1 A 1 N0 DA1 M4

(1) I.S. Output is externally powered standard, Option Code PS must be called out for internally powered I.S. Output(2) Adapter are used for this conduit entry type(3) All product, ordered with or without Safety approvals, is compliant with local CE Marking and C-tick requirements unless specifically noted as a special(4) For DC Transmitter Power Supply (Code = 2) Only(5) D1 Option Code must be ordered with flowtube sensor and transmitter

A-49



ROSEMOUNT 8712D ORDERING INFORMATION

Model Product Description

8712D Magnetic Flowmeter Transmitter


R Remote (2-inch pipe or surface mounting)

Code Power Supply Voltage

03 12–42 V dc

12 90-250 V ac, 50–60 Hz

Code Product Certifications

N0 Factory Mutual (FM) Class I, Division 2 Approval for nonflammable fluids;

Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Class I, Division 2 Approval; CE Marking

NA No Hazardous Area Approval; CE Marking

N5 Factory Mutual (FM) Class I, Division 2 Approval for flammable fluids

Code Options

DA1 Magmeter HART Diagnostic Suite 1: Includes High Process Noise, Ground/Wiring Fault Detection, and Transmitter Verification

B6 Stainless Steel 4-bolt Kit for 2-inch Pipe Mount

C1 Custom Configuration (Completed CDS required with order)

C4 Analog Output Levels Compliant with NAMUR recommendations NE43, 18-January-1994, and high alarm level(1)

(1) NAMUR compliant operation and the Alarm latch options are preset at the factory and can not be changed to standard operation in the field

CN Analog Output Levels Compliant with NAMUR recommendations NE43, 18-January-1994,and low alarm level(1)


(2) D1 Option Code must be ordered with flowtube sensor and transmitter

M4 Local Operator Interface (LOI)

J1 CM 20 conduit adapter

J2 PG 13.5 conduit adapter

Code Quick Installation Guide (QIG) Language Options (Default is English)

YA Danish QIG

YD Dutch QIG

YF French QIG

YG German QIG

YH Finnish QIG

YI Italian QIG

YN Norwegian QIG

YP Portuguese QIG

YS Spanish QIG

YW Swedish QIG

Typical Model Number: 8712D R 12 N 0 M 4

A-50



ROSEMOUNT 8712H ORDERING INFORMATIONModel Product Description

8712H High-Signal Magnetic Flowmeter Transmitter (For use with 8707 High-Signal Flowtube Sensor only.)


R Remote (2-inch pipe or surface mounting)


12 115 V ac, 50–60 Hz


N0 Factory Mutual (FM) Class I, Division 2 Approval for nonflammable fluids;

Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Class I, Division 2 Approval

N5 Factory Mutual (FM) Class I, Division 2 Approval for flammable fluids

Code Options

B6 Stainless Steel 4-bolt Kit for 2-inch Pipe Mount

C1 Custom Configuration (Completed CDS required with order)

D1 High Accuracy Calibration [0.25% of rate from 3 to 30 ft/s (0.9 to 10 m/s)] matched flowtube sensor and transmitter system(1)

(1) D1 Option Code must be selected for both flowtube sensor and transmitter.

M4 Local Operator Interface (LOI)


YA Danish QIG

YD Dutch QIG

YF French QIG

YG German QIG

YH Finnish QIG

YI Italian QIG

YN Norwegian QIG

YP Portuguese QIG

YS Spanish QIG

YW Swedish QIG

Typical Model Number: 8712H R 12 N 0 M 4

A-51



ROSEMOUNT 8742C ORDERING INFORMATION Model Product Description

8742C Magnetic Flowmeter Transmitter with FOUNDATION fieldbus (flowtube sensor ordered separately)

Code Transmitter Output

F FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol, comes with standard Analog Input Integrator Function block and Backup LAS


AC 90–250 V ac, 50–60 Hz

DC 15-50 V dc


N0 Factory Mutual (FM) Class I, Division 2, Class II/III Division 1, approval for nonflammable fluids;

Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Class I, Division 2 Approval

CE Marking;

NA No Hazardous Area Approval; CE Marking

N5 Factory Mutual (FM) Class I, Division 2, Class II/III Division 1, approval for flammable fluids

E1 ATEX EEx d IIB + H2 T6, Flameproof Approval for Hydrogen gas

E5(1) Factory Mutual (FM) Class I, Division 1, Class II/III Division 1, explosion proof approval

ED ATEX EEx d IIB T6, Flame-proof approval

K0 Factory Mutual (FM) Class I, Division 2, Class II/III Division 1, approval and

Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Class 1, Division 2,

Class II/III Division 1 with intrinsically safe fieldbus output

K1 ATEX EEx de [ia] IIB + H2 T6

flameproof approval for hydrogen gas with intrinsically safe fieldbus output and FISCO compliant

K5(1) Factory Mutual (FM) Class I, Division 1, Explosion Proof with intrinsically safe Fieldbus and FISCO output

KD ATEX EEx d [ia] IIB T6, Flame-proof approval with intrinsically safe Fieldbus output and FISCO compliant

Code Options

PlantWeb Software Functions

D01 Product and process diagnostics: grounding/wiring diagnostic, electrode fault diagnostic,

and high process noise detection(2)

D11 Product diagnostic: grounding/wiring diagnostic and electrode fault diagnostic(2)

D21 Process diagnostic: high process noise detection(2)

Transmitter Options

B4 Remote Mount for 2” Pipe Mount Bracket (transmitter junction box and mounting bracket included)

C1 Custom Configuration (completed configuration data sheet (CDS) required with order)



J1 CM 20 Conduit Adapter

J2 PG 13.5 Conduit Adapter

M5 Local Display

Conduit Electrical Connector

GE(4) M12, 4-pin, Male Connector (eurofast®)

GM(4) A size Mini, 4-pin, Male Connector (minifast®)

GN(4) GM with EEx d

Continued on Next Page

A-52




YA Danish QIG

YD Dutch QIG

YF French QIG

YG German QIG

YH Finnish QIG

YI Italian QIG

YN Norwegian QIG

YP Portuguese QIG

YS Spanish QIG

YW Swedish QIG

Typical Model Number: 8742C F AC N 0 D 0 1

(1) Only available with Rosemount 8711 Integral Mount flowtube sensor(2) Only one diagnostic selection can be specified for the 8742C transmitter.(3) D1 Option Code must be ordered with flowtube sensor and transmitter(4) Not available with certain hazardous location certifications. Contact a Rosemount representative for details

A-53



ROSEMOUNT 8705 ORDERING INFORMATIONCode Product Description Availability

8705 Magnetic Flowmeter Flowtube Sensor •

Code Lining Material

A PFA •

T Teflon (PTFE) •

F Tefzel (ETFE) •

P Polyurethane •

N Neoprene •

L Linatex •

Code Electrode Material

S 316L Stainless Steel •

H Hastelloy C-276 •

T Tantalum •

P Plantinum Iridium •

N Titanium •

Electrode Material (From Above)

Code Electrode Type Code S Code H Code T Code P Code N

A 2 Electrodes - Standard • • • • •

B 2 Electrodes - Bullet Nose • •

E 3rd Grounding Electrode • • • • •

Lining Material (From Above)

Code Line Size Code A Code T Code F Code P

Code

N and L

005 1/2 in • • • NA NA

010 1 in • • • • •

015 1 1/2 in • • • • •

020 2 in. • • • • •

030 3 in. • • • • •

040 4 in. • • • • •

060 6 in. • • • • •

080 8 in. • • • • •

100 10 in. • • • • •

120 12 in. • • • • •

140 14 in NA • • • •

160 16 in. NA • • • •

180 18 in NA • NA • •

200 20 in NA • NA • •

240 24 in NA • NA • •

300 30 in NA • NA • •

360 36 in NA • NA • •


A-54



Code Flange Material

C Carbon Steel

S Stainless Steel (304)

P Stainless Steel (316)

Code Flange Type and Rating Availability

1 ASME B16.5 (ANSI) RF Class 150

Refer to Table 22 on page A-57

for Flange Material Code C


for Flange Material Codes S and P

2 MSS SP44 Class 150


6 ASME B16.5 (ANSI) RF Class 600 (Maximum Pressure: 1000 psig)(1)

7 ASME B16.5 (ANSI) RF Class 600(2)

9 ASME B16.5 (ANSI) RF Class 900(2)(3)

D DIN PN 10


for Flange Material Code C and S

(Not available with Flange Material Code P)

E DIN PN 16

F DIN PN 25

H DIN PN 40

K AS2129 Table D(4)

L AS2129 Table E(4)

M ASME B16.5 (ANSI) RF Class 1500(5) Refer to Table 22 for Flange Material Code C

Refer to Table 23 for Flange Material Code SN ASME B16.5 (ANSI) RF Class 2500(5)

Code Electrode Housing Configuration

W0 Sealed, Welded Housing

W1 Sealed, Welded Housing with Pressure Relief

W3 Sealed, Welded Housing with Separate Electrode Compartments

Code Hazardous Area Approvals

NA No Hazardous Area Approval Required; CE Marking

FM & CSA

N0 FM Class 1 Div 2 for Non-Flammable fluids; CSA Class 1 Div 2

N5 FM Class 1 Div 2 for Flammable fluids

E5 FM Class 1 Div 1, Explosion Proof

ATEX

E1 ATEX Ex e ia IIC T3… T6, Increased Safety Approval (with I.S. electrodes)

KD ATEX Ex e ia IIB T3… T6, Increased Safety Approval (with I.S. electrodes)

N1 ATEX Ex nA [L] IIC Type n Approval

ND ATEX Dust Approval

IECEx

E7 IECEx Ex e ia IIC T3… T6, Increased Safety Approval (with I.S. electrodes)

KF IECEx Ex e ia IIB T3… T6, Increased Safety Approval (with I.S. electrodes)

N7 IECEx Ex nA [L] IIC Type n Approval

NF IECEx Dust Approval


Code Options

Certifications

PD PED Certification

CR CRN Certification

DW NSF Drinking Water Certification(6)

Optional Grounding Rings(7)

G1 (2) 316L SST Ground Rings

G2 (2) Hastelloy C-276 Ground Rings(8)

G3 (2) Titanium Ground Rings(8)

G4 (2) Tantalum Ground Rings(9)




A-55




Optional Lining Protectors(7)

L1 (2) Hastelloy C-276 Ground Rings

L2 (2) Titanium Ground Rings(8)

L3 (2) Tantalum Ground Rings(8)

H1 Lay-length matching 8701 using spool piece(8)

H2 Lay-length matching 8701(10)

H5 Lay-length matching Foxboro 2800 using spool piece(11)

H7 Lay-length ABB CopaX and MagX using spool piece(8)

Other Options

B3 Integral Mount with 8732 and 8742



Q4 Calibration Certificate per ISO 10474 3.1B

Q8 Material Traceability 3.1B

Q9 Material Traceability Electrode only 3.1B

Q66 Welding Procedure Qualification Record Documentation

Q67 Welding Performance Qualification Record Documentation

Q70 Weld Examination Inspection Certificate, ISO 10474 3.1B

Typical Model Number: 8705 T SA 040 C1 W0 N0

$293116

283

(1) Electrode type options limited to two measurement electrodes or two measurement electrodes + third grounding electrode(2) Electrode type options limited to two measurement electrodes only(3) Lining protectors not available(4) Liner material options limited to T, P, or F; cannot be ordered with ground rings, lining protectors, or H(x) options(5) Liner material options limited to P only; Electrode material options limited to S and H; Electrode type options limited to two measurement electrodes or two

measurement electrodes + third grounding electrode; Electrode housing type limited to W1 only; cannot be ordered with ground rings, lining protectors, or H(x) options

(6) Only available with PTFE (Teflon) or Polyurethane Liner Material with 316L SST Electrode Material(7) Grounding Rings and Lining Protectors provide the same fluid grounding function. Lining Protectors available in PTFE (Teflon) and ETFE (Tefzel) only(8) Available in flowtube sensor line sizes 0.5 through 12 in. (15 through 300 mm) (9) Available in flowtube sensor line sizes 0.5 through 8 in. (15 through 200 mm) (10) Available in flowtube sensor line sizes 0.5 through 16 in. (15 through 400 mm)(11) Available in flowtube sensor line sizes 3 through 18 in. (80 through 450 mm)(12) D1 Option Code must be ordered with flowtube sensor and transmitter

A-56



TABLE 22. Rosemount 8705 Carbon Steel ASME B16.5 (ANSI) Flange Rating Availability

TABLE 23. Rosemount 8705 Stainless Steel ASME B16.5 (ANSI) Flange Rating Availability

Line Size

Code

Line Size

Inches

(mm)

Class 150

(C1)

Class 150

(C2)

Class 300

(C3)

Class 600

(C6)

Class 600

(C7)

Class 900

(C9)

Class 1500

(CM)

Class 2500

(CN)

005 0.5 (15) • NA • • NA NA NA NA

010 1 (25) • NA • • NA • • •

015 1.5 (40) • NA • • • • • •

020 2 (50) • NA • • • • • •

030 3 (80) • NA • • • • • •

040 4 (100) • NA • • • • • •

060 6 (150) • NA • • • • • •

080 8 (200) • NA • • • • • •

100 10 (250) • NA • • NA NA • •

120 12 (300) • NA • NA NA NA • •

140 14 (350) • NA • NA NA NA NA NA

160 16 (400) • NA • NA NA NA NA NA

180 18 (450) • NA • NA NA NA NA NA

200 20 (500) • NA • NA NA NA NA NA

240 24 (600) • NA • NA NA NA NA NA

300(1)

(1) AWWA C207 Table 2 Class D Flat Face Flange for option C1 Only

30 (750) • • NA NA NA NA NA NA

360(1) 36 (900) • NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

Line

Size

Code

Line Size

Inches

(mm)

Class 150

(S1)

Class 300

(S3)

Class 600

(S6)

Class 600

(S7)

Class 900

(S9)

Class 1500

(SM)

Class 2500

(SN)

Class 150

(P1)

Class 300

(P3)

005 0.5 (15) • • • NA NA NA NA • •

010 1 (25) • • • NA • • • • •

015 1.5 (40) • • • • • • • • •

020 2 (50) • • • • • • • • •

030 3 (80) • • • • • • • • •

040 4 (100) • • • • • • • • •

060 6 (150) • • • • • • • • •

080 8 (200) • • • • • • • • •

100 10 (250) • • • NA NA • • • •

120 12 (300) • • NA NA NA • • • •

140 14 (350) • • NA NA NA NA NA • •

160 16 (400) • • NA NA NA NA NA • •

180 18 (450) • • NA NA NA NA NA • •

200 20 (500) • • NA NA NA NA NA • •

240 24 (600) • • NA NA NA NA NA • •

300(1)


30 (750) • NA NA NA NA NA NA • NA

360(1) 36 (900) • NA NA NA NA NA NA • NA

A-57



TABLE 24. Rosemount 8705 DIN Flange Rating Availability

Line

Size

Code

Line Size

Inches

(mm)

Carbon

Steel

PN 10

(CD)

Carbon

Steel

PN 16

(CE)

Carbon

Steel

PN 25

(CF)

Carbon

Steel

PN 40

(CH)

Carbon

Steel

Table D

(CK)

Carbon

Steel

Table E

(CL)

Stainless

Steel

PN 10

(SD)

Stainless

Steel

PN 16

(SE)

Stainless

Steel

PN 25

(SF)

Stainless

Steel

PN 40

(SH)

005 0.5 (15) NA NA NA • • • NA NA NA •

010 1 (25) NA NA NA • • • NA NA NA •

015 1.5 (40) NA NA NA • • • NA NA NA •

020 2 (50) NA NA NA • • • NA NA NA •

030 3 (80) NA NA NA • • • NA NA NA •

040 4 (100) NA • NA • • • NA • NA •

060 6 (150) NA • NA • • • NA • NA •

080 8 (200) • • • • • • • • • •

100 10 (250) • • • • • • • • • •

120 12 (300) • • • • • • • • • •

140 14 (350) • • • • • • • CF CF CF

160 16 (400) • • • • • • • CF CF CF

180 18 (450) • • • • • • • CF CF CF

200 20 (500) • • • • • • • CF CF CF

240 24 (600) • • • • • CF • CF CF CF

A-58



A-59

ROSEMOUNT 8707 ORDERING INFORMATIONCode Product Description Availability

8707 High-Signal Magnetic Flowmeter Flowtube Sensor •


A PFA •

T Teflon (PTFE) •

F Tefzel (ETFE) •

P Polyurethane •

N Neoprene •

L Linatex •


S 316L Stainless Steel •

H Hastelloy C-276 •

T Tantalum •

P Plantinum Iridium •

N Titanium •

Electrode Material (From Above)

Code Electrode Type Code S Code H Code T Code P Code N

A 2 Electrodes - Standard • • • • •

B 2 Electrodes - Bullet Nose • •

E 3rd Grounding Electrode(1) • • • • •

Lining Material (From Above)

Code Line Size Code A Code T Code F Code P

Code

N and L

030 3 in. • • • • •

040 4 in. • • • • •

060 6 in. • • • • •

080 8 in. • • • • •

100 10 in. • • • • •

120 12 in. • • • • •

140 14 in NA • • • •

160 16 in. NA • • • •

180 18 in NA • NA • •

200 20 in NA • NA • •

240 24 in NA • NA • •

300 30 in NA • NA • •

360 36 in NA • NA • •

Code Flange Material

C Carbon Steel

S Stainless Steel (304)

Code Flange Type and Rating Availability


2 MSS SP44 Class 150


Code Electrode Housing Configuration

W0 Sealed, Welded Housing

W1 Sealed, Welded Housing with Pressure Relief

W3 Sealed, Welded Housing with Separate Electrode Compartments

Code Hazardous Area Approvals







Code Options

Certifications

CR CRN Certification

Optional Grounding Rings(2)









Optional Lining Protectors(7)

L1 (2) Hastelloy C-276 Ground Rings

L2 (2) Titanium Ground Rings(8)

L3 (2) Tantalum Ground Rings(8)

Other Options

H1 Lay-length matching 8701 using spool piece(8)

H2 Lay-length matching 8701(5)

H5 Lay-length matching Foxboro 2800 using spool piece(6)

H7 Lay-length ABB CopaX and MagX using spool piece(8)

B3 Integral Mount with 8732 and 8742

D1 High Accuracy Calibration(7)

D2 Dual Flowtube Sensor Calibration Numbers for Rosemount 8732E, 8712D, and 8742C Transmitters





Q66 Welding Procedure Qualification Record Documentation



Typical Model Number: 8707 T SA 040 C1 W0 N0

$293116

283

(1) Available for 10 in. (250 mm) and larger line size only(2) Grounding Rings and Lining Protectors provide the same fluid grounding function. Lining Protectors available in PTFE (Teflon) and ETFE (Tefzel) only(3) Available in flowtube sensor line sizes 0.5 through 12 in. (15 through 300 mm) (4) Available in flowtube sensor line sizes 0.5 through 8 in. (15 through 200 mm) (5) Available in flowtube sensor line sizes 0.5 through 16 in. (15 through 400 mm)(6) Available in flowtube sensor line sizes 3 through 18 in. (80 through 450 mm)(7) D1 Option Code must be ordered with flowtube sensor and transmitter. Accuracy with 8712H transmitter is 0.25% of rate from 3 to 30 ft/sec (1 to 10 m/sec).

Accuracy with 8732E, 8712D, and 8742C transmitters is 0.15% of rate.

A-60



TABLE 25. Rosemount 8707 ASME B16.5 (ANSI) Flange Rating Availability

Line Size Code

Line Size

Inches

(mm)

Carbon Steel

Class 150

(C1)

Carbon Steel

Class 150

(C2)

Carbon Steel

Class 300

(C3)

Stainless Steel

Class 150

(S1)

Stainless Steel

Class 300

(S3)

030 3 (80) • NA • • •

040 4 (100) • NA • • •

060 6 (150) • NA • • •

080 8 (200) • NA • • •

100 10 (250) • NA • • •

120 12 (300) • NA • • •

140 14 (350) • NA • • •

160 16 (400) • NA • • •

180 18 (450) • NA • • •

200 20 (500) • NA • • •

240 24 (600) • NA • • •

300(1)


30 (750) • • NA • NA

360(1) 36 (900) • NA NA • NA

A-61



ROSEMOUNT 8711 ORDERING INFORMATIONModel Product Description

8711 Magnetic Flowmeter Wafer Flowtube Sensor


A PFA(1)

T Tefzel (ETFE)(2)

S Teflon (PTFE)(3)


S 316L Stainless Steel

H Hastelloy C-276

T Tantalum

P 90% Platinum - 10% Iridium

N Titanium

Code Electrode Type

A 2 Electrodes - Standard

B 2 Electrodes - Bullet Nose

E 3rd Grounding Electrode - Standard

Lining Material

(from above)

Code Line Size Code T

15F 0.15 inch (4 mm) (not available with Teflon (PTFE) lining material) 5693 161

30F 0.30 inch (8 mm) (not available with Teflon (PTFE) lining material) 5693 161

005 ½ inch (15 mm) 5693 161

010 1inch (25 mm) 5693 161

015 1½ inch (40mm) 5693 161

020 2 inch (50mm) 5693 161

030 3 inch (80 mm) 8614 783

040 4 inch (100 mm) 10345 744

060 6 inch (150 mm) 16879 372

080 8 inch (200 mm) 221112 283

Code Line Size

08F .08 in. (2mm)

10F .1 in. (2.5mm)

15F 0.15 in. (4 mm)

30F 0.3 in. (8 mm)

005 ½ in. (15 mm)

010 1in. (25 mm)

015 1½ in. (40mm)

020 2 in. (50mm)

030 3 in. (80 mm)

040 4 in. (100 mm)

060 6 in. (150 mm)

080 8 in. (200 mm)

Code Transmitter Mounting Configuration

R Remote

U Integral, mounted to Rosemount 8732E/8742C Transmitter


A-62



Code Mounting Kit

Expanded Kit: Includes two alignment rings (where applicable), threaded SST studs, and nuts

1 ASME B16.5 (ANSI) Class 150

2 DIN PN 10/16(4)


4 DIN PN 25/40(5)

Standard Kit: Includes two alignment rings (where applicable)


6 DIN PN 10/16(4)


8 DIN PN 25/40(5)

Code Hazardous Area Approval


FM & CSA



E5 FM Class 1 Div 1, Explosion Proof

ATEX

E1 ATEX Ex e ia IIC T3… T6, Increased Safety Approval (with I.S. electrodes)

KD ATEX Ex e ia IIB T3… T6, Increased Safety Approval (with I.S. electrodes)

N1 ATEX Ex nA [L] IIC Type n Approval

ND ATEX Dust Approval

IECEx

E7 IECEx Ex e ia IIC T3… T6, Increased Safety Approval (with I.S. electrodes)

KF IECEx Ex e ia IIB T3… T6, Increased Safety Approval (with I.S. electrodes)

N7 IECEx Ex nA [L] IIC Type n Approval

NF IECEx Dust Approval

Code Options

Certifications

DW NSF Drinking Water Certification(6)

Optional Grounding Rings


G2 (2) Hastelloy C-276 Ground Rings

G3 (2) Titanium Ground Rings

G4 (2) Tantalum Ground Rings

Other Options






Q66 Welding Procedure Qualification Record Documentation(8)



Typical Model Number: 8711 TSA 020 R 5 N0

(1) Available with 0.15 and 0.30 in. (4 and 8 mm) line sizes only(2) Not available with 0.15 in. (4 mm) line size(3) Not available with 0.15 and 0.30 in. (4 and 8 mm) line sizes(4) 8 in. (200 mm) has a PN 10 mounting kit only(5) 8 in. (200 mm) has a PN 25 mounting kit only(6) Only available with PTFE (Teflon) Liner Material with 316L SST Electrode Material(7) D1 Option Code must be ordered with flowtube sensor and transmitter(8) 6 and 8 in. (150 and 200 mm) line sizes only

A-63



ROSEMOUNT 8721 ORDERING INFORMATIONModel Product Description

8721 Sanitary Magnetic Flowmeter


A PFA


S 316L SST (standard)

H Hastelloy C-276

P 90% Platinum-10% Iridium

Code Electrode Construction

A Standard measurement electrodes

Code Line Sizes

005 15 mm (1/2 inch)

010 25 mm (1 inch)

015 40 mm (11/2 inch)

020 50 mm (2.0 inch)

025 65 mm (21/2 inch)

030 80 mm (3.0 inch)

040 100 mm (4.0 inch)

Code Transmitter Mounting Configuration

R Remote, for use with 8712, or remote version of 8732/8742 transmitter

U Integral, mounted to 8732/8742 transmitter

X Flowtube Sensor only (does not include terminal junction box)

Code Process Connection Type

A Tri-Clamp (1)

B IDF Sanitary screw type (2)

C Weld nipple (2)

D DIN 11851 (Imperial)

E DIN 11851 (Metric)

F DIN 11864-1 form A

G DIN 11864-2 form A

H SMS Connection

J Cherry-Burrell I-Line

Code Process Gasket Material

1 Silicone gasket seal

2 EPDM

4 Viton

8 EPDM Compression - limiting (3)

9 Viton Compression - limiting (3)

X No gasket (User supplied; only applicable with Process Connection B)

Continued On Next Page

A-64




N0 Factory Mutual (FM) Ordinary Location; CSA; CE Marking; 3-A; EHEDG Type EL (3)

Code Options

AH Electropolished process connection surface finish < 15μinch Ra (0.38μm Ra)

D1 High Accuracy Calibration [0.25% of rate from 3-30 ft/s (0.9-10 m/s)] matched flowtube sensor and transmitter

system

D3 High Velocity Calibration Verification (calibration verified at 1.3, 10, and 20 ft/sec)

HD DanFoss Lay Length

HP Process Data PD340 (Alfa-Laval PD340) 250mm lay length and Tri-Clamp process connections

J1 CM20 Conduit Adapter (Applies to Transmitter Mount Option “R” only)

J2 PG13.5 Conduit Adapter (Applies to Transmitter Mount Option “R” only)

Q4 Inspection Certification for Calibration Data

Q8 Material Traceability Certificate per ISO 10474 3.1B (product contact surfaces)

SJ 304 Stainless Steel terminal junction box (Remote configuration only)

Typical Model Number: 8721 A S A 020 U A 1 N0

(1) Tri-Clamp specification per BPE-2002(2) IDF Specification per BS4825 Part 4(3) EHEDG Document 8 requires mechanical compression limiting, provided by Compression - limiting gaskets for line sizes 1- 4 inch only.

A-65



ROSEMOUNT 8714D ORDERING INFORMATION

Model Description

8714DQ4 Reference Calibration Standard

A-66



Tagging The flowtube sensor and transmitter will be tagged, at no charge, in

accordance with customer requirements.

Transmitter tag character height is

0.125 in. (3.18 mm).

Flowtube Sensor tag: 40 character maximum.

Transmitter tag: see Configuration Data Sheet for character maximum.

Ordering Procedure

To order, select the desired flowtube sensor and/or transmitter by specifying

model codes from the ordering table.

For remote transmitter applications, note the cable specification

requirements.

Flowtube Sensors and transmitters must be selected from Product Data

Sheet 00813-0100-4727.

Standard Configuration

Unless the Configuration Data Sheet is completed, the transmitter will be

shipped as follows:

The Rosemount 8732E and the 8742C Transmitter are factory-calibrated with

the attached flowtube sensor size and appropriate calibration number.

Engineering Units: ft/sec

4 mA (1 V dc): 0

20 mA (5 V dc): 30

Tube Size: 3-inch

Empty Pipe: Off

Flowtube Sensor Calibration

Number:

1000005010000000

A-67



Cable Requirements for Remote Transmitters

Remote transmitter installations require equal lengths of signal and coil drive

cables. Integrally mounted transmitters are factory wired and do not require

interconnecting cables.

Lengths from 5 to 1,000 feet (1.5 to 300 meters) may be specified, and will be

shipped with the flowtube sensor. Cable longer than 100 feet (30 meters) is

not recommended for high-signal systems.

Custom Configuration (Option Code C1)

If Option Code C1 is ordered, the Configuration Data Sheet (CDS) must be submitted at the time of order.

Description Length P/N

Signal Cable (20 AWG)

Belden 8762, Alpha 2411

equivalent

ft

m

08712-0061-0001

08712-0061-0003

Coil Drive Cable

(14 AWG) Belden 8720,


ft

m

08712-0060-0001

08712-0060-0003

Combination Signal and

Coil Drive Cable

(18 AWG)(1)

(1) Combination signal and coil drive cable is not recommended for high-signal magmeter system. For remote mount installations, combination signal and coil drive cable should be limited to less than 330 ft (100 m).

ft

m

08712-0752-0001

08712-0752-0003

A-68



Appendix B Approval Information

European Directive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page B-1

Hazardous Locations Product Approvals Offering . . . . . page B-2

Hazardous Location Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page B-7

Approved Manufacturing Locations

Rosemount Inc. — Eden Prairie, Minnesota, USA

Fisher-Rosemount Technologias de Flujo, S.A. de C.V. —Chihuahua MexicoEde, The Netherlands

EUROPEAN DIRECTIVE INFORMATION

The EC declaration of conformity for all applicable European directives for this product can be found on our website at www.rosemount.com. A hard copy may be obtained by contacting our local sales office.

ATEX Directive Rosemount Inc. complies with the ATEX Directive.

Type n protection type in accordance with EN50 021

• Closing of entries in the device must be carried out using the appropriate EExe or EExn metal cable gland and metal blanking plug or any appropriate ATEX approved cable gland and blanking plug with IP66 rating certified by an EU approved certification body.

Flameproof protection type in accordance with EN 60079-0:2004, EN 60079-7: 2007 and IEC 60079-1: 2007

Intrinsic safety protection type in accordance with EN60079-11:2006

European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) (97/23/EC)

Rosemount 8705 and 8707 Magnetic Flowmeter flowtube sensors in line size and flange combinations:

Line Size: 1 1/2 inch - 3 inch with all flanges available.

Line Size: 4 inch - 24 inch with all DIN flanges and ANSI 150 and ANSI 300 flanges.

Line Size: 30 inch - 36 inch with AWWA 125 flanges QS Certificate of Assessment - EC No. PED-H-20 Module H Conformity Assessment

Rosemount 8711 Magnetic Flowmeter Flowtube Sensors Line Sizes: 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, and 8 inch

QS Certificate of Assessment - EC No. PED-H-20Module H Conformity Assessment

www.rosemount.com



Rosemount 8721 Sanitary Magmeter Flowtube Sensors in line sizes of 11/2 inch and larger:

Module A Conformity Assessment

All other Rosemount 8705/8707/8711/8721 Flowtube Sensors — in line sizes of 1 inch and less: Sound Engineering Practice

Flowtube Sensors that are SEP are outside the scope of PED and cannot be marked for compliance with PED.

Mandatory CE-marking for flowtube sensors in accordance with Article 15 of the PED can be found on the flowtube sensor body (CE 0575).

Flowtube Sensor category I is assessed for conformity per module A procedures.

Flowtube Sensor categories II – IV, use module H for conformity assessment procedures.

Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) (89/336/EEC) (obsolete)

All Models EN 50081-1: 1992, EN 50082-2: 1995 (obsolete),EN 61326: 1997/ A1:1998 / A2:2000

Installed signal wiring should not be run together and should not be in the same cable tray as AC power wiring.

Device must be properly grounded or earthed according to local electric codes.

To improve protection against signal interference, shielded cable is recommended.

Low Voltage Directive (93/68/EEC)

All Models 8732, Model 8742C - AC EN 61010-1: 1995

Other important guidelines

Only use new, original parts.

To prevent the process medium escaping, do not unscrew or remove process flange bolts, adapter bolts or bleed screws during operation.

Maintenance shall only be done by qualified personnel.

CE Marking Compliance with all applicable European Union Directives. (Note: CE Marking is not available on Rosemount 8712H).

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS PRODUCT APPROVALS OFFERING

The Rosemount 8700 Series Magnetic Flowmeters offer many different hazardous locations certifications. The table below provides an overview of the available hazardous area approval options. Equivalent hazardous locations certifications for flowtube sensor and transmitter must match in integrally mounted magnetic flowmeter systems. Remote mounted magnetic flowmeter systems do not require matched hazardous location certifications. For complete information about the hazardous area approval codes listed, see Hazardous Location Certifications starting on page B-7.

B-2



Table B-1. ATEX Approvals Offering

Transmitter 8732E 8712D(1) 8742C 8712H(1)

Flowtube

Sensor 8705 8707 8711 8705 8707 8711 8705 8707 8711 8707

ATEX Category Hazardous Area Approval Code

Non-Hazardous

Trans: LVD and EMC NA - NA NA - NA NA - NA -

Tube: LVD and EMC NA - NA NA - NA NA - NA -

Equipment Category 2

Gas Group IIB

Trans: Ex d IIB T6 ED - ED - - - ED - ED -

Tube: Ex e ia IIC T3...T6 KD - CD - - - KD - CD -

Gas Group IIC

Trans: Ex d IIC T6 E1 - E1 - - - E1 - E1 -

Tube: Ex e ia IIC T3...T6 E1 - E1 - - - E1 - E1 -

Gas Group IIB with Intrinsically Safe Output

Trans: Ex de [ia] IIB T6 ED(2) - ED(2) - - - KD - KD -

Tube: Ex e ia IIC T3...T6 KD - CD - - - KD - CD -

Gas Group IIC with Intrinsically Safe Output

Trans: Ex de [ia] IIC T6 E1(2) - E1(2) - - - K1 - K1 -

Tube: Ex e ia IIC T3...T6 E1 - E1 - - - E1 - E1 -

Equipment Category 3

Gas Group IIC

Trans: Ex nA nL IIC T4 N1 - N1 N1 - N1 - - - -

Tube: Ex nA [L] IIC T3...T6 N1 - N1 N1 - N1 - - - -

Equipment Category 1 - Dust Environment

Dust Environment Only

Trans: Dust Ignition Proof ND - ND - - - - - - -

Tube: Dust Ignition Proof ND - ND - - - - - - -

Other Certifications Product Certification Code(3)

European Pressure

Equipment Directive (PED)

PD - PD PD - PD PD - PD -

CRN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN

NSF 61 Drinking Water(4) DW - DW DW - DW DW - DW -

(1) Remote Transmitter Only(2) For I.S. Output, Output Code B must be ordered(3) Product Certification Codes are added to the Flowtube Sensor model number only(4) Only available with PTFE Teflon or Polyurethane Lining Material and 316L SST Electrodes

B-3



Table B-2. IECEx Approvals Offering


Flowtube

Sensor 8705 8707 8711 8705 8707 8711 8705 8707 8711 8707

IECEx Category Hazardous Area Approval Code

Non-Hazardous

Trans: LVD and EMC NA - NA - - - - - - -

Tube: LVD and EMC NA - NA - - - - - - -

Suitable for Zone 1

Gas Group IIB

Trans: Ex d IIB T6 EF - EF - - - - - - -

Tube: Ex e ia IIC T3...T6 KF - CF - - - - - - -

Gas Group IIC

Trans: Ex d IIC T6 E7 - E7 - - - - - - -

Tube: Ex e ia IIC T3...T6 E7 - E7 - - - - - - -

Gas Group IIB with Intrinsically Safe Output

Trans: Ex de [ia] IIB T6 EF(2) - EF(2) - - - - - - -

Tube: Ex e ia IIC T3...T6 KF - CF - - - - - - -

Gas Group IIC with Intrinsically Safe Output

Trans: Ex de [ia] IIC T6 E7(2) - E7(2) - - - - - - -


Suitable for Zone 2

Gas Group IIC

Trans: Ex nA nL IIC T4 N7 - N7 - - - - - - -

Tube: Ex nA [L] IIC T3...T6 N7 - N7 - - - - - - -

Suitable for Dust Environment

Dust Environment Only

Trans: Dust Ignition Proof NF - NF - - - - - - -

Tube: Dust Ignition Proof NF - NF - - - - - - -

Other Certification Product Certification Code(3)

European Pressure

Equipment Directive

(PED)




(1) Remote Transmitter Only(2) For I.S. Output, Output Code B must be ordered(3) Product Certification Codes are added to the Flowtube Sensor model number only(4) Only available with PTFE Teflon or Polyurethane Lining Material and 316L SST Electrodes

B-4



Table B-3. Factory Mutual (FM) Approvals Offering


Flowtube

Sensor 8705 8707 8711 8705 8707 8711 8705 8707 8711 8707

FM Category Hazardous Area Approval Code

Non-Classified Locations

Transmitter NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA N0

Flowtube Sensor NA N0 NA NA N0 NA NA N0 NA N0

Suitable for Class I, Division 1

Explosion-Proof

Trans: Groups C, D T6 E5 - E5 - - - E5 - E5 -

Tube: Groups C, D T6 E5 - E5 - - - E5 - E5 -

Explosion-Proof with Intrinsically Safe Output

Trans: Groups C, D T6 E5(2) - E5(2) - - - K5 - K5 -

Tube: Groups C, D T6 E5 - E5 - - - E5 - E5 -


Non-Flammable Fluids

Trans: Groups A,B,C,D T4 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0

Tube: Groups A,B,C,D T5 N0 N0(3) N0 N0 N0(3) N0 N0 N0(3) N0 N0(3)

Flammable Fluids



Non-Flammable Fluids with Intrinsically Safe Output

Trans: Groups A,B,C,D T4 N0(2) N0(2) N0(2) - - - K0 K0 K0 -

Tube: Groups A,B,C,D T5 N0 N0(3) N0 - - - N0 N0(3) N0 -


European Pressure

Equipment Directive

(PED)




(1) Remote Transmitter Only(2) For I.S. Output, Output Code B must be ordered(3) 8707 Flowtube Sensor has Temp Code - T3C(4) Product Certification Codes are added to the Flowtube Sensor model number only(5) Only available with PTFE Teflon or Polyurethane Lining Material and 316L SST Electrodes

B-5



B-6

Table B-4. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Approvals Offering

Table B-5. Russian GOST Approvals Offering - In Progress

Table B-6. China NEPSI Approvals Offering - In Progress


Flowtube

Sensor 8705 8707 8711 8705 8707 8711 8705 8707 8711 8707

FM Category Hazardous Area Approval Code

Non-Classified Locations

Transmitter NA - NA NA - NA NA - NA -

Flowtube Sensor NA - NA NA - NA NA - NA -


Non-Flammable Fluids




European Pressure

Equipment Directive

(PED)




(1) Remote Transmitter Only(2) 8707 Flowtube Sensor has Temp Code - T3C(3) Product Certification Codes are added to the Flowtube Sensor model number only(4) Only available with PTFE Teflon or Polyurethane Lining Material and 316L SST Electrodes


Flowtube

Sensor 8705 8707 8711 8705 8707 8711 8705 8707 8711 8707

GOST Category Hazardous Area Approval Code

Suitable for Zone 1

Gas Group IIB

Trans: Ex d IIB T6 EM - EM - - - - - - -

Tube: Ex e ia IIC T3...T6 EM - EM - - - - - - -

(1) Remote Transmitter Only


Flowtube

Sensor 8705 8707 8711 8705 8707 8711 8705 8707 8711 8707

NEPSI Category Hazardous Area Approval Code

Suitable for Zone 1

Gas Group IIB

Trans: Ex d IIB T6 E3(2) - E3(2) - - - - - - -


(1) Remote Transmitter Only(2) For I.S. Output, Output Code B must be ordered



Table B-7. Brazil INMETRO Approvals Offering - In Progress

HAZARDOUS LOCATION CERTIFICATIONS

Equivalent Hazardous Location Certifications for flowtube sensor and transmitter must match in integrally-mounted magnetic flowmeter systems. Remote-mounted systems do not require matched hazardous location certification option codes.

Transmitter Approval Information

Table B-8. Transmitter Option Codes


Flowtube

Sensor 8705 8707 8711 8705 8707 8711 8705 8707 8711 8707

INMETRO Category Hazardous Area Approval Code

Suitable for Zone 1

Gas Group IIB

Trans: Ex d IIB T6 E2(2) - E2(2) - - - - - - -


(1) Remote Transmitter Only(2) For I.S. Output, Output Code B must be ordered

Rosemount 8732E Rosemount 8712D Rosemount 8712H

Rosemount 8742 Transmitter

Approval Codes Fieldbus Output IS fieldbus Output

NA • • •

N0 Pending • • •

N1 Pending •

N5 Pending • • •

ND Pending

NF Pending

E1 Pending •

E2 Pending

E3 Pending

E5 Pending •

E7 Pending

ED Pending •

EM Pending

K0 •

K1 •

K5 •

KD(1) •

(1) Refer to Table B-12 on page B-20 for relation between ambient temperature, process temperature, and temperature class.

B-7



North American Certifications

Factory Mutual (FM)

NOTEFor intrinsically safe (IS) outputs on the 8732E output option code B must be selected.IS outputs for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D. Temp Code – T4 at 60°C

N0 Division 2 Approval (All transmitters)

Reference Rosemount Control Drawing 08742-1051 (8742C) or 08732-1052

(8732E/8742C).

Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D

Temp Codes – T4 (8712 at 40°C, 8742 at 60°C),

T4 (8732 at 60°C: -50 °C ≤ Ta ≤ 60 °C)

Dust-ignition proof Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F, G

Temp Codes – T4 (8712 at 40°C), T4 (8732 at 60°C: -50 °C ≤ Ta ≤ 60 °C), T6 (8742 at

60°C)

Enclosure Type 4X

K0 Division 2 Approval with

Intrinsically Safe Output (8742 Only)

Reference Rosemount Control Drawing 08742-1051

Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D with IS output for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C,

D.

Temp Code – T4 at 60°C



Enclosure Type 4X

K5 Explosionproof Approval with

Intrinsically Safe Output (8742 only)


Explosion-Proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D with IS output for Class I, Division 1,

Groups A, B, C, D.





Temp Codes – T4 (8742 at 60°C)

Enclosure Type 4X

N5 Division 2 Approval (All Transmitters)

For flowtube sensors with IS electrodes only

Reference Rosemount Control Drawing 08742-1051 (8742C) or 08732-1052 (8732E).


Temp Codes – T4 (8712 at 40°C, 8742 at 60°C),

T4 (8732 at 60°C: -50 °C ≤ Ta ≤ 60 °C)


Temp Codes – T4 (8712 at 40°C), T4 (8732 at 60°C: -50 °C ≤ Ta ≤ 60 °C), T6 (8742 at

60°C)

Enclosure Type 4X

B-8



E5 Explosion-Proof Approval (8732 and 8742 only)


Explosion-Proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D



Temp Code – T6 at 60 °C


Temp Codes – T4 (8742 at 60°C), T6 (8732 at 60°C: -50 °C ≤ Ta ≤ 60 °C): with LOI T6

(8732 at 60°C: -40 °C ≤ Ta ≤ 60 °C)

Enclosure Type 4X

Canadian Standards Association (CSA)

N0 Division 2 Approval


(8732E or 8742C only)


Temp Codes – T4 (8732 at 60°C: -50 °C ≤ Ta ≤ 60 °C),

T4 (8742 at 60°C)


Enclosure Type 4X

K0 Division 2 Approval with

Intrinsically Safe Output (8742 Only)


Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D with IS output for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C,

D. Temp Code – T4 at 60°C



Enclosure Type 4X

B-9



B-10

European Certifications NOTEFor intrinsically safe (IS) outputs on the 8732E output option code B must be selected.IS outputs for Ex de [ia] IIB or IIC T6

E1 ATEX Flameproof

Hydrogen gas group

8732 - Certificate No.: 03ATEXXXXXX II 2G

Ex de IIC or Ex de [ia] IIC T6 (-20 °C ≤ Ta ≤ +57 °C)

with LOI T6 (-20 °C ≤ Ta ≤ +57 °C)

8742 - Certificate No.: 03ATEX2159X II 2G

EEx de IIB + H2 T6 (-20 °C ≤ Ta ≤ +65 °C)

Vmax = 250 V AC or 42 V DC

0575

ED ATEX Flameproof

8732 - Certificate No.: KEMA03ATEXXXXXX II 2G

Ex de IIB or Ex de [ia] IIB T6 (-20 °C ≤ Ta ≤ +57 °C)

with LOI T6 (-20 °C ≤ Ta ≤ +57 °C)


0575

ND ATEX Dust

8732 - Certificate No.: KEMA06ATEX0006 II 1D

max ΔT = 40 °K(1)

Amb. Temp. Limits: (-20 °C ≤ Ta ≤ +57 °C)


IP 66

0575

NOTEMax surface temperature is 40 °C above the ambient temperature conditions. Tmax = 100 °C.

SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR SAFE USE (KEMA 07ATEX0074 X): If the Rosemount 8732 Flow Transmitter is used integrally with the Rosemount 8705 or 8711 Flowtube Sensors, it shall be assured that the mechanical contact areas of the Flowtube Sensor and Flow Transmitter comply with the requirements for flat joints according to standard EN/IEC 60079-1 clause 5.2.

The relation between ambient temperature, process temperature, and temperature class is to be taken from the table under (15 - description) above. (See Table B-12)

The electrical data is to be taken from the summary under (15 - electrical data) above. (See Table B-11)

If the Rosemount 8732 Flow Transmitter is used integrally with the Junction Box, it shall be assured that the mechanical contact areas of the Junction Box and Flow Transmitter comply with the requirements for flanged joints according to standard EN/IEC 60079-1 clause 5.2.

(1) Max surface temperature is 40 °C above the ambient temperature conditions. Tmax = 100

°C



Per EN60079-1: 2004 the gap of the joint between transmitter and remote junction box/flowtube sensor is less than required per table 1 clause 5.2.2; and is only approved for use with approved Rosemount transmitter and approved junction box/flowtube sensor, please consult Rosemount, Inc.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS:The cable and conduit entry devices and blanking elements shall be of a certified flameproof type, suitable for the conditions of use and correctly installed. With the use of conduit, a certified stopping box shall be provided immediately to the entrance of the enclosure.

ED 8742 - Certificate No: KEMA03ATEX2159X II 2G

EEx de IIB T6 (Ta = -20 °C to +65 °C)


0575

B-11



K1 ATEX Flameproof

Hydrogen Gas Group with

Intrinsically safe output (8742 only)

Certificate No.: KEMA03ATEX2159x II 2G

ATEX EEx de [ia] IIB + H2 T6 (-20 °C ≤ Ta ≤ +57 °C)


0575

See Table 12 for Electrical Parameters

KD ATEX Flameproof with

Intrinsically Safe Output (8742 only)

Certificate No: KEMA03ATEX2159X II 2G

EEx de [ia] IIB T6 (Ta = -20 °C to +57 °C)


0575

See Table B-11 for Electrical Parameters

SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR SAFE USE (X) (03ATEX2159X): The relation between ambient temperature, process temperature and temperature class is to be taken from the table under (15 - description) above. (See Table B-12).

If the Rosemount 8742C Flow Transmitter is used integrally with the Junction Box, it shall be assured that the mechanical contact areas of the Junction Box and Flow Transmitter comply with the requirements for flanged joints according to standard EN 50018, clause 5.2.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS: The cable and conduit entry devices and the closing elements shall be of a certified increased safety type, suitable for the conditions of use and correctly installed.

At ambient temperatures above 50 °C, the flow meter shall be used with heat resistant cables with a temperature rating of at least 90 °C.

A Junction Box in type of explosion protection increased safety “e” may be attached to the base of the Rosemount 8742C Flow Transmitter, permitting remote mounting of the Rosemount 8705 and 8711 Flowtube Sensors.

Ambient temperature range of the Junction Box: -20°C to +65°C.

The Junction Box is classified as II 2 G EEx e IIB T6 and certified under KEMA 03ATEX2052X.

N1 ATEX Type n

8712D - ATEX Certificate No: BASEEFA 05ATEX0170X

EEx nA nL IIC T4


0575

8732 - ATEX Certificate No: BASEEFA 05ATEXXXXXX

Ex nA nL IIC T4


0575

B-12



Remote Junction Box

8742 - Certificate No.: KEMA03ATEX2052x II 2G

ATEX EEx e (1) T6 (Ta = -20 °C to +65 °C)

When installed per drawing 08732-1050

After de-energizing, wait 10 minutes before opening cover

0575

(1) IIB + H2 for E1, K1

IIB for ED, KD

8732 - Certificate No.: KEMA03ATEXXXXXx II 2G

ATEX Ex e (1) T6 (Ta = -20 °C to +57 °C)



0575

(1) IIC for E1

IIB for ED

International Certifications

NOTEFor intrinsically safe (IS) outputs on the 8732E output option code B must be selected.IS outputs for Ex de [ia] IIB or IIC T6

E7 IECEx Flameproof

Hydrogen gas group

8732 - Certificate No.: KEM 07.XXXX

Ex de IIC or Ex d [ia] IIC T6 (-50 °C ≤ Ta ≤ +60 °C)

with LOI T6 (-40 °C ≤ Ta ≤ +60 °C)


EF IECEx Flameproof


Ex de IIB or Ex d [ia] IIB T6 (-50 °C ≤ Ta ≤ +60 °C)

with LOI T6 (-40 °C ≤ Ta ≤ +60 °C)


NF IECEx Dust


Ex tD A20 IP66

T6 (-20 °C ≤ Ta ≤ +60 °C)


SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR SAFE USE (KEM 07.XXXX): If the Rosemount 8732 Flow Transmitter is used integrally with the Rosemount 8705 or 8711 Flowtube Sensors, it shall be assured that the mechanical contact areas of the Flowtube Sensor and Flow Transmitter comply with the requirements for flat joints according to standard EN/IEC 60079-1 clause 5.2.

The relation between ambient temperature, process temperature, and temperature class is to be taken from the table under (15 - description) above. (See Table B-12)

The electrical data is to be taken from the summary under (15 - electrical data) above. (See Table B-11)

B-13



If the Rosemount 8732 Flow Transmitter is used integrally with the Junction Box, it shall be assured that the mechanical contact areas of the Junction Box and Flow Transmitter comply with the requirements for flanged joints according to standard EN/IEC 60079-1 clause 5.2.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS:The cable and conduit entry devices and blanking elements shall be of a certified flameproof type, suitable for the conditions of use and correctly installed. With the use of conduit, a certified stopping box shall be provided immediately to the entrance of the enclosure.

N7 IECEx Type n

8732 - Certificate No: BASEEFA XXXXXXXXXXX

Ex nA nL IIC T4


Remote Junction Box


IECEx Ex e (1) T6 (Ta = -50 °C to +60 °C)



(1) IIC for E7

IIB for EF

B-14



Flowtube Sensor Approval Information

Table B-9. Flowtube Sensor Option Codes(1)

(1) CE Marking is standard on the Rosemount 8705 and 8711. No hazardous location certifications are available on the Rosemount 570TM.

(2) Refer to Table B-10 on page B-18

North American Certifications

Factory Mutual (FM)

N0 Division 2 Approval for

Non-Flammable Fluids (All Flowtube Sensors)


Temp Code – T5 (8705/8711 at 60°C)

Temp Code – T3C (8707 at 60°C)

Dust-Ignition proof Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F, G

Temp Code – T6 (8705/8711 at 60°C)


Enclosure Type 4X

N0 for 8721 Hygienic Flowtube Sensor

Factory Mutual (FM) Ordinary Location;

CE Marking; 3-A Symbol Authorization #1222;

EHEDG Type EL

N5 Division 2 Approval for Flammable Fluids

(All Flowtube Sensors)


Temp Code – T5 (8705/8711 at 60°C)



Temp Code – T6 (8705/8711 at 60°C)


Enclosure Type 4X

Approval

Codes

Rosemount 8705 Flowtube

Sensor


Sensor


Sensor

Rosemount 8721

Flowtube

Sensors

For

Non-flammable

Fluids

For Flammable

Fluids

For

Non-flammable

Fluids

For Flammable

Fluids

For

Non-flammable

Fluids

For Flammable

Fluids

For

Non-flammable

Fluids

NA • • •

N0 • • •

N1 • • • •

N5 • • • • • •

N7 • • • •

ND • • • •

NF • • • •

E1 • • • •

E2 In Progress In Progress In Progress In Progress

E3 In Progress In Progress In Progress In Progress

E5 • • • •

EM In Progress In Progress In Progress In Progress

CD(2) • •

KD(2) • •

B-15



E5 Explosion-Proof (8705 and 8711 Only)

Explosion-Proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D






Enclosure Type 4X

Canadian Standards Association (CSA)

N0 Suitable for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D

Temp Code – T5 (8705/8711 at 60°C)



Enclosure Type 4X

N0 for 8721 Hygienic Flowtube Sensor

Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Ordinary Location;

CE Marking; 3-A Symbol Authorization #1222;

EHEDG Type EL

B-16



European Certifications N1 ATEX Non-Sparking/Non-incendive (8705/8711 Only)

Certificate No: KEMA02ATEX1302X II 3G

EEx nA [L] IIC T3... T6

Ambient Temperature Limits -20 to 57°C

SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR SAFE USE (X):The relation between ambient temperature, process temperature and temperature class is to be taken from the table under (15-description) above. - (See Table 13) The electrical data is to be taken from the summary under (15-electrical data above). (See Table 12)

E1, ATEX Increased Safety (Zone 1)

CD with IS Electrodes (8711 only)

Certificate No: KEMA03ATEX2052X II 1/2G

EEx e ia IIC T3... T6 (Ta = -20 to +57 °C) (See Table B-12)

0575

Vmax = 40 V DC (pulsed)

SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR SAFE USE (X):If the Rosemount 8732 Flow Transmitter is used integrally with the Rosemount 8705 or Rosemount 8711 Flowtube Sensors, it shall be assured that the mechanical contact areas of the Flowtube Sensor and Flow Transmitter comply with the requirements for flat joints according to standard EN 50018, clause 5.2. The relation between ambient temperature, process temperature and temperature class is to be taken from the table under (15-description) above (See Table 11). The electrical data is to be taken from the summary under (15-electrical data above). (See Table 12)

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS:At ambient temperature above 50°C, the flowmeter shall be used with heat resistant cables with a temperature rating of at least 90°C.

A fuse with a rating of maximum 0,7 A according to IEC 60127-1 shall be included in the coil excitation circuit if the flowtube sensors are used with other flow transmitters (e.g. Rosemount 8712).

E1, ATEX Increased Safety (Zone 1)

KD with IS Electrodes (8705 only)

Certificate No. KEMA 03ATEX2052X II 1/2G

EEx e ia IIC T3... T6 (Ta = -20 to 57 °C) (See Table B-12)

0575

Vmax = 40 V DC (pulsed)

SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR SAFE USE (X):If the Rosemount 8732 Flow Transmitter is used integrally with the Rosemount 8705 or Rosemount 8711 Flowtube Sensors, it shall be assured that the mechanical contact areas of the Flowtube Sensor and Flow Transmitter comply with the requirements for flat joints according to standard EN 50018, clause 5.2. The relation between ambient temperature, process temperature and temperature class is to be taken from the table under (15-description) above. - (See Table 11) The electrical data is to be taken from the summary under (15-electrical data above). (See Table 12)

B-17



INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS:At ambient temperature above 50°C, the flowmeter shall be used with heat resistant cables with a temperature rating of at least 90 °C.

A fuse with a rating of maximum 0,7 A according to IEC 60127-1 shall be included in the coil excitation circuit if the flowtube sensors are used with other flow transmitters (e.g. Rosemount 8712).

Table B-10. Relation between ambient temperature, process temperature, and temperature class(1)

(1) This table is applicable for CD and KD option codes only.

Meter Size (Inches) Maximum Ambient Temperature Maximum Process Temperature Temperature Class

1/2 115°F (65°C) 239°F (115°C) T3

1 149°F (65°C) 248°F (120°C) T3

1 95°F (35°C) 95°F (35°C) T4

11/2 149°F (65°C) 257°F (125°C) T3

11/2 122°F (50°C) 148°F (60°C) T4

2 149°F (65°C) 257°F (125°C) T3

2 149°F (65°C) 167°F (75°C) T4

2 104°F (40°C) 104°F (40°C) T5

3 - 36 149°F (65°C) 266°F (130°C) T3

3 - 36 149°F (65°C) 194°F (90°C) T4

3 - 36 131°F (55°C) 131°F (55°C) T5

3 - 36 104°F (40°C) 104°F (40°C) T6

6 115°F (65°C) 275°F(135°C) T3

6 115°F (65°C) 230°F (110°C) T4

6 115°F (65°C) 167°F (75°C) T5

6 140°F (60°C) 140°F (60°C) T6

8-60 115°F (65°C) 284°F (140°C) T3

8-60 115°F (65°C) 239°F (115°C) T4

8-60 115°F (65°C) 176°F (80°C) T5

8-60 115°F (65°C) 156°F (69°C) T6

B-18



Table B-11. Electrical Data

Rosemount 8732 Flow Transmitter

Power supply: 250 Vac, 1 A or 50 Vdc, 2,5 A, 20 W maximum

Pulsed output circuit: 30 V dc (pulsed), 0,25 A, 7,5 W maximum

4-20 mA output circuit: 30 V dc, 30 mA, 900 mW maximum

Rosemount 8705 and 8711 Flowtube Sensors

Coil excitation circuit: 40 V dc (pulsed), 0,5 A, 20 W maximum

Electrode circuit: in type of explosion protection intrinsic safety EEx ia IIC, Ui = 5 V, li = 0.2 mA, Pi = 1 mW, Um = 250 V

Rosemount 8742C Flow Transmitter (EEx de

version):

Power supply: 250 Vac, 1 A, 40 VA or 50 Vdc, 2,5 A, 15 W maximum

Foundation Fieldbus output: 30 Vdc, 30 mA, 1 W maximum

Rosemount 8742C Flow Transmitter (EEx de

[ia] version):

Power supply: 250 Vac, 1 A, 40 VA or 50 Vdc, 2,5 A, 15 W maximum

Foundation Fieldbus output:

(terminals + and -)

in type of explosion protection intrinsic safety EEx, only for connection to a certified intrinsically safe

circuit, with the following maximum values:

Ui = 30 V

Ii = 380 mA

Pi = 5,32 W

Ci = 4,4 nF

Li = 0 mH

B-19



Table B-12. Relation between the maximum ambient temperature, the maximum process temperature, and the temperature class(1)

Maximum Ambient

Temperature

Maximum process temperature °F (°C) per temperature class

T3 T4 T5 T6

0.5 inch flowtube sensor size

149°F (65°C) 297°F (147°C) 138°F (59°C) 54°F (12°C) 18°F (-8°C)

140°F (60°C) 309°F (154°C) 151°F (66°C) 66°F (19°C) 28°F (-2°C)

131°F (55°C) 322°F (161°C) 163°F (73°C) 79°F (26°C) 41°F (5°C)

122°F (50°C) 334°F (168°C) 176°F (80°C) 90°F (32°C) 54°F (12°C)

113°F (45°C) 347°F (175°C) 189°F (87°C) 102°F (39°C) 66°F (19°C)

104°F (40°C) 351°F (177°C) 199°F (93°C) 115°F (46°C) 79°F (26°C)

95°F (35°C) 351°F (177°C) 212°F (100°C) 127°F (53°C) 90°F (32°C)

86°F (30°C) 351°F (177°C) 225°F (107°C) 138°F (59°C) 102°F (39°C)

77°F (25°C) 351°F (177°C) 237°F (114°C) 151°F (66°C) 115°F (46°C)

68°F (20°C) 351°F (177°C) 248°F (120°C) 163°F (73°C) 127°F (53°C)


149°F (65°C) 318°F (159°C) 158°F (70°C) 72°F (22°C) 34°F (1°C)

140°F (60°C) 331°F (166°C) 171°F (77°C) 84°F (29°C) 46°F (8°C)

131°F (55°C) 343°F (173°C) 183°F (84°C) 97°F (36°C) 59°F (15°C)

122°F (50°C) 351°F (177°C) 196°F (91°C) 109°F (43°C) 72°F (22°C)

113°F (45°C) 351°F (177°C) 207°F (97°C) 122°F (50°C) 84°F (29°C)

104°F (40°C) 351°F (177°C) 219°F (104°C) 135°F (57°C) 97°F (36°C)

95°F (35°C) 351°F (177°C) 232°F (111°C) 145°F (63°C) 109°F (43°C)

86°F (30°C) 351°F (177°C) 244°F (118°C) 158°F (70°C) 122°F (50°C)

77°F (25°C) 351°F (177°C) 257°F (125°C) 171°F (77°C) 135°F (57°C)

68°F (20°C) 351°F (177°C) 270°F (132°C) 183°F (84°C) 145°F (63°C)


149°F (65°C) 297°F (147°C) 160°F (71°C) 88°F (31°C) 55°F (13°C)

140°F (60°C) 307°F (153°C) 171°F (77°C) 97°F (36°C) 66°F (19°C)

131°F (55°C) 318°F (159°C) 181°F (83°C) 108°F (42°C) 77°F (25°C)

122°F (50°C) 329°F (165°C) 192°F (89°C) 118°F (48°C) 88°F (31°C)

113°F (45°C) 340°F (171°C) 203°F (95°C) 129°F (54°C) 97°F (36°C)

104°F (40°C) 351°F (177°C) 214°F (101°C) 140°F (60°C) 108°F (42°C)

95°F (35°C) 351°F (177°C) 223°F (106°C) 151°F (66°C) 118°F (48°C)

86°F (30°C) 351°F (177°C) 234°F (112°C) 160°F (71°C) 129°F (54°C)

77°F (25°C) 351°F (177°C) 244°F (118°C) 171°F (77°C) 140°F (60°C)

68°F (20°C) 351°F (177°C) 255°F (124°C) 181°F (83°C) 151°F (66°C)


B-20



(1) This table is applicable for N1 option codes only.


149°F (65°C) 289°F (143°C) 163°F (73°C) 95°F (35°C) 66°F (19°C)

140°F (60°C) 300°F (149°C) 172°F 78(°C) 104°F (40°C) 75°F (24°C)

131°F (55°C) 309°F (154°C) 183°F (84°C) 115°F (46°C) 84°F (29°C)

122°F (50°C) 318°F (159°C) 192°F (89°C) 124°F (51°C) 95°F (35°C)

113°F (45°C) 329°F (165°C) 201°F (94°C) 135°F (57°C) 104°F (40°C)

104°F (40°C) 338°F (170°C) 212°F (100°C) 144°F (62°C) 115°F (46°C)

95°F (35°C) 349°F (176°C) 221°F (105°C) 153°F (67°C) 124°F (51°C)

86°F (30°C) 351°F (177°C) 232°F (111°C) 163°F (73°C) 135°F (57°C)

77°F (25°C) 351°F (177°C) 241°F (116°C) 172°F (78°C) 144°F (62°C)

68°F (20°C) 351°F (177°C) 252°F (122°C) 183°F (84°C) 153°F (67°C)

3 to 60 inch flowtube sensor size

149°F (65°C) 351°F (177°C) 210°F (99°C) 117°F (47°C) 75°F (24°C)

140°F (60°C) 351°F (177°C) 223°F (106°C) 129°F (54°C) 90°F (32°C)

131°F (55°C) 351°F (177°C) 237°F (114°C) 144°F (62°C) 102°F (39°C)

122°F (50°C) 351°F (177°C) 250°F (121°C) 156°F (69°C) 117°F (47°C)

113°F (45°C) 351°F (177°C) 264°F (129°C) 171°F (77°C) 129°F (54°C)

104°F (40°C) 351°F (177°C) 266°F (130°C) 183°F (84°C) 144°F (62°C)

95°F (35°C) 351°F (177°C) 266°F (130°C) 198°F (92°C) 156°F (69°C)

86°F (30°C) 351°F (177°C) 266°F (130°C) 203°F (95°C) 171°F (77°C)

77°F (25°C) 351°F (177°C) 266°F (130°C) 203°F (95°C) 176°F (80°C)

68°F (20°C) 351°F (177°C) 266°F (130°C) 203°F (95°C) 176°F (80°C)

Maximum Ambient

Temperature

Maximum process temperature °F (°C) per temperature class

T3 T4 T5 T6

B-21



B-22



Appendix C Diagnostics

Diagnostic Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page C-1

Licensing and Enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page C-2

Tunable Empty Pipe Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page C-2

Ground/Wiring Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page C-4

High Process Noise Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page C-5

4-20 mA Loop Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page C-8

8714i Calibration Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page C-9

Rosemount Magnetic Flowmeter Calibration Verification Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page C-17

DIAGNOSTIC AVAILABILITY

Rosemount Magmeters provide device diagnostics that powers PlantWeb and informs the user of abnormal situations throughout the life of the meter - from Installation to Maintenance and Meter Verification. With Rosemount Magmeter diagnostics enabled, users can change their practices to improve plant availability and output, and reduce costs through simplified installation, maintenance and troubleshooting.

Options for Accessing Diagnostics

Rosemount Magmeter Diagnostics can be accessed through the Local Operator Interface (LOI), the 375 Handheld Communicator, and AMS Device Manager.

Access Diagnostics through the LOI for quicker installation, maintenance, and meter verification

Rosemount Magmeter Diagnostics are available through the LOI to make maintenance of every magmeter easier.

Diagnostics Mag User Practice

8732E

HART

Basic

Empty Pipe Process Management •

Electronics Temperature Maintenance •

Coil Fault Maintenance •

Transmitter Faults Maintenance •

Reverse Flow Process Management •

Advanced (Suite 1) DA1 Option

High Process Noise Process Management •

Grounding/Wiring Fault Installation •

Advanced (Suite 2) DA2 Option

8714i Calibration Verification™ Calibration Verification •

4-20 mA Loop Verification Maintenance •

www.rosemount.com



Access Diagnostics through AMS Intelligent Device Manager for the Ultimate Value

The value of the Diagnostics increases significantly when AMS is used. Now the user gets a simplified screen flow and procedures for how to respond to the Diagnostic messages.

LICENSING AND ENABLING

All non-basic diagnostics must be licensed by ordering option code DA1, DA2, or both. In the event that a diagnostic option is not ordered, advanced diagnostics can be licensed in the field through the use of a license key. To obtain a license key, contact your local Rosemount Representative. Each transmitter has a unique license key specific to the diagnostic option code. See the detailed procedures below for entering the license key and enabling the advanced diagnostics.

Licensing the 8732E Diagnostics

For licensing the advanced diagnostics, follow the steps below.

1. Power-up the 8732E transmitter

2. Verify that you have 5.2.1 software or later

3. Determine the Device ID

4. Obtain a License Key from your local Rosemount Representative.

5. Enter License Key

6. Enable Advanced Diagnostics

TUNABLE EMPTY PIPE DETECTION

The Tunable Empty Pipe detection provides a means of minimizing issues and false readings when the pipe is empty. This is most important in batching applications where the pipe may run empty with some regularity.

If the pipe is empty, this diagnostic will activate, set the flow rate to 0, and deliver a PlantWeb alert.

Turning Empty Pipe On/Off

The Empty Pipe diagnostic can be turned on or off as required by the application. If the advanced diagnostics suite 1 (DA1 Option) was ordered, then the Empty Pipe diagnostic will be turned on. If DA1 was not ordered, the default setting is off.

HART Fast Keys 1, 4, 6, 10, 3

LOI Menu Detailed Setup, Device Info, Revision Num, Software Rev

AMS Tab License

HART Fast Keys 1, 4, 6, 6

LOI Menu Detailed Setup, Device Info, Device ID

AMS Tab License

HART Fast Keys 1, 2, 3, 5, 2, 2

LOI Menu Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, Licensing

AMS Tab License

HART Fast Keys 1, 2, 1

LOI Menu Diagnostics, Diag Controls

AMS Tab Diagnostics


LOI Menu Diagnostics, Diag Controls, Empty Pipe

AMS Tab Diagnostics

C-2



C-3

Tunable Empty Pipe Parameters

The Tunable Empty Pipe diagnostic has one read-only parameter, and two parameters that can be custom configured to optimize the diagnostic performance.

Empty Pipe Value

Reads the current Empty Pipe Value. This is a read-only value. This number is a unitless number and is calculated based on multiple installation and process variables such as flowtube sensor type, line size, process fluid properties, and wiring. If the Empty Pipe Value exceeds the Empty Pipe Trigger Level for a specified number of updates, then the Empty Pipe diagnostic alert will activate.

Empty Pipe Trigger Level

Limits: 3 to 2000

This value configures the threshold limit that the Empty Pipe Value must exceed before the Empty Pipe diagnostic alert activates. The default setting from the factory is 100.

Empty Pipe Counts

Limits: 5 to 50

This value configures the number of consecutive updates that the Empty Pipe Value must exceed the Empty Pipe Trigger Level before the Empty Pipe diagnostic alert activates. The default setting from the factory is 5.

Optimizing Tunable Empty Pipe

The Tunable Empty Pipe diagnostic is set at the factory to properly diagnose most applications. If this diagnostic unexpectedly activates, the following procedure can be followed to optimize the Empty Pipe diagnostic for the application.

1. Record the Empty Pipe Value with a full pipe condition.

Example

Full reading = 0.2

2. Record the Empty Pipe Value with an empty pipe condition.

Example

Empty reading = 80.0

3. Set the Empty Pipe Trigger Level to a value between the full and empty readings. For increased sensitivity to empty pipe conditions, set the trigger level to a value closer to the full pipe value.

Example

Set the trigger level to 25.0

4. Set the Empty Pipe Counts to a value corresponding to the desired sensitivity level for the diagnostic. For applications with entrained air or potential air slugs, less sensitivity may be desired.


LOI Menu Diagnostics, Variables, Empty Pipe

AMS Tab Diagnostics


LOI Menu Diagnostics, Basic Diag, Empty Pipe

AMS Tab Diagnostics


LOI Menu Diagnostics, Basic Diag, Empty Pipe

AMS Tab Diagnostics



Example

Set the counts to 10

Troubleshooting Empty Pipe

The following actions can be taken if Empty Pipe detection is unexpected.

1. Verify the flowtube sensor is full.

2. Verify that the flowtube sensor has not been installed with a measurement electrode at the top of the pipe.

3. Decrease the sensitivity by setting the Empty Pipe Trigger Level to a value above the Empty Pipe Value read with a full pipe.

4. Decrease the sensitivity by increasing the Empty Pipe Counts to compensate for process noise. The Empty Pipe Counts is the number of consecutive Empty Pipe Value readings above the Empty Pipe Trigger Level required to set the Empty Pipe diagnostic. The count range is 5-50, with factory default set at 5.

5. Increase process fluid conductivity above 50 microsiemens/cm.

6. Properly connect the wiring between the flowtube sensor and the transmitter. Corresponding terminal block numbers in the flowtube sensor and transmitter must be connected.

7. Perform the flowtube sensor electrical resistance tests. Confirm the resistance reading between coil ground (ground symbol) and coil (1 and 2) is infinity, or open. Confirm the resistance reading between electrode ground (17) and an electrode (18 or 19) is greater than 2 kohms and rises. For more detailed information, consult Table 6-6 on page 6-10.

GROUND/WIRING FAULT DETECTION

The Ground/Wiring Fault Detection diagnostic provides a means of verifying installations are done correctly. If the installation is not wired or grounded properly, this diagnostic will activate and deliver a PlantWeb alert. This diagnostic can also detect if the grounding is lost over-time due to corrosion or another root cause.

Turning Ground/Wiring Fault On/Off

The Ground/Wiring Fault diagnostic can be turned on or off as required by the application. If the advanced diagnostics suite 1 (DA1 Option) was ordered, then the Ground/Wiring Fault diagnostic will be turned on. If DA1 was not ordered or licensed, this diagnostic is not available.

Ground/Wiring Fault Parameters

The Ground/Wiring Fault diagnostic has one read-only parameter. It does not have any configurable parameters.

Line Noise

Reads the current amplitude of the Line Noise. This is a read-only value. This number is a measure of the signal strength at 50/60 Hz. If the Line Noise value exceeds 5 mV, then the Ground/Wiring Fault diagnostic alert will activate.


LOI Menu Diagnostics, Diag Controls, Ground/Wiring

AMS Tab Diagnostics


LOI Menu Diagnostics, Variables, Line Noise

AMS Tab Diagnostics

C-4



Troubleshooting Ground/Wiring Fault

The transmitter detected high levels of 50/60 Hz noise caused by improper wiring or poor process grounding.

1. Verify that the transmitter is earth grounded.

2. Connect ground rings, grounding electrode, lining protector, or grounding straps. Grounding diagrams can be found in “Grounding” on page 5-12.

3. Verify flowtube sensor is full.

4. Verify wiring between flowtube sensor and transmitter is prepared properly. Shielding should be stripped back less than 1 in. (25 mm).

5. Use separate shielded twisted pairs for wiring between flowtube sensor and transmitter.

6. Properly connect the wiring between the flowtube sensor and the transmitter. Corresponding terminal block numbers in the flowtube sensor and transmitter must be connected.

Ground/Wiring Fault Functionality

The transmitter continuously monitors signal amplitudes over a wide range of frequencies. For the Ground/Wiring Fault diagnostic, the transmitter specifically looks at the signal amplitude at frequencies of 50 Hz and 60 Hz which are the common AC cycle frequencies found throughout the world. If the amplitude of the signal at either of these frequencies exceeds 5 mV, that is an indication that there is a ground or wiring issue and that stray electrical signals are getting into the transmitter. The diagnostic alert will activate indicating that the ground and wiring of the installation should be carefully reviewed.

HIGH PROCESS NOISE DETECTION

The High Process Noise diagnostic detects if there is a process condition causing unstable or noisy readings, but the noise is not real flow variation. One common cause of high process noise is slurry flow, like pulp stock or mining slurries. Other conditions that cause this diagnostic to activate are high levels of chemical reaction or entrained gas in the liquid. If unusual noise or variation is seen, this diagnostic will activate and deliver a PlantWeb alert. If this situation exists and is left without remedy, it will add additional uncertainty and noise to the flow reading.

Turning High Process Noise On/Off

The High Process Noise diagnostic can be turned on or off as required by the application. If the advanced diagnostics suite 1 (DA1 Option) was ordered, then the High Process Noise diagnostic will be turned on. If DA1 was not ordered or licensed, this diagnostic is not available.


LOI Menu Diagnostics, Diag Controls, Process Noise

AMS Tab Diagnostics

C-5



High Process Noise Parameters

The High Process Noise diagnostic has two read-only parameters. It does not have any configurable parameters. This diagnostic requires that flow be present in the pipe.


Reads the current value of the signal to noise ratio at the coil drive frequency of 5 Hz. This is a read-only value. This number is a measure of the signal strength at 5 Hz relative to the amount of process noise. If the transmitter is operating in 5 Hz mode, and the signal to noise ratio remains below 25 for one minute, then the High Process Noise diagnostic alert will activate.


Reads the current value of the signal to noise ratio at the coil drive frequency of 37 Hz. This is a read-only value. This number is a measure of the signal strength at 37 Hz relative to the amount of process noise. If the transmitter is operating in 37 Hz mode, and the signal to noise ratio remains below 25 for one minute, then the High Process Noise diagnostic alert will activate.

Troubleshooting High Process Noise

The transmitter detected high levels of process noise. If the signal to noise ratio is less than 25 while operating in 5 Hz mode, proceed with the following steps:

1. Increase transmitter coil drive frequency to 37 Hz (refer to “Coil Drive Frequency” on page 4-13) and, if possible, perform Auto Zero function (refer to “Auto Zero” on page 4-12).

2. Verify flowtube is electrically connected to the process with grounding electrode, grounding rings with grounding straps, or lining protector with grounding straps.

3. If possible, redirect chemical additions downstream of the magmeter.

4. Verify process fluid conductivity is above 10 microsiemens/cm.

If the signal to noise ratio is less than 25 while operating in 37 Hz mode, proceed with the following steps:


LOI Menu Diagnostics, Variables, 5Hz SNR

AMS Tab Diagnostics


LOI Menu Diagnostics, Variables, 37Hz SNR

AMS Tab Diagnostics

C-6



1. Turn on the Digital Signal Processing (DSP) technology and follow the setup procedure (refer to Appendix D: Digital Signal Processing). This will minimize the level of damping in the flow measurement and control loop while also stabilizing the reading to minimize valve actuation.

2. Increase damping to stabilize the signal (refer to “PV Damping” on page 3-11). This will add dead-time to the control loop.

3. Move to a Rosemount High-Signal flowmeter system. This flowmeter will deliver a stable signal by increasing the amplitude of the flow signal by up to ten times to increase the signal to noise ratio. For example if the signal to noise ratio (SNR) of a standard magmeter is 5, the High-Signal would have a SNR of 50 in the same application. The Rosemount High-Signal system is comprised of the 8707 flowtube sensor which has modified coils and magnetics and the 8712H High-Signal transmitter.

NOTEIn applications where very high levels of noise are a concern, it is recommended that a dual-calibrated Rosemount High-Signal 8707 flowtube sensor be used. These flowtube sensors can be calibrated to run at lower coil drive current supplied by the standard Rosemount transmitters, but can also be upgraded by changing to the 8712H High-Signal transmitter.

High Process Noise Functionality

The High Process Noise diagnostic is useful for detecting situations where the process fluid may be causing electrical noise resulting in a poor measurement from the magnetic flow meter. There are three basic types of process noise that can affect the performance of the magnetic flowmeter system.

1/f Noise

This type of noise has higher amplitudes at lower frequencies, but generally degrades over increasing frequencies. Potential sources of 1/f noise include chemical mixing and the general background noise of the plant.

Spike Noise

This type of noise generally results in a high amplitude signal at specific frequencies which can vary depending on the source of the noise. Common sources of spike noise include chemical injections directly upstream of the flowmeter, hydraulic pumps, and slurry flows with low concentrations of particles in the stream. The particles bounce off of the electrode generating a “spike” in the electrode signal. An example of this type of flow stream would be a recycle flow in a paper mill.

White Noise

This type of noise results in a high amplitude signal that is relatively constant over the frequency range. Common sources of white noise include chemical reactions or mixing that occurs as the fluid passes through the flowmeter and high concentration slurry flows where the particulates are constantly passing over the electrode head. An example of this type of flow stream would be a basis weight stream in a paper mill.

C-7



The transmitter continuously monitors signal amplitudes over a wide range of frequencies. For the high process noise diagnostic, the transmitter specifically looks at the signal amplitude at frequencies of 2.5 Hz, 7.5 Hz, 32.5 Hz, and 42.5 Hz. The transmitter uses the values from 2.5 and 7.5 Hz and calculates an average noise level. This average is compared to the amplitude of the signal at 5 Hz. If the signal amplitude is not 25 times greater than the noise level, and the coil drive frequency is set at 5 Hz, the High Process Noise diagnostic will trip indicating that the flow signal may be compromised. The transmitter performs the same analysis around the 37.5 Hz coil drive frequency using the 32.5 Hz and 42.5 Hz values to establish a noise level.

4-20 MA LOOP VERIFICATION

The 4-20 mA Loop Verification diagnostic provides a means of verifying the analog output loop is functioning properly. This is a manually initiated diagnostic test. This diagnostic checks the integrity of the analog loop and provides a health status of the circuit. If the verification does not pass, this will be highlighted in the results given at the end of the check.

Initiating 4-20 mA Loop Verification

The 4-20 mA Loop Verification diagnostic can be initiated as required by the application. If the advanced diagnostics suite 2 (DA2 Option) was ordered, then the 4-20 mA Loop Verification diagnostic will be available. If DA2 was not ordered or licensed, this diagnostic is not available.

4-20 mA Loop Verification Parameters

The 4-20 mA Loop Verification diagnostic has one read-only parameter. It does not have any configurable parameters.

4-20 mA Loop Verification Test Result

Shows the results of the 4-20 mA Loop Verification test as either passed or failed.

Troubleshooting 4-20 mA Loop Verification

The following steps should be followed to identify the cause of the diagnostic failure.

• Check analog loop wiring

• Perform a manual loop test

• Check internal/external power

• Perform D/A Trim

• Check loop resistance

• Replace electronics


LOI Menu Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, 4-20 mA Verify, 4-20 mA Verify

AMS Context Menu, Diagnostics and Tests, Analog Output Verification


LOI Menu Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, 4-20 mA Verify, View Results

AMS

C-8



C-9

4-20 mA Loop Verification Functionality

The 4-20 mA Loop Verification diagnostic is useful for testing the analog output when errors are suspected. The diagnostic tests the analog loop at 5 points:

• 4 mA

• 12 mA

• 20 mA

• Low alarm level

• High alarm level

8714I CALIBRATION VERIFICATION

The 8714i Calibration Verification diagnostic provides a means of verifying the flowmeter is within calibration without removing the flowtube sensor from the process. This is a manually initiated diagnostic test that provides a review of the transmitter and flowtube sensors critical parameters as a means to document verification of calibration. The results of running this diagnostic provide the deviation amount from expected values and a pass/fail summary against user-defined criteria for the application and conditions.

Initiating 8714i Calibration Verification

The 8714i Calibration Verification diagnostic can be initiated as required by the application. If the advanced diagnostic suite (DA2) was ordered, then the 8714i Calibration Verification diagnostic will be available. If DA2 was not ordered or licensed, this diagnostic will not be available.

Flowtube Sensor Signature Parameters

The flowtube sensor signature describes the magnetic behavior of the sensor. Based on Faraday’s law, the induced voltage measured on the electrodes is proportional to the magnetic field strength. Thus, any changes in the magnetic field will result in a calibration shift of the flowtube sensor.

Establishing the baseline flowtube sensor signature

The first step in running the 8714i Calibration Verification test is establishing the reference signature that the test will use as the baseline for comparison. This is accomplished by having the transmitter take a signature of the flowtube sensor.

Having the transmitter take an initial flowtube sensor signature when first installed will provide the baseline for the verification tests that are done in the future. The flowtube sensor signature should be taken during the start-up process when the transmitter is first connected to the flowtube sensor, with a full line, and ideally with no flow in the line. Running the flowtube sensor signature procedure when there is flow in the line is permissible, but this may introduce some noise into the signature measurements. If an empty pipe condition exists, then the flowtube sensor signature should only be run for the coils.

Once the flowtube sensor signature process is complete, the measurements taken during this procedure are stored in non-volatile memory to prevent loss in the event of a power interruption to the meter.


LOI Menu Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, 8714i, Run 8714i

AMS Tab Context Menu, Diagnostics and Tests, 8714i Calibration Verification

HART Fast Keys 1, 2, 3, 3, 3, 2

LOI Menu Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, 8714i, Tube Signature, Re-Signature

AMS Tab Context Menu, Diagnostics and Tests,



8714i Calibration Verification Test Parameters

The 8714i has a multitude of parameters that set the test criteria, test conditions, and scope of the calibration verification test.

Test Conditions for the 8714i Calibration Verification

There are three possible test conditions that the 8714i Calibration Verification test can be initiated under. This parameter is set at the time that the Flowtube Sensor Signature or 8714i Calibration Verification test is initiated.

No Flow

Run the 8714i Calibration Verification test with a full pipe and no flow in the line. Running the 8714i Calibration Verification test under this condition provides the most accurate results and the best indication of magnetic flowmeter health.

Flowing, Full

Run the 8714i Calibration Verification test with a full pipe and flow in the line. Running the 8714i Calibration Verification test under this condition provides the ability to verify the magnetic flowmeter health without shutting down the process flow in applications where a shutdown is not possible. Running the calibration verification under flowing conditions can cause false fails if the flow rate is not at a steady flow, or if there is process noise present.

Empty Pipe

Run the 8714i Calibration Verification test with an empty pipe. Running the 8714i Calibration Verification test under this condition provides the ability to verify the magnetic flowmeter health with an empty pipe. Running the calibration verification under empty pipe conditions will not check the electrode circuit health.

8714i Calibration Verification Test Criteria

The 8714i Calibration Verification diagnostic provides the ability for the user to define the test criteria that the verification must test to. The test criteria can be set for each of the flow conditions discussed above.

No Flow

Set the test criteria for the No Flow condition. The factory default for this value is set to two percent with limits configurable between one and ten percent.

Flowing, Full

Set the test criteria for the Flowing, Full condition. The factory default for this value is set to three percent with limits configurable between one and ten percent.


LOI Menu Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, 8714i, Test Criteria

AMS Tab 8714i

HART Fast Keys 1, 2, 3, 3, 4, 1

LOI Menu Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, 8714i, Test Criteria, No Flow

AMS Tab 8714i

HART Fast Keys 1, 2, 3, 3, 4, 2

LOI Menu Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, 8714i, Test Criteria, Flowing Full

AMS Tab 8714i

C-10



Empty Pipe

Set the test criteria for the Empty Pipe condition. The factory default for this value is set to three percent with limits configurable between one and ten percent.

8714i Calibration Verification Test Scope

The 8714i Calibration Verification can be used to verify the entire flowmeter installation, or individual parts such as the transmitter or flowtube sensor. This parameter is set at the time that the 8714i Calibration Verification test is initiated.

All

Run the 8714i Calibration Verification test and verify the entire flowmeter installation. This parameter results in the calibration verification performing the transmitter calibration verification, tube calibration verification, coil health check, and electrode health check. Transmitter calibration and tube calibration are verified to the percentage associated with the test condition selected when the test was initiated.

Transmitter

Run the 8714i Calibration Verification test on the transmitter only. This results in the verification test only checking the transmitter calibration to the limits of the test criteria selected when the 8714i Calibration Verification test was initiated.

Flowtube Sensor

Run the 8714i Calibration Verification test on the flowtube sensor only. This results in the verification test checking the flowtube sensor calibration to the limits of the test criteria selected when the 8714i Calibration Verification test was initiated, verifying the coil circuit health, and the electrode circuit health.

8714i Calibration Verification Test Results Parameters

Once the 8714i Calibration Verification test is initiated, the transmitter will make several measurements to verify the transmitter calibration, tube calibration, coil circuit health, and electrode circuit health. The results of these tests can be reviewed and recorded on the calibration verification report found on page C-17. This report can be used to validate that the meter is within the required calibration limits to comply with governmental regulatory agencies such as the Environmental Protection Agency or Food and Drug Administration.

HART Fast Keys 1, 2, 3, 3, 4, 3

LOI Menu Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, 8714i, Test Criteria, Empty Pipe

AMS Tab 8714i

HART Fast Keys 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 1


AMS Context Menu, Diagnostics and Tests, 8714i Calibration Verification

HART Fast Keys 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 2



HART Fast Keys 1, 2, 3, 3, 1, 3



C-11



Viewing the 8714i Calibration Verification Results

Depending on the method used to view the results, they will be displayed in either a menu structure, as a method, or in the report format. When using the HART Field Communicator, each individual component can be viewed as a menu item. When using the LOI, the parameters are viewed as a method using the left arrow key to cycle through the results. In AMS the calibration report is populated with the necessary data eliminating the need to manually complete the report found on page C-17.

NOTE When using AMS there are two possible methods that can be used to print the report.

Method one involves taking a PrntScrn picture of the 8714i Report tab on the status screen and pasting it into a word processing program. The PrntScrn button will capture all items on the screen so the image will need to be cropped and resized in order to get only the report.

Method two involves using the print feature within AMS while on the status screen. This will result in a printout of all of the information stored on the status tabs. Page two of the report will contain all of the necessary calibration verification result data.

The results are displayed in the following order:

Test Condition

Review the test condition that the 8714i Calibration Verification test was performed under.

Test Criteria

Review the test criteria used to determine the results of the calibration verification tests.

8714i Result

Displays the overall result of the 8714i Calibration Verification test as either a Pass or Fail.

Simulated Velocity

Displays the simulated velocity used to verify the transmitter calibration.

HART Fast Keys 1, 2, 3, 3, 2, 1

LOI Menu Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, 8714i, View Results

AMS

HART Fast Keys 1, 2, 3, 3, 2, 2


AMS

HART Fast Keys 1,2,3,3,2,3


AMS



AMS

C-12



Actual Velocity

Displays the velocity measured by the transmitter during the transmitter calibration verification process.

Velocity Deviation

Displays the deviation in the actual velocity compared to the simulated velocity in terms of a percentage. This percentage is then compared to the test criteria to determine if the transmitter is within calibration limits.

Transmitter Calibration Verification

Displays the results of the transmitter calibration verification test as either a Pass or Fail.

Flowtube Sensor Calibration Deviation

Displays the deviation in the flowtube sensor calibration. This value tells how much the flowtube sensor calibration has shifted from the original baseline signature. This percentage is compared to the test criteria to determine if the flowtube sensor is within calibration limits.

Flowtube Sensor Calibration Verification

Displays the results of the flowtube sensor calibration verification test as either a Pass or Fail.

Coil Circuit Verification

Displays the results of the coil circuit health check as either a Pass or Fail.

Electrode Circuit Verification

Displays the results of the electrode circuit health check as either a Pass or Fail.



AMS



AMS



AMS



AMS



AMS



AMS

HART Fast Keys 1,2,3,3,2,10 (To get to this value, the down arrow must be used to scroll

through the menu list)


AMS

C-13



Optimizing the 8714i Calibration Verification

The 8714i Calibration Verification diagnostic can be optimized by setting the test criteria to the desired levels necessary to meet the compliance requirements of the application. The following examples below will provide some guidance on how to set these levels.

Example

An effluent meter must be certified every year to comply with Environmental Protection Agency and Pollution Control Agency standards. These governmental agencies require that the meter be certified to five percent accuracy.

Since this is an effluent meter, shutting down the process may not be viable. In this instance the 8714i Calibration Verification test will be performed under flowing conditions. Set the test criteria for Flowing, Full to five percent to meet the requirements of the governmental agencies.

Example

A pharmaceutical company requires bi-annual verification of meter calibration on a critical feed line for one of their products. This is an internal standard, but plant requirements require a calibration record be kept on-hand. Meter calibration on this process must meet one percent. The process is a batch process so it is possible to perform the calibration verification with the line full and with no flow.

Since the 8714i Calibration Verification test can be run under no flow conditions, set the test criteria for No Flow to one percent to comply with the necessary plant standards.

Example

A food and beverage company requires an annual calibration of a meter on a product line. The plant standard calls for the accuracy to be three percent or better. They manufacture this product in batches, and the measurement cannot be interrupted when a batch is in process. When the batch is complete, the line goes empty.

Since there is no means of performing the 8714i Calibration Verification test while there is product in the line, the test must be performed under empty pipe conditions. The test criteria for Empty Pipe should be set to three percent, and it should be noted that the electrode circuit health cannot be verified.

C-14



C-15

Troubleshooting the 8714i Calibration Verification Test

In the event that the 8714i Calibration Verification test fails, the following steps can be used to determine the appropriate course of action. Begin by reviewing the 8714i results to determine the specific test that failed.

Figure C-1. Troubleshooting the 8714i Calibration Verification Test Table

8714i Calibration Verification Functionality

The 8714i Calibration Verification diagnostic functions by taking a baseline flowtube sensor signature and then comparing measurements taken during the verification test to these baseline results.

Flowtube Signature Values

The flowtube sensor signature describes the magnetic behavior of the sensor. Based on Faraday’s law, the induced voltage measured on the electrodes is proportional to the magnetic field strength. Thus, any changes in the magnetic field will result in a calibration shift of the flowtube sensor. Having the transmitter take an initial flowtube sensor signature when first installed will provide the baseline for the verification tests that are done in the future. There are three specific measurements that are stored in the transmitter’s non-volatile memory that are used when performing the calibration verification.

Coil Circuit Resistance

The Coil Circuit Resistance is a measurement of the coil circuit health. This value is used as a baseline to determine if the coil circuit is still operating correctly when the 8714i Calibration Verification diagnostic is initiated.

Coil Signature

The Coil Signature is a measurement of the magnetic field strength. This value is used as a baseline to determine if a flowtube sensor calibration shift has occurred when the 8714i Calibration Verification diagnostic is initiated.

Test Potential Causes of Failure Steps to Correct

Transmitter Calibration

Verification Test Failed• Unstable flow rate during

the verification test

• Noise in the process

• Transmitter drift

• Faulty electronics

• Perform the test with no

flow in the pipe

• Check calibration with an

external standard like the

8714D

• Perform a digital trim

• Replace the electronics

Flowtube Sensor Calibration

Verification Failed• Moisture in the terminal

block of the flowtube

sensor

• Calibration shift caused by

heat cycling or vibration

• Remove the flowtube

sensor and send back for

recalibration.

Coil Circuit Health Failed • Moisture in the terminal


sensor

• Shorted Coil

• Perform the flowtube

sensor checks detailed on

page C-17.

Electrode Circuit Health

Failed• Moisture in the terminal


sensor

• Coated Electrodes

• Shorted Electrodes

• Perform the flowtube

sensor checks detailed on

page C-17.

HART Fast Keys 1,2,3,3,3,1,1

LOI Menu Diagnostics, Advanced Diag, 8714i, Tube Signature, Values

AMS



AMS



Electrode Circuit Resistance

The Electrode Circuit Resistance is a measurement of the electrode circuit health. This value is used as a baseline to determine if the electrode circuit is still operating correctly when the 8714i Calibration Verification diagnostic is initiated.

8714i Calibration Verification Measurements

The 8714i Calibration Verification test will make measurements of the coil resistance, coil signature, and electrode resistance and compare these values to the values taken during the flowtube sensor signature process to determine the flowtube sensor calibration deviation, the coil circuit health, and the electrode circuit health. In addition, the measurements taken by this test can provide additional information when troubleshooting the meter.

Coil Circuit Resistance

The Coil Circuit Resistance is a measurement of the coil circuit health. This value is compared to the coil circuit resistance baseline measurement taken during the flowtube signature process to determine coil circuit health.

Coil Signature

The Coil Signature is a measurement of the magnetic field strength. This value is compared to the coil signature baseline measurement taken during the flowtube signature process to determine tube calibration deviation.

Electrode Circuit Resistance

The Electrode Circuit Resistance is a measurement of the electrode circuit health. This value is compared to the electrode circuit resistance baseline measurement taken during the flowtube signature process to determine electrode circuit health.



AMS



AMS



AMS



AMS

C-16



ROSEMOUNT MAGNETIC FLOWMETER CALIBRATION VERIFICATION REPORTCalibration Verification Report Parameters

User Name: _____________________________________________

Calibration Conditions: □ Internal □ External

Tag #:__________________________________________________

Test Conditions: □ Flowing □ No Flow, Full Pipe □ Empty Pipe

Flowmeter Information and Configuration

Software Tag:____________________________________________ PV URV (20 mA scale):____________________________________

Calibration Number:_______________________________________ PV LRV (4 mA scale):_____________________________________

Line Size:_______________________________________________ PV Damping:____________________________________________

Transmitter Calibration Verification Results Flowtube Sensor Calibration Verification Results

Simulated Velocity:_______________________________________ Flowtube Deviation %:_____________________________________

Actual Velocity:__________________________________________ Flowtube Sensor: PASS / FAIL / NOT TESTED

Deviation %:____________________________________________ Coil Circuit Test: PASS / FAIL / NOT TESTED

Transmitter: PASS / FAIL / NOT TESTED Electrode Circuit Test: PASS / FAIL / NOT TESTED

Summary of Calibration Verification Results

Verification Results: The result of the flowmeter verification test is: PASSED / FAILED

Verification Criteria: This meter was verified to be functioning within _____________ % of deviation from the original test parameters.

Signature:______________________________________________ Date:__________________________________________________

C-17



C-18



Appendix D Digital Signal Processing

Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page D-1

Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page D-2

SAFETY MESSAGES Instructions and procedures in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Please read the following safety messages before performing any operation described in this section.

Warnings


• Verify that the operating atmosphere of the flowtube

and transmitter is consistent with the appropriate

hazardous locations certifications.

• Do not remove the transmitter cover in explosive atmospheres

when the circuit is alive.

• Before connecting a HART-based communicator in an explosive atmosphere,

make sure the instruments in the loop are

installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive field wiring

practices.

• Both transmitter covers must be fully engaged to meet

explosion-proof requirements.

Failure to follow safe installation and servicing guidelines could result in death or serious injury:

• Make sure only qualified personnel perform the installation.

• Do not perform any service other than those contained in this manual unless

qualified.

Process leaks could result in death or serious injury:

• The electrode compartment may contain line pressure; it must be depressurized

before the cover is removed.

High voltage that may be present on leads could cause electrical shock:

• Avoid contact with leads and terminals.

www.rosemount.com



PROCEDURES If the output of your Rosemount 8732E is unstable, first check the wiring and grounding associated with the magnetic flowmeter system. Ensure that the following conditions are met:

• Ground straps are attached to the adjacent flange or ground ring?

• Grounding rings, lining protectors, or grounding electrodes are being used in lined or nonconductive piping?

• Both of the shields attached at both ends?

The causes of unstable transmitter output can usually be traced to extraneous voltages on the measuring electrodes. This “process noise” can arise from several causes including electrochemical reactions between the fluid and the electrode, chemical reactions in the process itself, free ion activity in the fluid, or some other disturbance of the fluid/electrode capacitive layer. In such noisy applications, an analysis of the frequency spectrum reveals process noise that typically becomes significant below 15 Hz.

In some cases, the effects of process noise may be sharply reduced by elevating the coil drive frequency above the 15 Hz region. The Rosemount 8732E coil drive mode is selectable between the standard 5 Hz and the noise-reducing 37 Hz. See “Coil Drive Frequency” on page 3-15 for instructions on how to change the coil drive mode to 37 Hz.

Auto Zero To ensure optimum accuracy when using 37 Hz coil drive mode, there is an auto zero function that must be initiated during start-up. The auto zero operation is also discussed in the start-up and configuration sections. When using 37 Hz coil drive mode it is important to zero the system for the specific application and installation.

The auto zero procedure should be performed only under the following conditions:

• With the transmitter and flowtube installed in their final positions. This procedure is not applicable on the bench.

• With the transmitter in 37 Hz coil drive mode. Never attempt this procedure with the transmitter in 5 Hz coil drive mode.

• With the flowtube full of process fluid at zero flow.

These conditions should cause an output equivalent to zero flow.

Signal Processing If the 37 Hz coil drive mode has been set, and the output is still unstable, the damping and signal processing function should be used. It is important to set the coil drive mode to 37 Hz first, so the loop response time is not increased.

The 8732E provides for a very easy and straightforward start-up, and also incorporates the capability to deal with difficult applications that have previously manifested themselves in a noisy output signal. In addition to selecting a higher coil drive frequency (37 Hz vs. 5 Hz) to isolate the flow signal from the process noise, the 8732E microprocessor can actually scrutinize each input based on three user-defined parameters to reject the noise specific to the application.

D-2



This software technique, known as signal processing, “qualifies” individual flow signals based on historic flow information and three user-definable parameters, plus an on/off control. These parameters are:

1. Number of samples: The number of samples function sets the amount of time that inputs are collected and used to calculate the average

value. Each second is divided into tenths (1/10 ) with the number of

samples equaling the number of 1/10 second increments used to calculate the average. Factory Preset Value = 90 samples.

For example, a value of:

1 averages the inputs over the past 1/10 second

10 averages the inputs over the past 1 second

100 averages the inputs over the past 10 seconds

125 averages the inputs over the past 12.5 seconds

2. Maximum Percent Limit: The tolerance band set up on either side of the running average, referring to percent deviation from the average. Values within the limit are accepted while value outside the limit are scrutinized to determine if they are a noise spike or an actual flow change. Factory Preset Value = 2 percent.

3. Time Limit: Forces the output and running average values to the new value of an actual flow rate change that is outside the percent limit boundaries, thereby limiting response time to real flow changes to the time limit value rather than the length of the running average. Factory Preset Value = 2 seconds.

How Does It Really Work?

The best way to explain this is with the help of an example, plotting flow rate versus time

Figure D-1. Signal Processing .

8712-0292A

FlowRate

Max%

Limit

Time Limit12 Samples = 1

Second

Time

D-3



x: Input flow signal from flowtube.

o: Average flow signals and transmitter output, determined by the “number

of samples” parameter.

Tolerance band, determined by the “percent limit” parameter.

– Upper value = average flow + [(percent limit/100) average flow]

– Lower value = average flow – [(percent limit/100) average flow]

� This scenario is that of a typical non-noisy flow. The input flow signal is

within the percent limit tolerance band, therefore qualifying itself as a

good input. In this case the new input is

added directly into the running average and is passed on as a part of the

average value to the output.

� This signal is outside the tolerance band and therefore is held in memory

until the next input can be evaluated. The running average is provided as

the output.

� The previous signal currently held in memory is simply rejected

as a noise spike since the next flow input signal is back within the

tolerance band. This results in complete rejection of noise spikes rather

than allowing them to be “averaged” with the good signals as occurs in

the typical analog damping circuits.

� As in Number �above, the input is outside the tolerance band.

This first signal is held in memory and compared to the next signal. The

next signal is also outside the tolerance band (in the same direction), so

the stored value is added to the running average as the next input and

the running average begins to slowly approach the new input level.

� To avoid waiting for the slowly incrementing average value to catch up to

the new level input, a shortcut is provided. This is the “time limit”

parameter. The user can set this parameter to eliminate the slow

ramping of the output toward the new input level.

When Should Signal Processing Be Used?

The Rosemount 8732E offers three separate functions that can be used in series for improving a noisy output. The first step is to toggle the coil drive to the 37 Hz mode and initialize with an auto zero. If the output is still noisy at this stage, signal processing should be actuated and, if necessary, tuned to match the specific application. Finally, if the signal is still too unstable, the traditional damping function can be used.

NOTEFailure to complete an Auto Zero will result in a small (<1%) error in the output. While the output level will be offset by the error, the repeatability will not be affected.

D-4



Appendix E Universal Flowtube Wiring Diagrams

Rosemount Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page E-3

Brooks Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page E-6

Perform the Universal Auto Trim function. . . . . . . . . . . . page E-5

Fischer And Porter Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page E-8

Foxboro Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page E-15

Kent Veriflux VTC Flowtube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page E-19

Kent Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page E-20

Krohne Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page E-21

Taylor Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page E-22

Yamatake Honeywell Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page E-24

Yokogawa Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page E-25

Generic Manufacturer Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page E-26

The wiring diagrams in this section illustrate the proper connections between the Rosemount 8732E and most flowtubes currently on the market. Specific diagrams are included for most models, and where information for a particular model of a manufacturer is not available, a generic drawing pertaining to that manufacturers’ flowtubes is provided. If the manufacturer for your flowtube is not included, see the drawing for generic connections.

www.rosemount.com



Rosemount Transmitter Flowtube Manufacturer Page Number

Rosemount

Rosemount 8732E Rosemount 8705, 8707, 8711 page E-3

Rosemount 8732E Rosemount 8701 page E-4

Brooks

Rosemount 8732E Model 5000 page E-6

Rosemount 8732E Model 7400 page E-7

Endress and Hauser page E-5

Rosemount 8732E Generic Wiring for Flowtube page E-7

Fischer and Porter page E-8

Rosemount 8732E Model 10D1418 page E-9


Rosemount 8732E Model 10D1430 (Remote) page E-11


Rosemount 8732E Model 10D1465, 10D1475 (Integral) page E-13

Rosemount 8732E Generic Wiring for Flowtubes page E-14

Foxboro

Rosemount 8732E Series 1800 page E-15

Rosemount 8732E Series 1800 (Version 2) page E-16



Kent

Rosemount 8732E Veriflux VTC page E-19


Krohne


Taylor



Yamatake Honeywell


Yokogawa


Generic Manufacturer Wiring page E-26


E-2



ROSEMOUNT FLOWTUBES

Rosemount 8705/8707/8711/8721 Flowtubes to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter

Connect coil drive and electrode cables as shown in Figure .

Figure E-1. Wiring Diagram to a Rosemount 8732E Transmitter

Table E-1. Rosemount 8705/8707/8711/8721 Flowtube Wiring Connections

Rosemount 8732E Transmitters Rosemount 8705/8707/8711/8721 Flowtubes

1 1

2 2

17 17

18 18

19 19

This is a pulsed DC magnetic flowmeter.

Do not connect AC power to the flowtube or to terminals 1 and 2 of the transmitter, or replacement of the

electronics board will be necessary.

E-3



Rosemount 8701 Flowtube to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter

Connect coil drive and electrode cables as shown in Figure E-2 on page E-4.

Figure E-2. Wiring Diagram for Rosemount 8701 Flowtube and Rosemount 8732E Transmitter

Figure E-3. Rosemount 8701 Flowtube Wiring Connections

2

1

19

18

17

ROSEMOUNT 8701 FLOWTUBE

ROSEMOUNT 8732E TRANSMITTER

Rosemount 8732E Rosemount 8701 Flowtubes

1 1

2 2

17 17

18 18

19 19




E-4



Connecting Flowtubes of Other Manufacturers

Before connecting another manufacturer’s flowtube to the Rosemount 8732E transmitter, it is necessary to perform the following functions.

1. Turn off the AC power to the flowtube and transmitter. Failure to do so could result in electrical shock or damage to the transmitter.

2. Verify that the coil drive cables between the flowtube and the transmitter are not connected to any other equipment.

3. Label the coil drive cables and electrode cables for connection to the transmitter.

4. Disconnect the wires from the existing transmitter.

5. Remove the existing transmitter. Mount the new transmitter. See “Mount the Transmitter” on page 2-3.

6. Verify that the flowtube coil is configured for series connection. Other manufacturers flowtubes may be wired in either a series or parallel circuit. All Rosemount magnetic flowtubes are wired in a series circuit. (Other manufacturers AC flowtubes (AC coils) wired for 220V operation are typically wired in parallel and must be rewired in series.)

7. Verify that the flowtube is in good working condition. Use the manufacturer’s recommended test procedure for verification of flowtube condition. Perform the basic checks:

a. Check the coils for shorts or open circuits.

b. Check the flowtube liner for wear or damage.

c. Check the electrodes for shorts, leaks, or damage.

8. Connect the flowtube to the transmitter in accordance with reference wiring diagrams. See Appendix E: Universal Flowtube Wiring Diagrams for specific drawings.

9. Connect and verify all connections between the flowtube and the transmitter, then apply power to the transmitter.

10. Perform the Universal Auto Trim function.

This is a pulsed DC magnetic flowmeter. Do not connect AC power to the flowtube or to terminals 1 and 2 of the transmitter, or replacement of the electronics board will be

necessary.

E-5



BROOKS FLOWTUBES Connect coil drive and electrode cables as shown in Figure E-4.

Model 5000 Flowtube to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter

Figure E-4. Wiring Diagram for Brooks Flowtube Model 5000 and Rosemount 8732E

Figure E-5. Brooks Model 5000 Flowtube Wiring Connections

Rosemount 8732E Brooks Flowtubes Model 5000

1 1

2 2

17 17

18 18

19 19

BROOKS MODEL 5000





E-6



Model 7400 Flowtube to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter

Connect coil drive and electrode cables as shown in Figure E-6.

Figure E-6. Wiring Diagram for Brooks Flowtube Model 7400 and Rosemount 8732E

ENDRESS AND HAUSER FLOWTUBES


Table E-2. Brooks Model 7400 Flowtube Wiring Connections

Rosemount 8732E Brooks Flowtubes Model 7400

1 Coils +

2 Coils –

17 Shield

18 Electrode +

19 Electrode –

BROOKS MODEL 7400





E-7



Endress and Hauser Flowtube to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter

Figure E-7. Wiring Diagram for Endress and Hauser Flowtubes and Rosemount 8732E

FISCHER AND PORTER FLOWTUBES


Table E-3. Endress and Hauser Flowtube Wiring Connections

Rosemount 8732E Endress and Hauser Flowtubes

1 41

2 42

14

17 4

18 5

19 7

41

42

4

5

7

Electrodes

Coils


ENDRESS AND HAUSER FLOWTUBES




E-8



Model 10D1418 Flowtube to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter

Figure E-8. Wiring Diagram for Fischer and Porter Flowtube Model 10D1418 and Rosemount 8732E

ROSEMOUNT 8732E TRANSMITTERElectrode Connections

U1

U2

G

8

6

7

L1

L2

5

3

2

1

Coil Connections

Table E-4. Fischer and Porter Model 10D1418 Flowtube Wiring Connections

Rosemount 8732E Fischer and Porter Model 10D1418 Flowtubes

1 L1

2 L2

Chassis Ground

17 3

18 1

19 2




E-9



Model 10D1419 Flowtube to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter


Figure E-9. Wiring Diagram for Fischer and Porter Flowtube Model 10D1419 and Rosemount 8732E


3

2

1

18

L1

L2

16

17

Electrode Connections

Coil Connections

Table E-5. Fischer and Porter Model 10D1419 Flowtube Wiring Connections

Rosemount 8732E Fischer and Porter Model 10D1419 Flowtubes

1 L1

2 L2

3

17 3

18 1

19 2




E-10



Model 10D1430 Flowtube (Remote) to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter


Figure E-10. Wiring Diagram for Fischer and Porter Flowtube Model 10D1430 (Remote) and Rosemount 8732E


1

2

3

G

L1

8

Coil Connections


Table E-6. Fischer and Porter Model 10D1430 (Remote) Flowtube Wiring Connections

Rosemount 8732E

Fischer and Porter Model 10D1430 (Remote)

Flowtubes

1 L1

2 8

G

17 3

18 1

19 2




E-11



Model 10D1430 Flowtube (Integral) to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter


Figure E-11. Wiring Diagram for Fischer and Porter Flowtube Model 10D1430 (Integral) and Rosemount 8732E

Electrode ConnectionsROSEMOUNT 8732E TRANSMITTER

To L2

1

2

3

7

6

8

L2

L1

U2

U1

1

2

3

7

6

L2

L1

U2

U1

G

TB1

TB2Coil Connections

To Calibration Device(Disconnect)

Table E-7. Fischer and Porter Model 10D1430 (Integral) Flowtube Wiring Connections

Rosemount 8732E

Fischer and Porter Model 10D1430 (Integral)

Flowtubes

1 L1

2 L2

G

17 3

18 1

19 2




E-12



Model 10D1465 and Model 10D1475 Flowtubes (Integral) to 8732E Transmitter


Figure E-12. Wiring Diagram for Fischer and Porter Flowtube Model 10D1465 and Model 10D1475 (Integral) and Rosemount 8732E

2A

2

1

5

6

16

3

CT

M2

M1

MR


Coil Connections


Disconnect

Table E-8. Fischer and Porter Model 10D1465 and 10D1475 Flowtube Wiring Connections

Rosemount 8732E

Fischer and Porter Model 10D1465 and

10D1475 Flowtubes

1 MR

2 M1

3

17 3

18 1

19 2




E-13



Fischer and Porter Flowtube to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter


Figure E-13. Generic Wiring Diagram for Fischer and Porter Flowtubes and Rosemount 8732E

Table E-9. Fischer and Porter Generic Flowtube Wiring Connections

Rosemount 8732E Fischer and Porter Flowtubes

1 M1

2 M2

Chassis Ground

17 3

18 1

19 2

Electrodes

2

Coils

Chassis


FISCHER AND PORTER FLOWTUBES

Fuse

1

3

M2

M1




E-14



FOXBORO FLOWTUBES Connect coil drive and electrode cables as shown in Figure E-14.

Series 1800 Flowtube to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter

Figure E-14. Wiring Diagram for Foxboro Series 1800 and Rosemount 8732E


Coil Connections


FOXBORO SERIES 1800 FLOWTUBE

Outer ShieldWhite LeadWhite Shield

Black LeadBlack ShieldInner Shield

Table E-10. Foxboro Generic Flowtube Wiring Connections

Rosemount 8732E Foxboro Series 1800 Flowtubes

1 L1

2 L2

Chassis Ground

17 Any Shield

18 Black

19 White




E-15



Series 1800 (Version 2) Flowtube to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter


Figure E-15. Wiring Diagram for Foxboro Series 1800 (Version 2) and Rosemount 8732E

Table E-11. Foxboro Generic Flowtube Wiring Connections


1 L1

2 L2

Chassis Ground

17 Any Shield

18 Black

19 White


(VERSION 2)

ROSEMOUNT 8732E

TRANSMITTER

Coil Connections


GND L2 L1

WhiteBlack

Shield




E-16



Series 2800 Flowtube to 8732E Transmitter


Figure E-16. Wiring Diagram for Foxboro Series 2800 and Rosemount 8732E

Table E-12. Foxboro Series 2800 Flowtube Wiring Connections


1 L1

2 L2

Chassis Ground

17 Any Shield

18 Black

19 White


Coil Connections



Outer ShieldWhite LeadWhite Shield

Black LeadBlack ShieldInner Shield

White

Black

Any Shield

L2

L1

G




E-17



Foxboro Flowtube to 8732E Transmitter


Figure E-17. Generic Wiring Diagram for Foxboro Flowtubes and Rosemount 8732E

Table E-13. Foxboro Flowtube Wiring Connections

Rosemount 8732E Foxboro Flowtubes

1 L1

2 L2

Chassis Ground

17 Any Shield

18 Black

19 White

Electrodes

Coils

Ground

ROSEMOUNT 8732E TRANSMITTERFOXBORO

FLOWTUBE

L2

L1

White

Black

Any Shield

Fuse




E-18



KENT VERIFLUX VTC FLOWTUBE


Veriflux VTC Flowtube to 8732E Transmitter

Figure E-18. Wiring Diagram for Kent Veriflux VTC Flowtube and Rosemount 8732E

Table E-14. Kent Veriflux VTC Flowtube Wiring Connections

Rosemount 8732E Kent Veriflux VTC Flowtubes

1 2

2 1

SCR OUT

17 SCR OUT

18 SIG1

19 SIG2


Coil Connections


KENT VERIFLUX VTC FLOWTUBE

1S

CR

OU

T

23 S

IG 1

4 S

IG 2

56

12–

5+

6 S

CR

OU

T Fuse




E-19



KENT FLOWTUBES Connect coil drive and electrode cables as shown in Figure E-19.

Kent Flowtube to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter

Figure E-19. Generic Wiring Diagram for Kent Flowtubes and Rosemount 8732E

Table E-15. Kent Flowtube Wiring Connections

Rosemount 8732E Kent Flowtubes

1 1

2 2

SCR OUT

17 SCR OUT

18 SIG1

19 SIG2

Coils

Electrodes

SCR OUT


KENT FLOWTUBES

2

1

SIG2

SIG1

SCR OUT

Fuse




E-20



KROHNE FLOWTUBES Connect coil drive and electrode cables as shown in Figure E-20.

Krohne Flowtube to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter

Figure E-20. Generic Wiring Diagram for Krohne Flowtubes and Rosemount 8732E

Table E-16. Krohne Flowtube Wiring Connections

Rosemount 8732E Krohne Flowtubes

1 8

2 7

Coil Shield

17 Electrode Shield

18 2

19 3

Electrodes

Coils

Coil Shield

ROSEMOUNT 8732E TRANSMITTERKROHNE

FLOWTUBES

7

8

3

2

Electrode Shield

Fuse




E-21



TAYLOR FLOWTUBES Connect coil drive and electrode cables as shown in Figure E-21.

Series 1100 Flowtube to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter

Figure E-21. Wiring Diagram for Taylor Series 1100 Flowtubes and Rosemount 8732E

Table E-17. Taylor Series 1100 Flowtube Wiring Connections

Rosemount 8732E Taylor Series 1100 Flowtubes

1 Black

2 White

Green

17 S1 and S2

18 E1

19 E2



Coil Connections

TAYLOR SERIES 1100 FLOWTUBE

CLAR

White

Black

Green

L N G 1 2 3 4




E-22



Taylor Flowtube to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter


Figure E-22. Generic Wiring Diagram for Taylor Flowtubes and Rosemount 8732E

Table E-18. Taylor Flowtube Wiring Connections

Rosemount 8732E Taylor Flowtubes

1 Black

2 White

Green

17 S1 and S2

18 E1

19 E2

Electrodes

Coils

Green


TAYLOR FLOWTUBES

White

Black

E2

E1

S1 and S2

Fuse

This is a pulsed DCDC magnetic

flowmeter. Do not connect AC power to the flowtube or to terminals 1 and 2 of the transmitter, or replacement of the


E-23



YAMATAKE HONEYWELL FLOWTUBES


Yamatake Honeywell Flowtube to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter

Figure E-23. Generic Wiring Diagram for Yamatake Honeywell Flowtubes and Rosemount 8732E

Table E-19. Yamatake Honeywell Flowtube Wiring Connections

Rosemount 8732E Yamatake Honeywell Flowtubes

1 X

2 Y

Chassis Ground

17 C

18 B

19 A

Electrodes

Coils

Chassis Ground


YAMATAKE HONEYWELL FLOWTUBES

Y

X

A

B

C

Fuse




E-24



YOKOGAWA FLOWTUBES


Yokogawa Flowtube to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter

Figure E-24. Generic Wiring Diagram for Yokogawa Flowtubes and Rosemount 8732E

Table E-20. Yokogawa Flowtube Wiring Connections

Rosemount 8732E Yokogawa Flowtubes

1 EX1

2 EX2

Chassis Ground

17 C

18 B

19 A

Electrodes

Coils

Chassis Ground


YOKOGAWA FLOWTUBES

Ex 2

Ex 1

A

B

C

Fuse




E-25



GENERIC MANUFACTURER FLOWTUBES

Generic Manufacturer Flowtube to Rosemount 8732E Transmitter

Identify the Terminals First check the flowtube manufacturer’s manual to identify the appropriate terminals. Otherwise, perform the following procedure.

Identify coil and electrode terminals

1. Select a terminal and touch an ohmmeter probe to it.

2. Touch the second probe to each of the other terminals and record the results for each terminal.

3. Repeat the process and record the results for every terminal.

Coil terminals will have a resistance of approximately 3-300 ohms.

Electrode terminals will have an open circuit.

Identify a chassis ground

1. Touch one probe of an ohmmeter to the flowtube chassis.

2. Touch the other probe to the each flowtube terminal and the record the results for each terminal.

The chassis ground will have a resistance value of one ohm or less.

Wiring Connections Connect the electrode terminals to Rosemount 8732E terminals 18 and 19. The electrode shield should be connected to terminal 17.

Connect the coil terminals to Rosemount 8732E terminals 1, 2, and .

If the Rosemount 8732E Transmitter indicates a reverse flow condition, switch the coil wires connected to terminals 1 and 2.




E-26



Appendix F HART Field Communicator Operation

HandHeld Communicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page F-1

Connections and Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page F-7

Basic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page F-8

Menus and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page F-10

HANDHELD COMMUNICATOR

NOTEPlease refer to the Handheld Communicator manual for detailed instructions on the use, features, and full capabilities of the Handheld Communicator.

Explosions can result in death or serious injury.

Do not make connections to the serial port or NiCad recharger jack in an


Before connecting the Handheld Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure the

instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or nonincendive

field wiring practices.

www.rosemount.com



Table F-1. Handheld Fast Keys (HART Handheld Communicator) and LOI Keys


Process Variables 1, 1

Primary Variable (PV) 1, 1, 1

PV Percent of Range 1, 1,2

PV Analog Output (AO) 1, 1, 3

Totalizer Set-Up 1, 1, 4

Totalizer Units 1, 1, 4, 1

Gross Total 1,1,4,2

Net Total 1,1,4,3

Reverse Total 1,1,4,4

Start Totalizer 1,1,4,5

Stop Totalizer 1,1,4,6

Reset Totalizer 1,1,4,7

Pulse Output 1,1,5

Diagnostics 1,2

Diagnostic Controls 1,2,1

Basic Diagnostics 1,2,2

Self Test 1,2,2,1

AO Loop Test 1,2,2,2

Pulse Output Loop Test 1,2,2,3

Empty Pipe Limits 1,2,2,4

Empty Pipe (EP) Value 1,2,2,4,1

EP Trigger Level 1,2,2,4,2

EP Counts 1,2,2,4,3


Advanced Diagnostics 1,2,3

8714i Calibration Verification 1,2,3,1

Run 8714i Verification 1,2,3,1,1

8714i Results 1,2,3,1,2

Test Condition 1,2,3,1,2,1

Test Criteria 1,2,3,1,2,2

8714i Test Result 1,2,3,1,2,3

Simulated Velocity 1,2,3,1,2,4

Actual Velocity 1,2,3,1,2,5

Velocity Deviation 1,2,3,1,2,6

Transmitter Calibration Test Result 1,2,3,1,2,7

Tube Calibration Deviation 1,2,3,1,2,8

Tube Calibration Test Result 1,2,3,1,2,9

Coil Circuit Test Result* 1,2,3,1,2,10

Electrode Circuit Test Result* 1,2,3,1,2,11

Flowtube Signature 1,2,3,1,3

Signature Values 1,2,3,1,3,1

Re-Signature Meter 1,2,3,1,3,2

Recall Last Saved Values 1,2,3,1,3,3

Set Pass/Fail Criteria 1,2,3,1,4

No Flow Limit 1,2,3,1,4,1

Flowing Limit 1,2,3,1,4,2

Empty Pipe Limit 1,2,3,1,4,3

Measurements 1,2,3,1,5

4-20 mA Verify 1,2,3,2

4-20 mA Verification 1,2,3,2,1

4-20 mA Verify Result 1,2,3,2,2

Licensing 1,2,3,3

License Status 1,2,3,3,1

License Key 1,2,3,3,2

F-2



Device ID 1,2,3,3,2,1

License Key 1,2,3,3,2,2

Diagnostic Variables 1,2,4

EP Value 1,2,4,1


Line Noise 1,2,4,3

5 Hz Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) 1,2,4,4

37 Hz SNR 1,2,4,5

Signal Power 1,2,4,6

8714i results 1,2,4,7

Test Condition 1,2,4,7,1

Test Criteria 1,2,4,7,2

8714i Test Result 1,2,4,7,3

Simulated Velocity 1,2,4,7,4

Actual Velocity 1,2,4,7,5

Velocity Deviation 1,2,4,7,6

Transmitter Calibration Test Result 1,2,4,7,7

Tube Calibration Deviation 1,2,4,7,8

Tube Calibration Test Result 1,2,4,7,9

Coil Circuit Test Result* 1,2,4,7,--

Electrode Circuit Test Result* 1,2,4,7,--

Trims 1,2,5

D/A Trim\ 1,2,5,1

Scaled D/A Trim 1,2,5,2

Digital Trim 1,2,5,3

Auto Zero 1,2,5,4

Universal Trim 1,2,5,5

View Status 1,2,6

Basic Setup 1,3

Tag 1,3,1

Flow Units 1,3,2

PV Units 1,3,2,1

Special Units 1,3,2,2

Volume Unit 1,3,2,2,1

Base Volume Unit 1,3,2,2,2

Conversion Number 1,3,2,2,3

Base Time Unit 1,3,2,2,4

Flow Rate Unit 1,3,2,2,5

Line Size 1,3,3

PV Upper Range Value (URV) 1,3,4

PV Lower Range Value (LRV) 1,3,5

Calibration Number 1,3,6

PV Damping 1,3,7

Detailed Setup 1,4

Additional Parameters 1,4,1


Density Value 1,4,1,2

PV Upper Sensor Limit (USL) 1,4,1,3

PV Lower Sensor Limit (LSL) 1,4,1,4

PV Minimum Span 1,4,1,5

Configure Output 1,4,2

Analog Output 1,4,2,1

PV URV 1,4,2,1,1

PV LRV 1,4,2,1,2

PV AO 1,4,2,1,3

AO Alarm Type 1,4,2,1,4


F-3



AO Loop Test 1,4,2,1,5

D/A Trim 1,4,2,1,6

Scaled D/A Trim 1,4,2,1,7

Alarm Level 1,4,2,1,8

Pulse Output 1,4,2,2

Pulse Scaling 1,4,2,2,1

Pulse Width 1,4,2,2,2

Pulse Mode 1,4,2,2,3

Pulse Output Loop Test 1,4,2,2,4

DI/DO Output 1,4,2,3

Digital Input 1 1,4,2,3,1

Digital Output 2 1,4,2,3,2

Reverse Flow 1,4,2,4

Totalizer Set-Up 1,4,2,5

Totalizer Units 1,4,2,5,1

Gross Total 1,4,2,5,2

Net Total 1,4,2,5,3

Reverse Total 1,4,2,5,4

Start Totalizer 1,4,2,5,5

Stop Totalizer 1,4,2,5,6

Reset Totalizer 1,4,2,5,7

Alarm Level 1,4,2,6

HART Output 1,4,2,7

Variable Mapping 1,4,2,7,1

TV is 1,4,2,7,1,1

4V is 1,4,2,7,1,2

Poll Address 1,4,2,7,2

# of Req Preams 1,4,2,7,3

# of Resp Preams 1,4,2,7,4

Burst Mode 1,4,2,7,5

Burst Option 1,4,2,7,6

LOI Config 1,4,3

Language 1,4,3,1

Flowrate Display 1,4,3,2

Totalizer Display 1,4,3,3

Display Lock 1,4,3,4

Signal Processing 1,4,4

Operating Mode 1,4,4,1

Manual Configure DSP 1,4,4,2

Status 1,4,4,2,1

Samples 1,4,4,2,2

% Limit 1,4,4,2,3

Time Limit 1,4,4,2,4


Low Flow Cutoff 1,4,4,4

PV Damping 1,4,4,5

Universal Trim 1,4,5

Device Info 1,4,6

Manufacturer 1,4,6,1

Tag 1,4,6,2

Descriptor 1,4,6,3

Message 1,4,6,4

Date 1,4,6,5

Device ID 1,4,6,6

PV Sensor Serial Number 1,4,6,7

Flowtube Tag 1,4,6,8

Write Protect 1,4,6,9


F-4



Revision No.* 1,4,6,10

Universal Rev 1,4,6,10,1

Transmitter Rev 1,4,6,10,2

Software Rev 1,4,6,10,3

Final Assembly # 1,4,6,10,4

Construction Materials* 1,4,6,11

Flange Type 1,4,6,11,1

Flange Material 1,4,6,11,2

Electrode Type 1,4,6,11,3

Electrode Material 1,4,6,11,4

Liner Material 1,4,6,11,5

Review 1,5


F-5



F-6

Figure F-1. Field Communicator Menu Tree for the Rosemount 8732E1. D

evice Setup2. PV

3. PV

AO

4. PV

LR

V

5. PV U

RV

1. PV

2. PV %

rnge 3. PV

AO

4. T

otalizer Setup 5. Pulse O

utput

1. Totalizer U

nits 2. G

ross Total

3. Net T

otal 4. R

everse Total

5. Start Totalizer

6. Stop Totalizer

7. Reset T

otalizer

1. Diagnostic C

ontrols 2. B

asic Diagnostics

3. Advanced D

iagnostics 4. D

iagnostic Variables

5. Trim

s 6. V

iew Status

1. Process V

ariables

2. Diagnostics

3. Basic

Setup

4. Detailed

Setup

5. Review

1. Self Test

2. AO

Loop T

est 3. Pulse O

utput Loop T

est 4. E

mpty Pipe L

imits

5. Electronics T

emp

1. EP V

alue 2. E

lectronics Tem

p 3. L

ine Noise

4. 5 Hz SN

R

5. 37 Hz SN

R

6. Signal Power

7. 8714i Results

1. PV U

nits 2. Special U

nits

1. Volum

e Unit

2. Base V

olume U

nit 3. C

onversion Num

ber 4. B

ase Tim

e Unit

5. Flow R

ate Unit

1. Analog O

utput 2. Pulse O

utput 3. D

I/DO

Output

4. Reverse Flow

5. T

otalizer Setup 6. A

larm L

evel 7. H

AR

T O

utput

1. PV U

RV

2. PV

LR

V

3. PV A

O

4. AO

Alarm

Type

5. AO

Loop T

est 6. D

/A T

rim

7. Scaled D/A

Trim

8. A

larm L

evel

1. Pulse Scaling 2. Pulse W

idth 3. Pulse M

ode 4. Pulse O

utput Loop T

est

1. Totalizer U

nits 2. G

ross Total

3. Net T

otal 4. R

everse Total

5. Start Totalizer

6. Stop Totalizer

7. Reset T

otalizer

1. Variable M

apping 2. Poll A

ddress 3. # of R

eq Preams

4. # of Resp Pream

s 5. B

urst Mode

6. Burst O

ption

1. Operating M

ode 2. M

an Config D

SP 3. C

oil Drive Freq

4. Low

Flow C

utoff

5. PV D

amping

1. Coil D

rive Freq 2. D

ensity Value

3. PV U

SL

4. PV L

SL

5. PV M

in Span

1. Additional Param

s 2. C

onfigure Output

3. LO

I Config

4. Signal Processing 5. U

niversal Trim

6. D

evice Info

1. Digital Input 1

2. Digital O

utput 2

1. Tag

2. Flow U

nits 3. L

ine Size 4. PV

UR

V

5. PV L

RV

6. C

alibration Num

ber 7. PV

Dam

ping

1. Flange Type

2. Flange Material

3. Electrode T

ype 4. E

lectrode Material

5. Liner M

aterial

1. Manufacturer

2. Tag

3. Descriptor

4. Message

5. Date

6. Device ID

7. PV

Sensor S/N

8. Flowtube T

ag 9. W

rite Protect - R

evision No.

- Construction M

aterials

1. Universal R

ev 2. T

ransmitter R

ev 3. Softw

are Rev

4. Final Assem

bly #

1. Status 2. Sam

ples 3. %

Lim

it 4. T

ime L

imit

1. Language

2. Flowrate D

isplay 3. T

otalizer Display

4. Display L

ock

1. D/A

Trim

2. Scaled D

/A T

rim

3. Digital T

rim

4. Auto Z

ero 5. U

niversal Trim

1. 8714i Calibration V

erification

2. 4-20 mA

Verify

3. Licensing

1. Run 8714i V

erification

2. 8714i Results

3. Flowtube Signature

4. Set Pass/Fail Criteria

5. Measurem

ents

1. Signature Values

2. Re-Signature M

eter 3. R

ecall Last Saved V

alues

1. License Status

2. License K

ey 1. D

evice ID

2. License K

ey

1. TV

is 2. 4V

is

1. 4-20mA

Verifi

cation 2. 4-20m

A V

erify Result

1. Coil R

esistance 2. C

oil Signature 3. E

lectrode Resistance

1. No Flow

Lim

it 2. Flow

ing, Lim

it 3. E

mpty Pipe L

imit

1. Test C

ondition 2. T

est Criteria

3. 8714i Test R

esult 4. Sim

ulated Velocity

5. Actual V

elocity 6. V

elocity Deviation

7. Xm

tr Cal T

est Result

8. Tube C

al Deviation

9. Tube C

al Test R

esult - C

oil Circuit T

est Result

- Electrode C

ircuit Test

Result

1. Test C

ondition 2. T

est Criteria

3. 8714i Test R

esult 4. Sim

ulated Velocity

5. Actual V

elocity 6. V

elocity Deviation

7. Xm

tr Cal T

est Result

8. Tube C

al Deviation

9. Tube C

al Test R

esult - C

oil Circuit T

est Result

- Electrode C

ircuit Test

Result

1. EP V

alue 2. E

P Trig. L

evel 3. E

P Counts



CONNECTIONS AND HARDWARE

The HART Field Communicator exchanges information with the transmitter from the control room, the instrument site, or any wiring termination point in the loop. Be sure to install the instruments in the loop in accordance with intrinsically safe or nonincendive field wiring practices. Explosions can result if connections to the serial port or NiCad recharger jack are made in an explosive situation. The Handheld Communicator should be connected in parallel with the transmitter. Use the loop connection ports on the rear panel of the Handheld Communicator (see Figure F-2). The connections are non-polarized.

Figure F-2. Rear Connection Panel

Figure F-3. Connecting the Handheld Communicator to a Transmitter Loop

IRDA Port

Loop Connection Ports

HART Field Communicator Ports

PowerSupply

Current Meter

RL≥250�

F-7



NOTEThe Handheld Communicator needs a minimum of 250 ohms resistance in the loop to function properly. The Handheld Communicator does not measure loop current directly.

Figure F-4. Connecting the HART Field Communicator with the Optional Load Resistor

BASIC FEATURES The basic features of the Handheld Communicator include Action Keys, Function Keys, and Alphanumeric and Shift Keys.

Figure F-5. The Handheld Communicator

NOTELoop must be broken to insert the optional 250 ohm resistor.

Optional 250 ohm load resistor

Action Keys

F-8



Action Keys The Action KeysAs shown in Figure F-5, the action keys are the six blue, white, and black keys located above the alphanumeric keys. The function of each key is described as follows:

ON/OFF Key Use this key to power the Handheld Communicator. When the communicator is turned on, it searches for a transmitter on the 4–20 mA loop. If a device is not found, the communicator displays the message, “No Device Found at Address O. Poll? YES NO.”

Select “YES” to poll for devices at other address (1-16).

Select “NO” to go to the Main Menu.

If a HART-compatible device is found, the communicator displays the Online Menu with device ID (8712D) and tag (TRANSMITTER).

Directional Keys Use these keys to move the cursor up, down, left, or right. The right arrow key also selects menu options, and the left arrow key returns to the previous menu.

Tab KeyUse this key to quickly access important, user-defined options whenconnected to a HART-compatible device. Pressing the Hot Key turnsthe Handheld Communicator on and displays the Hot Key Menu. See Customizing the Hot Key Menu in the Handheld Communicator manual for more information.

Function Key

Use the four software-defined function keys, located below the LCD, to perform software functions. On any given menu, the label appearing above a function key indicates the function of that key for the current menu. As you move among menus, different function key labels appear over the four keys. For example, in menus providing access to on-line help, the label may appear above the F1 key. In menus providing access to the Home Menu, the label may appear above the F3 key. Simply press the key to activate the function. See your Handheld Communicator manual for details on specific Function Key definitions.

Alphanumeric and Shift Keys

The Alphanumeric keys perform two functions: the fast selection of menu options and data entry.

PageUp

PageDn Bksp Delete

HELP

HOME

F-9



Figure F-6. Handheld Communicator Alphanumeric and Shift Keys

Data Entry

Some menus require data entry. Use the Alphanumeric and Shift keys to enter all alphanumeric information into the Handheld Communicator. If you press an Alphanumeric key alone from within an edit menu, the bold character in the center of the key appears. These large characters include the numbers zero through nine, the decimal point (.), and the dash symbol (—).

To enter an alphabetic character, first press the Shift key that corresponds to the position of the letter you want on the alphanumeric key. Then press the alphanumeric key. For example, to enter the letter R, first press the right Shift key, then the “6” key (see Figure F-6 on page F-10). Do not press these keys simultaneously, but one after the other.

Fast Key Feature The Fast Key feature provides quick on-line access to transmitter variables and functions. Instead of stepping your way through the menu structure using the Action Keys, you can press a Fast Key Sequence to move from the Online Menu to the desired variable or function. On-screen instructions guide you through the rest of the screens.

Fast Key Example

The Fast Key sequences are made up of the series of numbers corresponding to the individual options in each step of the menu structure. For example, from the Online Menu you can change the Date. Following the menu structure, press 1 to reach Device Setup, press 4 for Detailed Setup, press 5 for Device Info, press 5 for Date. The corresponding Fast Key sequence is 1,4,5,5.

Fast Keys are operational only from the Online Menu. If you use them consistently, you will need to return to the Online Menu by pressing HOME (F3) when it is available. If you do not start at the Online Menu, the Fast Keys will not function properly.

Table F-1, is a listing of every on-line function with the corresponding Fast Keys. These codes are applicable only to the transmitter and the Handheld Communicator.

MENUS AND FUNCTIONS

The Handheld Communicator is a menu driven system. Each screen provides a menu of options that can be selected as outlined above, or provides direction for input of data, warnings, messages, or other instructions.

F-10



Main Menu The Main Menu provides the following options:

• Offline - The Offline option provides access to offline configuration data and simulation functions.

• Online - The Online option checks for a device and if it finds one, brings up the Online Menu.

• Transfer - The Transfer option provides access to options for transferring data either from the Handheld Communicator (Memory) to the transmitter (Device) or vice versa. Transfer is used to move off-line data from the Handheld Communicator to the flowmeter, or to retrieve data from a flowmeter for off-line revision.

NOTEOnline communication with the flowmeter automatically loads the current flowmeter data to the Handheld Communicator. Changes in on-line data are made active by pressing SEND (F2). The transfer function is used only for off-line data retrieval and sending.

• Frequency Device - The Frequency Device option displays the frequency output and corresponding flow output of flow transmitters.

• Utility - The Utility option provides access to the contrast control for the Handheld Communicator LCD screen and to the autopoll setting used in multidrop applications.

Once selecting a Main Menu option, the Handheld Communicator provides the information you need to complete the operation. If further details are required, consult the Handheld Communicator manual.

Online Menu The Online Menu can be selected from the Main Menu as outlined above, or it may appear automatically if the Handheld Communicator is connected to an active loop and can detect an operating flowmeter.

NOTEThe Main Menu can be accessed from the Online Menu. Press the left arrow action key to deactivate the on-line communication with the flowmeter and to activate the Main Menu options.

When configuration variables are reset in the on-line mode, the new settings are not activated until the data are sent to the flowmeter. Press SEND (F2) to update the process variables of the flowmeter.

On-line mode is used for direct evaluation of a particular meter, re-configuration, changing parameters, maintenance, and other functions.

F-11



Diagnostic Messages The following is a list of messages used by the Handheld Communicator (HC) and their corresponding descriptions.

Variable parameters within the text of a message are indicated with <variable parameter>.

Reference to the name of another message is identified by [another message].

Table F-2. Handheld Communicator Diagnostic Messages

Message Description

Add item for ALL device types or only for this ONE device type Asks the user whether the hot key item being added should be added

for all device types or only for the type of device that is connected.

Command Not Implemented The connected device does not support this function.

Communication Error Either a device sends back a response indicating that the message it

received was unintelligible or the HC cannot understand the response

from the device.

Configuration memory not compatible with connected device The configuration stored in memory is incompatible with the device to

which a transfer has been requested.

Device Busy The connected device is busy performing another task.

Device Disconnected Device fails to respond to a command

Device write protected Device is in write-protect mode Data can not be written

Device write protected – do you still want to shut off? Device is in write-protect mode – press YES to turn the HC off and lose

the unsent data.

Display value of variable on hot key menu? Asks whether the value of the variable should be displayed adjacent to

its label on the hot key menu if the item being added to the hot key menu

is a variable.

Download data from configuration memory to device Prompts user to press SEND softkey to initiate a memory to device

transfer.

Exceed field width Indicates that the field width for the current arithmetic variable exceeds

the device- specified description edit format

Exceed precision Indicates that the precision for the current arithmetic variable exceeds

the device- specified description edit form

Ignore next 50 occurrences of status? Asked after displaying device status – softkey answer determines

whether next 50 occurrences of device status will be ignored or

displayed

Illegal character An invalid character for the variable type was entered.

Illegal date The day portion of the date is invalid.

Illegal month The month portion of the date is invalid.

Illegal year The year portion of the date is invalid.

Incomplete exponent The exponent of a scientific notation floating point variable is

incomplete.

Incomplete field The value entered is not complete for the variable type.

Looking for a device Polling for multidropped devices at addresses 1–15

Mark as read only variable on hot key menu? Asks whether the user should be allowed to edit the variable from the

hot key menu if the item being added to the hot key menu is a variable

No device configuration in configuration memory There is no configuration saved in memory available to re-configure

off-line or transfer to a device.

No Device Found Poll of address zero fails to find a device, or poll of all addresses fails to

find a device if auto-poll is enabled

No hot key menu available for this device There is no menu named “hot key” defined in the device description for

this device.

No off-line devices available There are no device descriptions available to be used to configure a

device off-line.

No simulation devices available There are no device descriptions available to simulate a device.

No UPLOAD_VARIABLES in ddl for this device There is no menu named “upload_variables” defined in the device

description for this device – this menu is required for off-line

configuration.

F-12



No Valid Items The selected menu or edit display contains no valid items.

OFF KEY DISABLED Appears when the user attempts to turn the HC off before sending

modified data or before completing a method

On-line device disconnected with unsent data – RETRY or OK to

lose data

There is unsent data for a previously connected device. Press RETRY

to send data, or press OK to disconnect and lose unsent data.

Out of memory for hot key configuration – delete unnecessary

items

There is no more memory available to store additional hot key items.

Unnecessary items should be deleted to make space available.

Overwrite existing configuration memory Requests permission to overwrite existing configuration either by a

device-to-memory transfer or by an off-line configuration; user answers

using the softkeys

Press OK... Press the OK softkey – this message usually appears after an error

message from the application or as a result of hart communications.

Restore device value? The edited value that was sent to a device was not properly

implemented. Restoring the device value returns the variable to its

original value.

Save data from device to configuration memory Prompts user to press SAVE softkey to initiate a device-to-memory

transfer

Saving data to configuration memory Data is being transferred from a device to configuration memory.

Sending data to device Data is being transferred from configuration memory to a device.

There are write only variables which have not been edited.

Please edit them.

There are write-only variables which have not been set by the user.

These variables should be set or invalid values may be sent to the

device.

There is unsent data. Send it before shutting off? Press YES to send unsent data and turn the HC off. Press NO to turn

the HC off and lose the unsent data.

Too few data bytes received Command returns fewer data bytes than expected as determined by the

device description

Transmitter Fault Device returns a command response indicating a fault with the

connected device

Units for <variable label> has changed – unit must be sent before

editing, or invalid data will be sent

The engineering units for this variable have been edited. Send

engineering units to the device before editing this variable.

Unsent data to on-line device – SEND or LOSE data There is unsent data for a previously connected device which must be

sent or thrown away before connecting to another device.

Use up/down arrows to change contrast. Press DONE when done. Gives direction to change the contrast of the HC display

Value out of range The user-entered value is either not within the range for the given type

and size of variable or not within the min/max specified by the device.

<message> occurred reading/writing <variable label> Either a read/write command indicates too few data bytes received,

transmitter fault, invalid response code, invalid response command,

invalid reply data field, or failed pre- or post-read method; or a response

code of any class other than SUCCESS is returned reading a particular

variable.

<variable label> has an unknown value – unit must be sent before

editing, or invalid data will be sent

A variable related to this variable has been edited. Send related variable

to the device before editing this variable.

Table F-2. Handheld Communicator Diagnostic Messages

Message Description

F-13



F-14



Index

AAccuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10

Rosemount 8705/8707 . . A-20Rosemount 8711 . . . . . . A-24

Action Keys

Handheld Communicator . F-9Alphanumeric Keys

Handheld Communicator . F-9Ambient Temperature . . . . . . A-12

Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8

Ambient Temperature Limits . . A-8Analog Output

Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Analog Output

Adjustment . . . . . . . A-3, A-8Analog Output Test . . . . A-4, A-9Analog Power . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Applications/Configurations . . . 2-4Auto Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-2Auxiliary Output . . 2-13, A-4, A-9

BBasic Setup . . . . . . . . . . 3-6, 3-7Bolts

Flanged . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

CCable Requirements for Remote

Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-68Cables

Conduit . . . . . . . . 2-6, 2-17Calibration Number . . . . . . . 3-11Conductivity

Rosemount

8705/8707 . . . . . A-13, A-18Rosemount

8711 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23Conduit Connections

Installation . . . . . . 2-6, 2-17Conduit Ports and Connections

Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Configurations/Applications . . . 2-4Connections

Handheld Communicator . F-7

Cover Gasket, Materials of

Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12

DDamping . . . . . . . . . . .3-11, A-9Data Entry

Handheld Communicator F-10Dedicated Conduit . . . . . . . . 2-16Device Software Functions

Basic Setup . . . . . . .3-6, 3-7Diagnostic Messages . . . . . . . 6-3

Handheld Communicator F-12LOI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Digital Signal Processing . . . . D-1Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Downstream/Upstream Piping 5-4

EElectrical

Considerations . . . . . . . . 2-7Electrical Connections . . . . . A-12Electrical Considerations . . . . 2-7Enclosure Ratings . . . . . . . . . A-8Environmental Considerations 2-3

FFailure Alarm Mode . . . . . . . . 2-4Fast Key

Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10Fast Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2Flange Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Flanges

Class 150 . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Class 300 . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Flow Direction . . . . . . . . .5-5, 5-6Flow Rate

Units . . . . . . . . 3-7, 3-8, 3-9Flowtube

Connections . . . . . . . . . 2-16Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Flowtube Compensation . . . A-10

Flowtubes

Brooks Model 5000 . . . . E-6Endress and

Hauser Models . . . . . . . . E-5Fischer and Porter

Model 10D1418 . . . . . . . E-8Foxboro Series 1800 . . E-15Generic Flowtube . . . . . E-26Kent Flowtubes . . . . . . E-20Kent Veriflux VTC . . . . . E-19Krohne Flowtubes . . . . E-21Rosemount

8705/8707/8711 . . . . . . . E-3Taylor Series 1100 . . . . E-22Yamatake Honeywell

Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . E-24Yokogawa Flowtubes . . E-25

Function Keys

Handheld Communicator .F-9

GGaskets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7

Installation

Wafer Flowtube . . . .5-10Ground Connection

Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Protective . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Grounding Electrodes . . .5-13Grounding Rings . . . . . .5-13Lining Protectors . . . . . .5-13Process Grounding . . . . .5-12

www.rosemount.com



HHandheld Communicator

Action Keys . . . . . . . . . . F-9Alphanumeric Keys . . . . . F-9Basic Features . . . . . . . . F-8Connections . . . . . . . . . . F-7Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . F-10Diagnostic Messages . . . F-12Function Keys . . . . . . . . . F-9Functions . . . . . . . . . . . F-10Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . F-11Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . F-6Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10Online Menu . . . . . . . . . F-11Shift Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9

Housing, Materials

of Construction . . . . . . . . . . A-12Humidity Limits . . . . . . . . . . . A-8

IInstallation

Auxiliary Output . . . . . . . 2-13Category . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Conduit Connections 2-6, 2-17Connect 4-20 mA

Loop External

Power Source . . . . . . . . 2-10Considerations . . . . . . . . 2-9Diagram

Cable Preparation . . 2-17Environmental

Considerations . . . . . . . . 2-3Flowtube Connections . . 2-16Mechanical

Considerations . . . . . . . . 2-2Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Positive Zero Return . . . 2-14Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Process Leak

Containment . . . . . . 5-17Relief Valves . . . . . . . . . 5-17Safety Messages . . . 2-1, 5-1Wafer Flowtube . . 5-10, 5-12

Alignment and Bolting 5-10Flange Bolts . . . . . . 5-11Gaskets . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Installation Category . . . . . . . . 2-9Internal

Ground Connection . . . . 5-13

LLine Power Fuses . . . . . . . . A-12Line Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Lining Protectors

Grounding . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Load Resistor Requirements . 2-11

Local Operator Interface (LOI)

Diagnostic Messages . . . 3-5Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Low Flow Cutoff . . . . . . . . . . A-9Lower Range Value (LRV) . . 3-10

MMaterials of Construction . . . A-12Maximum Power

Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Mechanical

Considerations . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-7Menu

Handheld Communicator F-10Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6

Messages

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Rosemount

8705/8707 . . . . . A-15, A-20Rosemount

8711 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24

NNiCad Recharger . . . . . . . . . F-7North American

Response Center . . . . . . . . . 1-2

OOptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Orientation

Flowtube . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Output

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Output Signals . . . . . . . A-3, A-8Output Testing . . . . . . . A-4, A-9Overcurrent Protection . . . . . . 2-9Overrange Capability . . . A-4, A-9

PPaint, Materials of

Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12Performance Specifications . A-10Physical Specifications . . . . A-12Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Positive Zero Return . . 2-14, A-9Power

Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Power Supply Load

Limitations . . . . . . . . . . A-2, A-7Pressure

Rosemount

8705/8707 . . . . . . . . . . A-17Rosemount

8711 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23Process Grounding . . . . . . . 5-12

Process Leak

Containment . . . . . . . . .5-17Process Variables . . . . . . . . . .3-5Protection

Overcurrent . . . . . . . . . . .2-9Protective

Ground Connection . . . .5-13Pulse Duration

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Pulse Output Test . . . . . .A-4, A-9PZR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

RRelief Valves . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Remote Transmitters

Cable requirements . . . A-68Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . A-10Response Time . . . . . . . . . .A-11RFI Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12

SSafety Messages . . . . . . . . . .1-2Scalable Frequency

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .A-4, A-9Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Shift Keys

Handheld Communicator .F-9Signal Processing . . . . . . . . . D-2Software

lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9

Index-2



Specifications

Rosemount 8705 and

Rosemount 8707

accuracy . . . . . . . . A-20ambient temperature

limits . . . . . . . . . . . A-17ASME/ANSI . . . . . . A-21conductivity

limits . . . . . . A-13, A-18electrical

connections . . . . . . A-21electrodes . . . . . . . A-20functional

specifications . . . . . A-17grounding

electrode . . . . . . . . A-21grounding rings . . . . A-21interchangeability . . A-17line sizes . . . . . . . . A-17lining . . . . . . . . . . . A-20lining protectors . . . A-21mounting position

effect . . . . . . A-15, A-20non-wetted

materials . . . . . . . . A-20performance

specifications . . . . . A-19physical specifications A-20pressure limits . . . . A-17process conditions . A-21process temperature

limits . . . . . . . . . . . A-17process wetted

materials . . . . . . . . A-20service . . . . . . . . . . A-17submergence

protection . . . . . . . . A-17upper range limit . . . A-17vacuum limits . . . . . A-17vibration effect . . . . A-20weight . . . . . . . . . . A-21

Rosemount 8711

accuracy . . . . . . . . A-24ambient temperature

limits . . . . . . . . . . . A-23conductivity limits . . A-23electrodes . . . . . . . A-24functional specifications A-23interchangeability . . A-23line sizes . . . . . . . . A-23lining . . . . . . . . . . . A-24mounting position

effect . . . . . . . . . . A-24non-wetted materials A-24performance

specifications . . . . . A-24physical

specifications . . . . . A-24process conditions . A-25process temperature

limits . . . . . . . . . . . A-23process-wetted

materials . . . . . . . . A-24safe working pressure A-23service . . . . . . . . . A-23upper range limit . . A-23vibration effect . . . . A-24

Specifications and Reference Data


Ambient Temperature

Limits . . . . . . . . . . . A-8Conductivity Limits . . A-7Damping . . . . . . . . . A-9Enclosure Ratings . . A-8Flow Rate Range . . . A-7Flowtube Coil

Resistance . . . . . . . A-7Flowtube

Compatibility . . . . . . A-7Flowtube

Compensation . . . . A-10Humidity Limits . . . . A-8Installation Coordination A-8Low Flow Cutoff . . . . A-9Output Signals . A-3, A-8Output Testing . A-4, A-9Overrange

Capability . . . . A-4, A-9Positive Zero Returns A-9Power Consumption . A-8Power Supply . . . . . A-7Software Lockout . . . A-9Start-up Time . . . . . . A-9Turn-on Time . . . . . . A-9

Performance Specifications A-10Accuracy . . . . . . . A-10Ambient Temperature

Effect . . . . . . . . . . A-12Repeatability . . . . . A-10Response Time . . . .A-11RFI Effect . . . . . . . A-12Stability . . . . . . . . .A-11Supply Voltage Effect A-12Vibration Effect . . . A-10

Physical Specifications . A-12Cable Requirements for

Remote Transmitters

. . . . . . . . A-68Electrical Connections A-12Line Power Fuses . A-12Materials of

Construction . . . . . A-12Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-11Start-up Time . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8Supply Voltage

Requirements . . . . . . . . 2-11Supply Voltage Effect . . . . . A-12Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

Changing Settings . . . . . .2-5Closure Requirements . . 2-11Failure Alarm Mode . . . . .2-4

TTag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8

Rosemount

8705/8707 . . . . . . . . . . A-17Rosemount

8711 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23Transmitter Output Instability

Auto Zero . . . . . . . . . . . D-2Procedures . . . . . . . . . . D-2Signal Processing . . . . . D-2

Transmitter Security . . . . . . . .2-5Transporting System . . . . . . . .5-3Troubleshooting

Advanced (Transmitter) . .6-7Installed Flowtube Tests .6-10Process Noise . . . . . . . . .6-9Uninstalled Flowtube Tests 6-11Wiring Errors . . . . . . . . . .6-9

Turn-on Time . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9

UUpper Range Value (URV) . .3-10Upstream/Downstream Piping .5-4

Accuracy

Ensuring . . . . . . . . . .5-4

Index-3



VVCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14Vibration

Rosemount

8705/8707 . . . . . . . . . . A-20Rosemount

8711 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24Vibration Effect . . . . . . . . . . A-10

WWeight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12

Rosemount

8705/8707 . . . . . . . . . . A-21Wiring

Conduit Ports and

Connections . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Dedicated Conduit . . . . . 2-16Installation Category . . . . 2-9

Wiring Diagrams

Brooks Rosemount 5000 . E-6Endress and Hauser

Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5Fisher and Porter

Model 10D1418 . . . . . . . . E-8Foxboro Series 1800 . . . E-15Generic Flowtube . . . . . E-26Kent Flowtubes . . . . . . . E-20Kent Verifulx VTC . . . . . E-19Krohne Flowtubes . . . . . E-21Rosemount

8705/8707/8711 . . . . . . . E-3Taylor Series 1100 . . . . E-22Yamatake Honeywell

Flowtubes . . . . . . . . . . . E-24Yokogawa Flowtubes . . . E-25

Index-4

Reference Manual00809-0100-4662, Rev AA

August 2007

Emerson Process Management

© 2007 Rosemount Inc. All rights reserved.

¢00809-XXXX-XXXX ¤

The Emerson logo is a trade mark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co.Rosemount and the Rosemount logotype are registered trademarks of Rosemount Inc.PlantWeb is a registered trademark of one of the Emerson Process Management group of companies.All other marks are the property of their respective owners.

Rosemount Temperature GmbHNeonstraat 1 6718 WX EdeThe Netherlands T +31 (0)318 495555F +31(0) 318 495556

Emerson Process Management Asia Pacific Private Limited1 Pandan CrescentSingapore 128461T (65) 6777 8211F (65) 6777 [email protected]

Rosemount Divison8200 Market BoulevardChanhassen, MN 55317 USAT (U.S.) 1-800-999-9307T (International) (952) 906-8888F (952) 949-7001

www.rosemount.com